sjvn thermal private limited

Environmental Impact Assessment Study Report

For

Proposed 2x660 MW Buxar Thermal Power Project near Chausa, Buxar District, Bihar State

October 2016

Project Proponent

SJVN Thermal Private Limited (STPL)

(Wholly Owned Subsidiary of SJVN Ltd.-A Mini Ratna and Schedule A PSU under Govt. of

India)

Study Conducted by

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

Accredited EIA Consulting Organization Certificate No: NABET/EIA/1316/RA009

Parry House, 4th Floor, No. 2, N.S.C Bose Road Chennai 60001

Final Report

SJVN Thermal Private Limited

EIA for the Proposed 2 x 660 MW Buxar Thermal Power Plant (BTPP) near Chausa, District Buxar, Bihar

Project No.PJ-ENVIR-2016323-735 Dated: 25th October 2016

Declaration

2

DECLARATION BY PROJECT PROPONENT




Declaration

3

This EIA report has been prepared by Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

(CMSRSL), in line with EIA Notification, dated 14th September 2006, seeking prior

Environmental Clearance from the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change,

New Delhi.

This work has been undertaken in accordance with ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management

System with all reasonable skill, care and diligence within the terms of the contract with

the client, incorporating our General Terms & Conditions of Business and taking account of

the resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.

We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters outside the

scope of the above.

Further, this report is confidential to the client and the use of this report by unauthorized

third parties without written authorization from CMSRSL shall be at their own risk.

For and on behalf of Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

Approved by : N V Subba Rao

Sign :

Designation : Chief Executive

DECLARATION BY EIA CONSULTANT




Declaration

4

I, hereby, certify that I was part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed

the above EIA.

Sector as per NABET Scheme 4 Thermal Power Plant

Sector as per EIA Notification 1(d)

(A- Category) Thermal Power Plant

EIA Coordinator:

Name: Mr. V. S.Bhaskar

Signature:

Date: October, 2016

Period of Involvement: March 2016 to till date

Contact Information: M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

“PARRY” House 3rd Floor,

No. 2 NSC Bose Road, Chennai – 600 001

[email protected]

+91-044- 3044 5620

Functional Area Experts:

S.No. Functional

Areas Name of the

Expert/s Involvement

(Period and Task) Signature

1 AP- Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring & Control

Mr. Ravishankar D June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Site visit, design of Ambient air quality monitoring network, evaluation of result of ambient air quality monitoring, inferring baseline data collected, identification of potential impact to air quality during construction and operation phase, suggesting relevant pollution control systems as per regulations, developing and finalizing EMP to minimize impact to air quality and monthly monitoring needed.

2 WP- Water Pollution Monitoring Prevention & Control

Mr. V S Bhaskar June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Site visit, Finalization of sampling locations, finalizing water balance for the project, suggesting relevant waste water treatment systems, inference of baseline

PROJECT DECLARATION BY EIA CONSULTANT ORGANIZATION

mailto:[email protected]




Declaration

5

S.No. Functional

Areas Name of the



data collected identification of impacts and preparation of mitigation plan.

3 SHW Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Mr. Ravishankar D June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Identification of solid waste to be generated from the process and suggesting mitigation plan.

4 SE Socio-Economic Aspects

Dr. Mangalam Balasubramanian

June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Undertaking primary socio-economic survey, identification of social impact due to proposed project, preparation of mitigation plan, development of CSR plan.

5 SE Socio-Economic Aspects

Mr. Karthick C S

June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Undertaking primary socio-economic survey, identification of social impact due to proposed project, preparation of mitigation plan, development of CSR plan.

6 EB Ecology and Biodiversity

Mr. I. Siva Ram Krishna and Dr. T. Balakrishna

June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Field survey. Impact prediction and suggesting mitigation measures. Preparation of ecology management plan.

7 AQ Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling & Prediction

Mr. V S Bhaskar June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Supervision of air quality modeling and identification of impacts due to proposed expansion. Finalization of mitigation measures with client.

8 NV Noise & Vibration

Mr. V S Bhaskar June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Inference from noise modelling, identification of potential impacts due to proposed project and developing mitigation measures.

9 LU Land Use

Mr. Rajendra Prasad

June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Preparation of land use land cover maps for the study area using GIS/ related tools followed by ground truth verification.

10 RH Risk & Hazard Management

Mr. V S Bhaskar June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Identification of risk due to storage of fuel and raw materials, interpreting consequence contours, suggesting risk mitigation measures.




Declaration

6

S.No. Functional

Areas Name of the



11 MSW and Team Member

Ms. Sathya.S June 2016 to Ongoing Task: Identification of solid waste to be generated from the process and suggesting mitigation plan and coordination with EIA coordinator & functional area expert in report writing

Associate Functional Area Experts involved:

1. Mr. Pudi Rama Satya Kamesh – AFAE – AP & AP

2. Mr.Ganta Srikanth- AFAE- WP & AP

Team Member:

1. Mr.Mahendra.B

2. Ms.Saumya

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization/ Authorized

Person

I, N V Subbarao, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA

Report as per the project inputs prepared by SJVN Thermal Private Limited after

incorporating the public hearing aspects for the Proposed 2 x 660 MW Buxar Thermal

Power project near Chausa, Buxar District .

I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any

misleading information mentioned in this statement.

Signature:

Name: N V Subbarao

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services

Limited

NABET Certificate No.: NABET/EIA/1316/RA009


EIA for the Proposed 2 x 660 MW Buxar Thermal Power Pl ant (BTPP) near Chausa, District Buxar, Bihar


Executive Summary

7

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

About SJVN Thermal Private Limited

In order to meet the growing electricity demand in the State of Bihar and neighboring

States, Government of Bihar, in 2008, has taken the initiative for developing Thermal

Power Projects in the state through Bihar Power Infrastructure Company (BPIC), a joint

venture between Bihar State Power Holding Company Limited (BSPHCL) with IL&FS

Energy Development Company Limited (IEDCL). BPIC and BSEB had identified a site

near village Chausa in District Buxar for the development of 2x660 MW Coal based

Thermal Power Project. The Project was housed in the Company named “Buxar Bijlee

Company Private Limited” In the year 2013, Govt. of Bihar decided to award the

implementation of the Project to M/s. SJVN Ltd (SJVN), a Central Public Sector Utility,

and the MoU for transfer of the Project to SJVN was signed after the approval of the

State Cabinet. SJVNL, after taking over the Project Company has renamed the company

as “SJVN Thermal Private Limited (STPL)”

Need and Benefits of the Proposed Thermal Power Plant

The proposed Power Project by STPL will be able to bridge the demand and supply gap

of electrical power in the state of Bihar and also will improve the overall quality of the

power in this region. The proposed power project can propel both economic and social

growth in the region through direct benefits of power supply and indirect benefits

through various induced economic development in the region. In addition to the above

factors, STPL proposes to take up comprehensive community development plans under

the Corporate Social Responsibility programs of the company.

The proposed power project will provide the following overall benefits to the country:

Adequate compensation was already paid to more than 1100 beneficiaries as per

the latest applicable regulations and guidelines and land acquisition is already

completed. Since there are no settlements and permanent structures located at

the project site, no displacement of people and material are envisaged under this

project.




Executive Summary

8

The proposed power plant will be designed and operated on modern and

environmental friendly technologies which will help to reduce the carbon

footprint (carbon dioxide emissions) when compared with conventional thermal

power plants.

The proposed power plant adopts highest level of pollution control management

measures such as electrostatic precipitators (ESP), flue gas desulfurization (FGD)

and technologies to reduce the NOx emissions from the boiler.

The proposed power plant will adopt zero liquid discharge program and the

entire treated wastewater will be reused for the project.

STPL has budgeted to spend about Rs. 61 Cr for various community development

activities under Corporate Social Responsibility Program (CSR) over a period of

10 to 15 years.

The proposed power plant will provide direct and indirect employment to many

people based on their qualification, skill sets and experience.

Project Location

The proposed power plant site is located in the Western side of Bihar state and located

about 10 kms south west of Buxar City near Chausa village in the Chausa Gola region in

Buxar District of Bihar. Uttar Pradesh State Boundary is about 0.8 km from the project

site and the River Karmanasa is dividing the two states. The study area (10 km radius)

lies in between North Latitudes of 25° 23' and 25°34' and East Longitude of 83° 48' and

83°58" and forms part of the Survey of India Top sheet Nos. 63 O-14 & 15with an aerial

extent is around 363.42 Sq.Km. The Project site is located in SOI Topo sheet of 63 O-15.

Location of the project is shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. The nearest village is located

at about 0.7 Km from the proposed project site boundary and there are no major

industries located within 10Km radius of the project. As per the revenue records and

also Indian Topo sheet data, there are no forest land parcels at the project site and also

10Km radius study area. There are no notified ecologically sensitive areas in the study

area.




Executive Summary

9

Figure ES-1-10Km Radius of the Project Site (Land Use and Land Cover Map)




Executive Summary

10

Figure ES-2-The Project Area represented on a Toposheet




Executive Summary

11

Project Chronology

The project was initially appraised in MoEF&CC EAC meeting 11th July 2008 and the

project was accorded terms of reference as per the EIA Notification 2006. Subsequently

the then project proponent (M/s. BPIC) has undertaken the EIA study during April –

June 2008. The EIA report was presented in public hearing held on 30th July 2010 at the

Town hall, Buxar. After obtaining the necessary coal linkage from the concerned

authorities, the current project proponent (STPL) has approached MoEF&CC for

environmental clearance along with a revised baseline studies conducted in 2015 and

an addendum EIA Report with updated studies. The project was further appraised in the

55th Meeting of the Re-Constituted Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) of Thermal

Power & Coal Mining Projects, Ministry of Environment and Forests & Climate Change

and was issued revised terms of reference for EIA study of the project. Although there

are no significant changes in the background environmental setting since the earlier EIA

study period 2008 and the revised baseline conducted in 2015 by the Project

Proponent, the EAC has recommended to undertake a revised EIA study based on a one

month air quality monitoring data, prepare EIA report and carryout a public

consultation. As per the revised TOR issued by MoEF&CC, (ToR) Letter No.J-

13012/69/2008-IA.I (T) dated 7th June, 2016, M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services

(CMSRSL), a NABET accredited EIA consulting organization was appointed along with

M/s. AES Laboratories Pvt Limited for undertaking the EIA study and baseline

environmental studies respectively. CMSRSL has undertaken detailed EIA study during

the period March – June 2016 and submitted this EIA report based on the following

data: (1). Baseline data of 2008, (2) Revised baseline studies undertaken during March –

June 2015, (3) Current baseline environmental monitoring data for the period May –

June 2016. Draft report was submitted to PCB for conducting Public Hearing and the the

public hearing was held on 4th October 2016 at The Town Hall, Buxar Town.

OVERVIEW OF THE PROPOSED POWER PROJECT

Process description - The proposed 2x660 MW thermal power plant will be developed

in an area of 1064 acres of the land with a total Project cost of Rs. 10,520 Cr. The

proposed power plant will be designed and operated based on super critical boiler

technology which is most environment friendly technology that can provide lowest




Executive Summary

12

possible specific fuel consumption. The proposed power plant consists of the main

power block unit consisting of two identical units. Each unit will be capable of

generating about 660MW of electrical energy. Each unit consist of a coal processing unit,

coal fired steam generating boiler, electrostatic precipitator, flue gas desulfurization

unit and a tall stack of 275m height. The steam generated from the boilers will be sent

to a dedicated condensing steam turbine. The power thus generated will be uploaded to

the grid. The cooling demands in the power plant will be met through two sets of forced

draft type cooling towers. Other facilities such as coal storage area, water storage area,

ash pond (dyke) and railway siding will be developed at the proposed project as per the

project requirement.

Fuel requirement – Coal from theDeocha-Pachami Coal Block will be the primary fuel

for the project. About 6.7 Million Tons per of Indian coal will be used every year. The

necessary coal linkage from the Ministry of Coal was obtained for the project. As per the

geological reports available the maximum ash and sulphur content in the coal will be in

the order of 41% and 0.6%. For the purpose of the operating the power plant until the

coal from the Deocha-Pachami block is made available, imported coal sourced from

MMTC Ltd. will be utilized during the first 4 years of operation of the power plant. The

peak demand of the imported coal (when operated on standalone basis) will be in the

order of 3.9 Million Tons per year. The peak ash and sulphur content in the imported

coal will be limited 12% and 0.8%. Coal will be received by railway wagons at the

project site and will be stored at the site for the project needed.

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Site elevation: The project area (10 km radius) exhibits plain terrain and relatively

elevated terrain in the southern side of the project site. There is no reserved forest

within 10 km radius from the project site boundary. The majority of the land in the

study area falls under agriculture land (double/single or fallow). The average elevation

of the proposed power plant project site falls between 56.5 m to 66.5 m (MSL) as

against the 100 years flood level of 62.8m. The project site falls under single and double

crop land area with highly undulating terrain. The project site is sloping from south -east

to North west side. Ganga River is located at about 3.5km from the project site boundary

on the northwest side.




Executive Summary

13

Meteorological data: The area experiences a maximum and minimum temperature of

46.6 Deg C in summer and 3.3 Deg C in winter respectively. The mean wind speed in the

area during the pre-monsoon period (May – June 2016) is in the order of 3.2 m/sec.

Winds generally are blowing from East to West during the summer period with a

maximum occurrence of about 40% of the total time.

Ambient Air Quality– There is no major industries in the study area, except few brick

kilns. The measured ambient air quality in the study area during May to June 2016

shows that the PM10 concentration varies from 36.32 to 47.26 μg/m3 as against the

stipulated limit of 100 μg/m3. PM2.5 concentration varies from 18.35 to 27.01 μg/m3as

against the stipulated level of 60 μg/m3. Average SO2and NOx concentration in the study

area was reported to be in the range of 11.13 μg/m3 to 16.68 μg/m3 and 13.22 μg/m3 to

18.70 μg/m3 respectively. It is inferred from the measured baseline data that all the

stipulated pollutants are well within the limits suggested under National Ambient Air

Quality Norms (NAAQs).

Noise Levels in the study area - Average day time and night time noise levels at

residential areas in the study area was found to be varying from 44.93 to 68.94 dB (A)

and 41.59 dB(A) to 60.08 dB(A) respectively. Significant interference from local

community activities and also vehicular traffic was observed.

Water Environment - The water sample was collected in the Ganga River (Upstream &

downstream) which is the major source of water for the project and River Karmanasa

which is near to the project site. The pH of surface water sample is found to bein the

range of 7.14 to 7.23 along the river stretch. TDS varies in the range of 324 mg/l to 364

mg/l. The Heavy metals concentrations are found to be below non-detectable levels. By

adopting certain level of pre-treatment, the river water can be utilized for portable use.

Ecological Environment- The phytosociological study of the core zone (terrestrial

habitat) beyond the riparian habitat comprises of manmade ecosystem. Tree plantation

in form of landscaping was noticed at nearby residential area, government offices,

hospitals, schools, temples and market places. Good number of wild mammals exists in

the study area, even though anthropogenic activity and urbanized habitat present in the

region.




Executive Summary

14

Socioeconomic conditions -Cumulative population in the study area is about 2.5 Lakhs

with a population density of about 900 persons/Sq.km. According to the census records

of 2011, about 40% population in the study area falls under Below Poverty Line (BPL)

category. The higher rate of Agriculture with respect to study area shows the majority

of the people are depended on agriculture for their livelihood.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

The proposed project is an environmental friendly facility with a reduced carbon foot

print and water footprint when compared with conventional power plants that are in

operation in the current day of operation. The following environmental management

plan will be adopted at design and operational phases of the proposed project. About Rs.

1300 Cr has been allocated for implementing various pollution control systems and also

other management programs.

Air Pollution control programs – In order to meet the new power plant standards,

STPL proposed to install higher efficiency electrostatic precipitators to meet the

emission level below 30 mg/Nm3. The envisaged uncontrolled SO2 emissions from each

boiler will be in the order of 5000 Kg/hr. In order to meet the new power plant

standards, a flue gas desulfurization unit (FGD) will be installed to remove about 95% of

the SO2 emissions from the power plant.. The peak predicted ground level concentration

of SO2, NOx and Particulate Matter due to release of controlled emissions was reported

to be in the order of 1.4 µg/m3, 1.4 µg/m3and 0.55µg/m3 respectively. The cumulative

resultant post project baseline scenario will be far below the stipulated NAAQ

standards. These predicted concentrations will be 8 to 10 folds lower than that of the

uncontrolled emission scenario.

Water and wastewater management plan-the facility will be operated on dry fly ash

handling system and hence the overall water consumption will be limited to 2.5

m3/MWHR against 4 m3/KWHR in the case of conventional power plants in tropical

regions. Total fresh water demand in the facility will be in the order of 3265 m3/hr

(~78,400 m3/day). Necessary water allocation was granted by Government of Bihar

vide MOU dated 29th August 2016. Majority of the water will be used as make up for the

cooling tower. The following environmental management plans will be adopted: (1).

Adopting good water quality for cooling water make up there by reducing the blow-




Executive Summary

15

down losses, (2). Reuse of cooling tower blow down for bottom ash handling, fly ash

conditioning, make up to the evaporation losses in the ash pond area etc. In order to

achieve complete reuse of treated wastewater in the plant, suitably designed Reverse

Osmosis plant will be installed to treat the cooling tower blow down, (3) other stream

wastewater if any will be collected in a collection pit and will be subjected to

neutralization and will be reused for ash conditioning and bottom ash handling

operations, (4). Any excess utilized wastewater will be collected in a lined polishing

pond and will be reused in the plant based on the main plant demand, (5). Online

pollutant monitoring system will be installed on the treated wastewater line of the

polishing pond as per the CPCB guidelines, (6). About 70 m3/hr (~1700 m3/day)

sewage generated from the domestic needs (canteen, colony, toilets etc) will be treated

in a dedicated sewage treatment plant and reused for greenbelt development, gardening

and horticulture applications within the project site.

Fly ash utilization plan - Estimated quantity of ash produced from the proposed

2x660MW plant with 90 % PLF will be in the order of 2.7 Million tons per annum. For

ash disposal from Buxar TPP (2X660MW) plant, about 282 acres of land is identified

within the project area. As per MoEF&CC latest notification, 100 percent fly ash

utilization is to be achieved progressively within 4 years starting with 50% in 1st year

and 70% & 90% in 2nd & 3rd year respectively of plant commissioning. STPL has already

received EOI’s from cement plants, state road and building works departments and

others to utilize about 3 Million tons of fly ash per year. Hence the STPL will be able to

achieve 100% fly ash utilization from third year onwards. Since fly ash can act as

impervious liner, therefore no liner is required for storing the utilized fly ash during

the first four years. Only bottom ash lagoon shall be lined with impervious liner. To

avoid fugitive ash dust emission and for promoting vegetation cover, the final ash

surface will be covered with 300 mm thick earth cover.

Afforestation and Green Belt – About 178 acres of land (33% of the main plant area)

will be developed under afforestation and greenbelt. A green belt of 50-100m width has

been planned all around the main plant area except the switchyard side. In addition,

extensive afforestation and plantation activities shall be undertaken in all available

spaces within the main plant and township areas. Further, avenue plantation




Executive Summary

16

will be undertaken along roadside in Plant and Township areas. About 80,000

samplings will be planned in the greenbelt area with native species of plants.

Community development activities – STPL is committed for implementing various

community development activities as a part of their corporate social responsibility

programs. STPL has already spent about Rs. 175 Lakhs towards various CSR programs

such as Mobile Medical Services, health camps, primary health centre consumables,

SJVN Silver Jubliee Merit Scholarship, Training and Agricultural Equipment to Farmers,

Skill Development Training for Unemployed Youth through CIDC, Faridabad, PCC of

Road construction, Installation of Hand Pumps in the nearby villages and contribution

to CM Relief Fund for the victims of Earthquake etc. In continuation to the above CSR

programs, STPL has budgeted to spend about Rs. 61 Cr on various community

development plans in the nearby villages programs over a period of 10 to 15 years.

CONCLUSION

This project will have beneficial effects in terms of growth and development of the

regional economy.

The project will result in industrialization in around the project site which will

further increase the indirect employment generation rate.

The proposed project is structured to be in line with the requirements of

MoEF&CC/CPCB.

The proposed facility will completely reuse and recycle the waste water

generated and treated wastewater will be used for plant operations and

greenbelt development purpose. No wastewater will be discharged into natural

water bodies.

This project will also generate direct and indirect employment to a considerable

number of families, who will render their services for the employees of the

project.

The project will also pave way for increase in ancillary industries in the region,

which will not only increase the employment potential but also further

strengthen the economic base of the region.

Thus, it can be concluded that with the judicious and proper implementation of the

pollution control and mitigation measures, the proposed project will have less




Executive Summary

17

significant negative impact on the environment, whereas due to the possible direct and

indirect benefits, there will be a positive impact on the society and regional economic

scenario.




Table of Content

18

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 7

About SJVN Thermal Private Limited ...................................................................................... 7

Need and Benefits of the Proposed Thermal Power Plant ......................................................... 7 Project Location ......................................................................................................................... 8

Project Chronology .................................................................................................................. 11

OVERVIEW OF THE PROPOSED POWER PROJECT ....................................................... 11

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................. 12

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN...................................................................... 14

CONCLUSION ........................................................................................................................ 16

1. INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................... 27

1.1. Preamble .................................................................................................................... 27 1.2. Overview of the Project............................................................................................. 27

1.3. Environmental Setting of the Proposed Project ........................................................ 31 1.4. Need for the Project................................................................................................... 32

1.5. The Project Chronology ............................................................................................ 32 1.5.1. Environmental Impact Assessment Studies Undertaken .................................................. 33

1.6. Revised EIA Report .................................................................................................. 36 1.7. About the Consultant and Accreditation ................................................................... 37 1.7.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 37 1.7.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant ........................................ 37 1.7.3. Details of Experts Engaged for this Study...................................................................... 37

1.8. Regulatory Context ................................................................................................... 38 1.8.1. Ambient Air Quality Standards ..................................................................................... 38 1.8.2. Air Emission Discharge Standards for Thermal Power Plants.......................................... 39 1.8.3. Minimum Stack Height Standards ................................................................................. 40 1.8.4. Work-zone Noise Standards.......................................................................................... 40 1.8.5. Thermal Power Plant – Specific Wastewater Standards .................................................. 40 1.8.6. Fly ash Utilization........................................................................................................ 41

1.9. Structure of the EIA Report ...................................................................................... 42

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 44

2.1. Overview ................................................................................................................... 44 2.2. Land for the Project ................................................................................................... 46 2.3. Vision of the Project.................................................................................................. 48 2.3.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 48 2.3.2. Long Term Vision for the Project.................................................................................. 49

2.4. Process Description and Technology ........................................................................ 51 2.4.1. Technology & Layout .................................................................................................. 51 2.4.2. Design Parameters ....................................................................................................... 53 2.4.3. Steam Generating Unit and Auxiliaries.......................................................................... 55 2.4.4. Turbine Generator Unit and its Auxiliaries .................................................................... 61 2.4.5. Power Evacuation System ............................................................................................ 62

2.5. Requirement of Major Inputs for Manufacture ......................................................... 63 2.5.1. Coal ............................................................................................................................ 63




Table of Content

19

2.5.2. Coal Transportation and Handling System ..................................................................... 63 2.5.3. Fuel Oil Handling Plant................................................................................................ 64 2.5.4. Water Resources and Water Requirement for the Project ................................................ 65 2.5.5. Water Treatment Systems ............................................................................................. 68 2.5.6. Wastewater Treatment Systems .................................................................................... 70

2.6. Solid Waste Generation............................................................................................. 71 2.6.1. Fly Ash Generation ...................................................................................................... 71 2.6.2. Ash Disposal Area ....................................................................................................... 72 2.7. Reduction in Carbon Footprint.................................................................................. 72

2.8. Project Cost Estimates and Schedule ........................................................................ 73

3. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS............................................................ 74

3.1. Preamble .................................................................................................................... 74 3.2. Study area .................................................................................................................. 74 3.3. Scope and Methodology of Conducting Baseline Study........................................... 75

3.4. Administration Setup of the Study Area District ...................................................... 80 3.5. Land Environment ..................................................................................................... 81 3.5.1. Physiography and Drainage .......................................................................................... 81 3.5.2. Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data ........................................................... 89

3.6. Geology and Soil Quality .......................................................................................... 97 3.6.1. Geology of the Region ................................................................................................. 97 3.6.2. Geology of the Study Area ........................................................................................... 98 3.6.3. Geomorphology ........................................................................................................... 99 3.6.4. Soil Environment ....................................................................................................... 101

3.7. Meteorological Conditions ...................................................................................... 107 3.7.1. Climatological Data – IMD Chapra (Bihar) Observatory .............................................. 107 3.7.2. Site Specific Meteorological Data for the Study Period ................................................ 110 3.7.3. Rainfall ..................................................................................................................... 111

3.8. Air Environment...................................................................................................... 112 3.8.1. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations .................................................................... 112 3.9. Noise Environment.................................................................................................. 116

3.10. Water Environment ................................................................................................. 118 3.10.1. Surface Water Resources in the Study Area ................................................................. 118 3.10.2. Surface Water Quality ................................................................................................ 119 3.10.3. Ground Water Resources ............................................................................................ 120 3.10.4. Ground Water Quality ................................................................................................ 129

3.11. Ecological Environment .......................................................................................... 131 3.11.1. Introduction............................................................................................................... 131 3.11.2. Scope of Study .......................................................................................................... 133 3.11.3. Objectives and purpose of the study ............................................................................ 134 3.11.4. Review of the Literature ............................................................................................. 135 3.11.5. Methodology ............................................................................................................. 138 3.11.6. Results ...................................................................................................................... 145 3.11.7. Ecosystem wise Study ................................................................................................ 147 3.11.8. Flora of the Study Area .............................................................................................. 150 3.11.9. Fauna of the Study Area ............................................................................................. 151 3.11.10. Statistical Analysis ................................................................................................. 152 3.11.11. Aquatic Ecosystem ................................................................................................. 157

3.12. Socio Economic Environment................................................................................. 159 3.12.1. Socioeconomic Environment based on Census 2011..................................................... 159




Table of Content

20

4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES .......................................................................................................................... 174

4.1 General .................................................................................................................... 174 4.2 Identification of Likely Impacts .............................................................................. 174

4.3 Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase ................................ 179 4.3.1 Land Use................................................................................................................... 179 4.3.2 Soil Quality ............................................................................................................... 179 4.3.3 Air Quality ................................................................................................................ 180 4.3.4 Noise Levels.............................................................................................................. 180 4.3.5 Predicted Impacts on Water Quality ............................................................................ 181 4.3.6 Solid and Hazardous Waste ........................................................................................ 182 4.3.7 Ecology and Biodiversity ........................................................................................... 183 4.3.8 Socio-Economic Impacts ............................................................................................ 183

4.4. Impacts during operational phase............................................................................ 183 4.4.1. Land Use................................................................................................................... 184 4.4.2. Air Quality ................................................................................................................ 184 4.4.3. Fugitive Coal Dust Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts .......................... 197 4.4.4. Fugitive Dust Control Management............................................................................. 200 4.4.5. Traffic related Impacts ............................................................................................... 201

4.5. Noise Levels and Impacts ....................................................................................... 202 4.5.1. Impact Assessment .................................................................................................... 202 4.5.2. Mitigation Measures for Noise.................................................................................... 204

4.6. Water Environment ................................................................................................. 205 4.6.1. Impact....................................................................................................................... 205 4.6.2. Wastewater Treatment................................................................................................ 208

4.7. Flood Risk Impact ................................................................................................... 208 4.7.1. Flood Scenario at the Project Site and Risk Mitigation Measures .................................. 208

4.8. Solid Waste Management (Fly Ash Disposal) ........................................................ 210 4.8.2. Ash Disposal Area ..................................................................................................... 213

4.9. Ecological Environment .......................................................................................... 214 4.9.1. Impact on flora .......................................................................................................... 214 4.9.2. Impacts on fauna........................................................................................................ 214 4.9.3. Impact –Mitigation matrix .......................................................................................... 215

4.10. Socio economic Aspects.......................................................................................... 216 4.10.1. Impacts ..................................................................................................................... 216 4.10.2. Mitigation Measures .................................................................................................. 217

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ........................................................................ 218

5.1. Site Identification and Selection ............................................................................. 218

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM............................................... 220

6.1. Preamble .................................................................................................................. 220 6.2. Objectives of Environmental Monitoring Plan ....................................................... 220 6.3. Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure ............................................. 221 6.3.1. Monitoring Schedule .................................................................................................. 221 6.3.2. Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase ....................................................... 221 6.3.3. Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase............................................................ 222 6.4. Data Analysis .......................................................................................................... 223 6.4.1. Reporting Schedule .................................................................................................... 223

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES....................................................................................... 224




Table of Content

21

7.1. Public Consultation ................................................................................................. 224 7.2. Risk Assessment and Risk Mitigation Measures .................................................... 228 7.2.1. Methodology ............................................................................................................. 228

7.3. Construction Phase Safety Management Plan......................................................... 229 7.3.1. General Safety Aspects .............................................................................................. 229 7.3.2. Occupational Health Risks and Risk Mitigation Plan – Construction Phase.................... 230

7.4 Safety Hazards during Operational Phase ............................................................... 231 7.4.1 Hazardous Operations ................................................................................................ 231 7.4.2 Safety Aspects of Storage of Furnace Oil..................................................................... 232 7.4.3 Risk Mitigation Measures for the Storage and Handling of Coal ................................... 234 7.4.4 Risk Mitigation Measures for Storage of Chlorine Tonners ........................................... 235 7.4.5 Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Program ........................................ 240 7.5 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems .............................................................. 243

7.6 Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan ..................................................................... 244 7.6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................... 244 7.6.2 Existing Laws and Policies related to R&R.................................................................. 245 7.6.3 Project Site and Land Acquisition ............................................................................... 247 7.6.4 Displacement of People & Public Amenities and R&R applicability.............................. 247 7.6.5 Compensation Entitlement Plan for Land Acquisition................................................... 248

7.7 Disaster Management Plan ...................................................................................... 250 7.7.1 Preamble ................................................................................................................... 250 7.7.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan [DMP] ......................................................... 251 7.7.3 Actuation of the plan .................................................................................................. 252 7.7.4 Emergency Equipment ............................................................................................... 253 7.7.5 Emergency response .................................................................................................. 253 7.7.6 Emergency control center ........................................................................................... 254 7.7.7 Response Evaluation, Testing and Updating of the Plan................................................ 254 7.7.8 Reporting to Authorities ............................................................................................. 255

8. PROJECT BENEFITS ............................................................................................ 256

8.1. Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure ............................................................ 256

8.2. Improvement in Social Infrastructure ..................................................................... 256 8.2.1. Induced Development ................................................................................................ 256 8.2.2. Power supply ............................................................................................................. 256

8.3. Direct and Indirect Benefit for Public ..................................................................... 256 8.3.1. Employment .............................................................................................................. 256 8.3.2. Improved socio-economic conditions .......................................................................... 257 8.3.3. Health ....................................................................................................................... 257 8.3.4. Training for developing skills for locals ...................................................................... 257

9. ENVIRONMNENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN .................................................. 258

9.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................. 258 9.2. Summary of Proposed Pollution Control Measures ................................................ 258

9.3. Administrative Aspects ........................................................................................... 260 9.3.1. Commitment & Policy ............................................................................................... 260 9.3.2. Planning .................................................................................................................... 260 9.3.3. Implementation.......................................................................................................... 260 9.3.4. Environmental Management System ........................................................................... 260 9.3.5. Environmental Management Records .......................................................................... 261 9.3.6. Environmental Management System Audits ................................................................. 261 9.3.7. Environmental Management Cell ................................................................................ 262

9.4. Fly Ash Utilization Program ................................................................................... 268




Table of Content

22

9.5. Ecological Environment .......................................................................................... 271 9.5.1. Proposed Monitoring Mechanism for Conservation Activities ....................................... 272

9.6. Green belt Development.......................................................................................... 274 9.6.1. Criteria for Selection of Species (Selection of species done as per Green Belt Development Plan given by CPCB manual, MoEF&CC) ................................................................................. 275

9.7. Rain Water Harvesting Programs............................................................................ 278 9.7.1. Rainfall Runoff Estimations........................................................................................ 278 9.7.2. Rain Water Harvesting – Rooftop runoff collection and recharge .................................. 280 9.7.3. Storage cum Percolation Pond .................................................................................... 281

9.8. Renewable Energy and Reduction in Carbon Footprint.......................................... 281

9.9. Occupational Health Facility................................................................................... 282 9.10. Corporate Social Responsibility.............................................................................. 285 9.10.1. CSR Programs carried out by STPL ............................................................................ 285 9.10.2. Proposed Need Based CSR Programs .......................................................................... 287 9.10.3. Eligible Development Programs under Companies Act 2013 ........................................ 289 9.10.4. CSR Budget .............................................................................................................. 290

9.11. Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management ................................... 296

10. CONCLUSION ....................................................................................................... 297

11. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ..................................................................... 298

11.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................. 298

11.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant .............................. 298 11.2.1. Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study .......................................... 298 11.2.2. Other Technical Team Members ................................................................................. 299 11.2.3. External Labs/Agencies involved in EIA Study............................................................ 299

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Salient Features of the site and Its Environs ........................................................................ 31 Table 1-2 Project Chronology ............................................................................................................................... 32

Table 1-3 National Ambient Air Quality Standards................................................................................. 38

Table 1-4 General Ambient Noise Standards .............................................................................................. 40

Table 1-5 Liquid Effluent Standards for Thermal Power Plant ....................................................... 41 Table 2-1 Overview of the proposed project requirements .............................................................. 44

Table 2-2 Land use break-up of the Proposed Plant .............................................................................. 47

Table 2-3 Water Balance.......................................................................................................................................... 68

Table 2-4 Envisaged Fly Ash Generation ....................................................................................................... 71 Table 3-1 Various Environmental Attributes.............................................................................................. 76

Table 3-2 Frequency and Monitoring Methodology ............................................................................... 77

Table 3-3 Land use classes around 10 km radius..................................................................................... 94

Table 3-4 General Geological Succession....................................................................................................... 98 Table 3-5Details of Soil Sampling Locations ............................................................................................ 104

Table 3-6 Physico-Chemical characteristics of soil samples collected within the study area..................................................................................................................................................................................... 106

Table 3-7 Climatological Normals (30 Years Met Data: 1971-2001) Station: Chapra (Bihar) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 108

Table 3-8 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations .................................................. 113

Table 3-9 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants ........................ 115




Table of Content

23

Table 3-10 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants (April to June 2008 VS March to June 2015)................................................................................................................. 115 Table 3-11 Noise Sampling Locations .......................................................................................................... 116

Table 3-12 Recorded Noise Levels (May 2016)...................................................................................... 117

Table 3-13 Surface Water sampling............................................................................................................... 119

Table 3-14 Ground Water Resources & Development Potential of Buxar District (in Ham) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 122

Table 3-15 Ground water level and depth (10 m radius)................................................................. 124

Table 3-16: Details of Water Sampling Locations ................................................................................. 129

Table 3-17 GPS coordinates of the sampling points ............................................................................ 137 Table 3-18 Population Distribution ............................................................................................................... 159

Table 3-19 BPL Households and Rate of BPL Households in Blocks......................................... 164

Table 3-20 Workers Group Distribution in the Study Area ............................................................ 164

Table 3-21 Literacy pattern in the Study Area ........................................................................................ 168

Table 3-22 Summary Socioeconomic Indicators of the Study Area ........................................... 172 Table 4-1 Activity-Impact Identification Matrix for Construction Phase of the Proposed Project .............................................................................................................................................................................. 175

Table 4-2 Activity – Impact Identification Matrix for Operation Phase of the Proposed Project .............................................................................................................................................................................. 178 Table 4-3 Air Quality Modeling Inputs ......................................................................................................... 185

Table 4-4 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)............................................................................................... 187

Table 4-5 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)....................................................................................................................................... 188

Table 4-6 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Nitrogen Dioxide Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)............................................................................................... 189

Table 4-7 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Nitrogen Dioxide Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)....................................................................................................................................... 190

Table 4-8 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Particulate Matter Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)............................................................................................... 191

Table 4-9 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Particulate Matter Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)....................................................................................................................................... 192

Table 4-10 Summary of the predicted GLCs and Post Project Scenario .................................. 192

Table 4-11 Envisaged Peak Fly Ash Load on the ESPs ....................................................................... 193

Table 4-12 Proposed Vehicular Movement in Terms of PCU’s per Day................................... 201 Table 4-13 Envisaged Equipment Noise Levels (Sound Pressure Levels) ............................. 202

Table 4-14 Elevation at the Project Site ......................................................................................................... 210

Table 4-15 Fly ash Utilization Plan Based on Indian coal ................................................................ 211

Table 4-16 Fly ash Utilization Plan Based on Imported Coal ......................................................... 212 Table 4-17 Impact Vs Mitigation Matrix...................................................................................................... 215

Table 5-1: Alternative Sites Evaluated ......................................................................................................... 219

Table 6-1 Environmental Monitoring during Project Construction Phase ............................ 221

Table 6-2 Environmental Monitoring Programs during Operation Phase ............................ 222

Table 6-3 Recommended Environmental Monitoring Plan............................................................. 223 Table 7-1 Environmental Social Management Plan for the Points Raised in Public Hearing ............................................................................................................................................................................ 225

Table 7-2 Estimated Heat Radiation Levels due to Fire from Furnace Oil Tank Rupture............................................................................................................................................................................................... 233




Table of Content

24

Table 7-3 Effect of Chlorine at Various Concentrations .................................................................... 237

Table 7-4 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Program.............................................................................................................................................. 242

Table 7-5 Suggested Medical Tests under Occupational Health Surveillance Program 242

Table 7-6 Village Wise Land Acquisition Details ................................................................................... 248

Table 7-7 Budget Estimated by Govt. of Bihar for the Land Acquisition as per the Applicable Regulations and Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 248

Table 9-1 – Environmental Management Plan for the Proposed Project- Construction Phase ................................................................................................................................................................................. 264

Table 9-2 – Environmental Management Plan for the Proposed Project- Operation Phase............................................................................................................................................................................................... 265

Table 9-3 Fly Ash Generation and Utilization Plan............................................................................... 268

Table 9-4:Various Tie-ups for Fly Ash Utilization ................................................................................. 269

Table 9-5 List of plants identified for greenbelt and plantations within the Power plant area (Three tier model along the fencing wall) ...................................................................................... 276 Table 9-6 Proposed financial Budget for the Green belt development (Rs in Lakhs)..... 277

Table 9-7 Proposed financial Budget for the habitat conservation (Rs in Lakhs) ............ 277

Table 9-8 Pre project Runoff Estimations .................................................................................................. 279

Table 9-9 Predicted Post Project Run-Off from the Project Area ................................................ 279 Table 9-10 Calculation of Rainwater Harvesting................................................................................... 280

Table 9-11 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Program.............................................................................................................................................. 284

Table 9-12 Suggested Medical Tests under Occupational Health Surveillance Program............................................................................................................................................................................................... 284

Table 9-13 Expenditure on CSR Activities Carried out ...................................................................... 286

Table 9-14 CSR Budget........................................................................................................................................... 291

Table 9-15 Proposed Budget for Environmental Management Plan......................................... 296

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Project site location............................................................................................................................ 28

Figure 1-2 Topo map within 10Km radius from the Project boundary...................................... 29

Figure 1-3 Google Map showing 10 Km Radius ......................................................................................... 30

Figure 1-4 Google Map showing Project area with Co-Ordinates .................................................. 30 Figure 2-1 Proposed Project Layout................................................................................................................. 47

Figure 2-2 Photographs showing typical view of the proposed Project Site........................... 48

Figure 2-3Location of the Proposed River Water Intake Point ....................................................... 66

Figure 2-4 River Water Intake.............................................................................................................................. 67 Figure 3-1High Resolution Satellite image showing project site and its Latitude and Longitude........................................................................................................................................................................... 75

Figure 3-2 Topo Map (10 Km radius) of the Study area....................................................................... 79

Figure 3-3 Administrative Map of Buxar District ..................................................................................... 80 Figure 3-4 Physiographic map of the study area ...................................................................................... 82

Figure 3-5 Phyisiography of the Study Area................................................................................................ 83

Figure 3-6 Drainage Map of Bihar ...................................................................................................................... 84

Figure 3-7 Drainage & Water Bodies Map of the Project Site ........................................................... 85 Figure 3-8 Flow Chart showing Methodology of Land use mapping............................................ 91

Figure 3-9 Bar Chart showing the Land use classes around 10 km radius............................... 95

Figure 3-10 IRS Resourcesat-2 L4FMX Image of the Buffer Zone (10km)................................ 95




Table of Content

25

Figure 3-11 Land Use/Cover Map of 10 Km Radius Area.................................................................... 96

Figure 3-12 Geological Map of Bihar ................................................................................................................ 97 Figure 3-13 Geology of the Study area ............................................................................................................ 99

Figure 3-14 Geomorphology of the Study area ....................................................................................... 101

Figure 3-15 Soil classification of Study area............................................................................................. 103

Figure 3-16 Soil Quality Monitoring Location of the Study area.................................................. 105 Figure 3-17 Annual Windrose as per IMD Chapra Observatory Data....................................... 109

Figure 3-18 Windrose Diagram for Various Seasons as per IMD Chapra Observatory Data .................................................................................................................................................................................... 109

Figure 3-19 Site Specific Wind Rose for the Study Period (17th May 2016 to 15th June 2016)................................................................................................................................................................................. 110

Figure 3-20 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Location of the Study area .............................. 113

Figure 3-21 Noise Sampling Locations ........................................................................................................ 117

Figure 3-22 Surface water Resources in the Study area ................................................................... 119

Figure 3-23 Hydrogeology Map of Buxar District ................................................................................. 121 Figure 3-24 The season wise ground water level.................................................................................. 123

Figure 3-25 Ground water level zone of the Study area.................................................................... 125

Figure 3-26 Ground water Table of the Study area (Pre monsoon) .......................................... 127

Figure 3-27 Ground water Table of the Study area (Post monsoon) ........................................ 128 Figure 3-28 Water Sampling locations......................................................................................................... 130

Figure 3-29 Map from Google earth depecting the GPS coordinates ........................................ 138

Figure 4-1 Isopleths of SO2 .................................................................................................................................. 187

Figure 4-2 Isopleths of NO2 ................................................................................................................................. 189 Figure 4-3 Isopleths of PM................................................................................................................................... 191

Figure 4-4 Layout of the ESPs in the proposed 2x660MW Power Plant ................................. 193

Figure 4-5 Typical View of a FGD System .................................................................................................. 195

Figure 4-6 Typical Process Flow Diagram of FGD System ................................................................. 195 Figure 4-7 Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’S of PM10 due to Controlled Fugitive Dust Emissions from Coal Stock Yard (Google Image – 5KM radius)............................................................................ 199

Figure 4-8 Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’S of PM10 due to Controlled Fugitive Dust Emissions from Coal Stock Yard (Plant Layout) ............................................................................................................. 199 Figure 4-9 Coal Dust Suppression Sprinklers Arrangements ........................................................ 200

Figure 4-10 Typical View of Dust Suppression Sprinklers .............................................................. 201

Figure 4-11 Predicted Noise Levels due to the Proposed Power Plant Operation ........... 204

Figure 4-12 Flood Map of Bihar State (ref) .................................................................................................. 209 Figure 7-1 Consequence Distance – Heat Radiation Levels ............................................................ 233

Figure 7-2: Dispersion Model of Chlorine Release from 900 Kg Tonner ................................ 237

Figure 7-3 Google Map Showing the Project layout and Site Photographs ........................... 249

Figure 9-1 Location of some of the Major Brick Manufacturing Units in the Region ...... 270 Figure 9-2 Fly Ash Brick Manufacturing Units ........................................................................................ 270

Figure 9-3 Use of Fly ash for Underground Mine Reclamation (ref) ......................................... 271

Figure 9-4 Greenbelt Development Map..................................................................................................... 273

Figure 9-5 CSR Programs Carried by STPL................................................................................................ 286

Figure 9-6 Proposed Village Specific CSR Program.............................................................................. 289




Table of Content

26

List of Abbreviation’s

AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring ASI Archaeological Survey of India BDL Below Detection able Limit BPIC Bihar Power Infrastructure Company BSEB Bihar State Electricity Board CBD Conventional Biological Diversity

CGWB Central Ground Water Board CMS Conventional Migratory Species

CMSRSL Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd. CSR Corporate Social Responsibility

EIA Environment Impact Assessment EPTRI Environment Protection Training and Research Institute

IAIA International Association of Impact Assessment IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing and Financial Services LULC Land Use and Land Cover

NABET National Accreditation Board of Education and Training PCU Passenger Car Unit

SOI Survey of India STPL SJVN Thermal Private Limited TDS Total Dissolved Solids TOR Terms of Reference

List of Annexure

1. TOR Letter dated 10th September 2008

2. Approved ToR_7th June 2016 and

3. Compliance to the ToR

4. NABET Certificate

5. Coal Linkage for Indian Coal and MoU for imported coal

5.1 Aproval for coal transportation from Indian Railways

6. Water Allocation Letter

6.1 Water Allocation MOU

7. Water Balance

8. EOI and MoU for Fly Ash Disposal

9. Baseline Monitoring Report 2016

10. List of Flora and Fauna in the study area

11. Air quality Modeling Output file

12. Public Hearing Proceedings

13. Application for NOC of diversion of Budhanala




Chapter 1-Introduction

Page C1-27

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. Preamble

In order to meet the growing electricity demand in the State of Bihar and neighboring

States, Government of Bihar, in 2008, has taken the initiative for developing Thermal

Power Projects in the state through Bihar Power Infrastructure Company (BPIC), a joint

venture between Bihar State Power Holding Company Limited (BSPHCL) with IL&FS

Energy Development Company Limited. BPIC and BSEB had identified a site near village

Chausa in District Buxar for the development of 2x660 MW Coal based Thermal Power

Project. The Project was housed in the Company named “Buxar Bijlee Company Private

Limited” In the year 2013, Govt of Bihar decided to award the implementation of the

Project to M/s. SJVN Ltd (SJVNL), a Central Public Sector Utility, and the MoU for

transfer of the Project to SJVNL was signed after the approval of the State Cabinet.

SJVNL, after taking over the Project Company has renamed the company as “SJVNL

Thermal Private Limited”

1.2. Overview of the Project

The proposed site is located in the Western side of Bihar state and located about 10 kms

south west of Buxar City near Chausa village in the Chausa Gola region in Buxar District

of Bihar. Uttar Pradesh State Boundary is about 0.8 km from the project site and the

River Karmanasa is dividing the two states. The nearest railway station Chausa is about

5 - 6 km from the project site, which is connected to Howrah – New Delhi main line

railway track of East Central Railway Zone. Nearest airport is Patna, which is

approximately 120 kms. The nearest major seaport to the site is Haldia, West Bengal.

The study area (10 km radius) lies in between North Latitudes of 25° 23' and 25°34' and

East Longitude of 83° 48' and 83°58" and forms part of the Survey of India Top sheet

Nos. 63O-14 & 15. The Project site is located in Survey of India Topo sheet of 63O/15.

The project site location is given in Figure 1.1 and Toposheet showing 10 km radius

and the Google map showing the 10 Km radius is given in Figure 1.2 & 1.3. Google Map

showing Project area with Co-ordinates is given in Figure 1.4





Page C1-28

Figure 1-1 Project site location





Page C1-29

Figure 1-2 Topo map within 10Km radius from the Project boundary

(Survey of India Top sheet Nos. 63O-14 & 15)





Page C1-30

Figure 1-3 Google Map showing 10 Km Radius

Figure 1-4 Google Map showing Project area with Co-Ordinates





Page C1-31

1.3. Environmental Setting of the Proposed Project

The details of environmental setting around the proposed site are given in the following

Table 1.1.

Table 1-1 Salient Features of the site and Its Environs

S.No. Particulars Details

1

Location:

Village Chausa District Buxar

State Bihar

2 Elevation above mean sea level (MSL)

56.5m to 66.5m

3 Present land use at the proposed site

Barren Land

4 State Boundary Uttar Pradesh State Boundary- 0.8 Km River Karmanasa is dividing the two states

5 Nearest Highway/Road State Highway-13 State Highway-17

6 Defence Installations None within 10 Km radius 7 Nearest Railway Station Chausa - ~5 to 6 km 8 Nearest airport/air strip Patna Airport-122Km

9 Nearest village Banarpur Village- 0.47 Km 10 Nearest town Buxar- 19 Km

11 Nearest river River Karmanasa- 0.8 Km River Ganga- 3.5 km

12 Hills/valleys None within 10 Km radius

13 Archaeologically important places

None within 10 Km radius as per Archaeological Survey of India (ASI). Buxar Fort is located at 13 km from the project site which is not declared Archaeologically important places as per ASI.

14 Nearest place of Tourist/Religious importance

None within 10 Km radius. Buxar Fort is located at 13 km.

15

Ecologically sensitive areas (National Parks/Wildlife sanctuaries/bio-sphere reserves)

None within 10 Km radius.

16 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km radius

None within 10 Km radius





Page C1-32

1.4. Need for the Project

The installed power generation capacity of India as on 30th September 2016 is 3,06,358

MW and out of this the installed generation capacity in Bihar is 3,030 MW including the

allocated shares from central generating stations. As per the 18th EPS published by

Central Electricity Authority (CEA), the estimated peak load demand in Bihar at the end of

12th 5-year plan (2016-17) is 5,018 MW and at the end of 13th 5-year plan (FY 2021-22) is

9,306 MW. The actual peak demand for the financial year 2015-16 in Bihar was 3735 MW

and the peak demand met was 3484 MW leaving a peak deficit of 6.7%. It may be noted

that the actual power scenarios is less than the projections as per the 18 th EPS and also

the per capita power consumption in Bihar is lowest at 265 units per annum, against the

national average of 1,060 units per annum.

To meet up with this overall national objective and to enable Bihar access to additional

power required to sustain the high growth rate being witnessed, Govt. of Bihar with the

support of Bihar Power Infrastructure Company Pvt. Ltd. (BPIC) has been keen on

development of power projects in the state in a fast-track mode and the proposed project

at Chausa village at Buxar was one of them.

The Project Company has executed a Power Purchase Agreement with the erstwhile Bihar

State Electricity Board, to supply 85% of power generated from the Project to the discoms

in Bihar and the balance power would be available for supply elsewhere. Due to the

location advantage of the Project in terms of availability of coal, water and evacuation

facilities the cost of power is expected to be competitive.

1.5. The Project Chronology

The detailed project chronology is given below in Table 1.2

Table 1-2 Project Chronology

Event Period Reference

Submission of Form I & PFR 22 May 2008 EAC meeting on 11th July 2008 for ToR approval

Approval of ToR Aug 2008 EAC meeting held on 12th-13th August, 2008

ToR Letter Sep 2008 No.J-13012/69/2008/IA.II (T) dated, 10th September 2008





Page C1-33

Event Period Reference

Baseline Study Period Apr – Jun

2008 Conducted by Environment Protection Training & Research Institute (EPTRI)

Public Hearing : Date & Venue

July 2010 30th July 2010 at Town hall, Buxar

Public Hearing Minutes to MoEF&CC

Nov 2010 19th November 2010

MoU for Project Take-over by SJVN Ltd

Jan 2013 17th Jan 2013

Coal Block allocation Sep 2013 6th September 2013

Fresh baseline monitoring by accredited laboratory

Mar – Jun 2015

March 2015 to June 2015 by AES Laboratories Private Limited

MoU signed for Imported Coal supply

Feb 2016 24th February 2016

Studies for addendum EIA Report (ecology, socioeconomic, hydrogeology, meteorological data, air quality modeling etc)

Mar – Apr 2016

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited, Chennai

Revised Form 1 and updated PFR submitted to MoEF&CC

May 2016 MoEF&CC online acceptance confirmation – 2nd May 2016

ToR Presentation 5th & 6th May

2016

55th Meeting of the Re-Constituted Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) on EIA) of Thermal Power & Coal Mining Projects

Obtaining Terms of Reference

07.06.2016 No.J-13012/69/2008-IA.I(T) dated, 07.06.2016

Submission of Draft EIA Report for Public Hearing

08.08.2016 Bihar State Pollution Control Board

Date and Venue of Public Hearing

4th October 2016

The Town Hall, Buxar Town

1.5.1. Environmental Impact Assessment Studies Undertaken

According to the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification issued by Ministry of

Environment, Forests & climate Change ( MoEF & CC) under Environment Protection Act

2006, the proposed power project falls under item 1(d) in the schedule of EIA

Notification issued on September 14th 2006. Based on the capacity 2x660MW), the power





Page C1-34

plant is classified as Category “A” and therefore requires prior Environmental Clearance

from Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change (MoEF & CC).

M/s. BPIC had earlier retained M/s. Environment Protection Training & Research

Institute (EPTRI) for carrying out the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and

preparation of an EIA report. The EIA study was undertaken by EPTRI during April – June

2008 as per the approved Terms of Reference (ToR) issued by MoEF &CC vide letter

No.10-74/2007-IA.III dated 10th September 2008 (Annexure-1). Public hearing for the

project was undertaken on 30-07-2010 at Buxar town hall, Chausa Village, Buxar District,

Bihar. Due to change in the policy on consideration of Thermal Power Projects by

MoEF&CC after the Office Memorandum dated 1st November 2010, the project could not

be taken-up for appraisal due to the absence of firm coal linkage / Coal block allocated for

the Project. Subsequently, the project was allocated Deocha Pachami Coal block by

Ministry of Coal on 6th September 2013. Considering the timelines required for

development of the mine and also for the extraction of coal, SJVN Thermal Private Limited

(STPL), has tied-up for imported coal for the intermediate period of up to 4 years.

Having tied-up coal for the proposed Thermal Power Project, STPL has approached

Ministry of Environment and Forests & Climate Change for necessary environmental

clearances.

As per the ToR issued by MoEF&CC the following special studies has been carried out.

A repetition of baseline air quality monitoring and meteorological monitoring

studies were carried out by MoEF&CC/NABL approved environment testing lab

(M/s AES Laboratories, Delhi) during the period March – June 2015. All the 12

criteria pollutants were measured under the repeat ambient air quality monitoring

program. The measured air quality data of 2015 and 2016 are compared with that

of the data collected during 2008

Although there are no new settlements and industrial activities have come up in

the vicinity of the proposed project site, an upgraded land use and land cover map

(Level 2) has been developed using the latest satellite imagery data. The study area

elevation map with elevation contours has been developed to assess the storm

water drainage system in the region.





Page C1-35

Detailed hydro-geological studies were undertaken in the area to map the seasonal

variations of water tables, typical watershed map, hydro-geology of the region and

flood related aspects, if applicable.

Detailed ecological survey was undertaken at the site during March 2016 to assess

the current ecological status at the project site and its vicinity and also study area.

To establish the current status of socio-economic scenario. The study team also

visited the project site and also the study area to review the current land use

pattern at the proposed project site and to assess the presence of any new

settlements after the last EIA study conducted during the year 2008.

A review of the Rehabilitation and Resettlement aspects and land acquisition

status were carried out.

Based on a socio-economic and amenities survey in the area, a need based

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) plan has been developed with an action for

CSR spending for the first 10 years of operation of the project has also been

prepared.

Although the air quality modeling data was presented in the earlier EIA report

(Year 2008) for typical India coals with a average sulfur content of 0.45%, the

prediction of Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) of stipulated pollutants were

carried out with the results of repeat baseline studies. (Particulate matter SO2 and

NOx are once again estimated for worst case coal which may be expected from the

coal bock (3500 Kcal/Kg, 41%w/w ash content, 0.6% Sulphur content).

While the total projected water demand in the facility will remain unchanged from

the earlier EIA Report 2008, a revised water balance, wastewater quantities,

treatment schemes and disposal methods have also been developed with

discussions.

The possible vehicle traffic at the power plant (post project scenario) due to

transportation of coal (partial quantities) and also disposal of fly ash to various

end users as per the identified flyash utilization scheme have been estimated.

The details on the fly ash generation, fly ash disposal and ash pond management

etc have been worked out and presented in the report.

Along with the earlier EIA report, 2008 the addendum report was submitted to MoEF&CC

on 11th April 2016 and the Proposed project was appraised by Expert Appraisal





Page C1-36

Committee (Thermal Power), Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF&CC) during the

55th Meeting of the Re-Constituted Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) on

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of Thermal Power & Coal Mining Projects

meeting held on 6th May 2016.

1.6. Revised EIA Report

The project was appraised during the 55th EAC meeting and after detailed deliberations,

the Committee recommended the standard ToRs (as applicable) for undertaking detailed

EIA study and preparation of EMP along with public hearing requirement.

The Revised EIA study was undertaken in conformity of Reference (ToR) vide Letter No.J-

13012/69/2008-IA.I (T) dated 07.06.2016, and with the guidelines of Ministry of

Environment and Forests (MoEF&CC), covering all the aspects of the specific conditions

mentioned in the terms of reference issued by MoEF&CC and the copy of the ToR is

enclosed as Annexure 2. The ToR compliance is also enclosed in Annexure 3.

This EIA study was undertaken by M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services, a NABET

accredited EIA consulting organization, with specific project related inputs required for

undertaking the EIA studies obtained from the project proponent.

M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services is authorized to undertake EIA studies for thermal

power plants as per the NABET accreditation scheme. A copy of the accreditation status is

presented in Annexure 4.

EAC committee, MoEF&CC has permitted STPL to use the baseline data of March –

June, 2015 in the preparation of EIA/EMP report and specified to carry out a fresh

baseline monitoring for one month period to confirm the environmental settings of the

study area. The fresh baseline monitoring was undertaken by MOEF&CC/NABL approved

environment testing laboratory, M/s AES Laboratories, Delhi during the Month of 15th

May 2016 to 15th June 2016.

The public hearing was held on 4th October 2016 at The Town Hall, Buxar Town which was

accessible to all the concerned people and stake holders of the project. All persons including

bonafide residents, Environmental Groups and others located at the project site/sites of

displacement/sites likely to be affected were requested to participate in the public hearing and

to make oral/written suggestions to Environmental Engineer, Bihar State Pollution Control

Board, Patna.





Page C1-37

1.7. About the Consultant and Accreditation

1.7.1. Introduction

The EIA report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. The studies

have been carried out by M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited, Chennai,

India, based on the technical inputs provided in the detailed project report prepared by

M/s NTPC Limited on behalf of STPL.

The profiles of the Consultants are given below

1.7.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd (CMSRSL) is a joint venture between the

Murugappa group, India and Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Group, Japan. CMSRSL is an ISO

9001:2008 certified company. CMSRSL offers safety and environmental consulting

services across Indian, Middle East and East Asian countries. CMSRL consists of six

consulting domains such as environmental engineering and management, process safety,

fire safety, electrical safety, construction safety and logistics risk assessment. CMSRS is a

NABET accredited EIA consulting organization for undertaking EIA studies in the

following sectors: paper and pulp, thermal power plants, petroleum refineries,

petrochemical complex, chemical fertilizers, synthetic organic chemical industries, ports

and harbours and area development projects. CMSRSL has offered environmental and

safety related consulting services for more than 5000 clients during last decade.

1.7.3. Details of Experts Engaged for this Study

Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study

1 Mr.V S Bhaskar

EIA Coordinator – Thermal Power Plant Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling and Prediction Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Noise / Vibration Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Risk & Hazards Management

2 Mr.Ravi Shankar Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Air Pollution Control, Solid and Hazardous Waste Management.

3 Mr.T.P.Natesan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Land Use, Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation

4 Dr. Mangalam Balasubramaniam Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics





Page C1-38

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study 5 Mr. C.S.Karthick Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

6 Mr. I. Sivaramakrishnan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

7 Dr. T. Balakrishnan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

8 Ms. Sathya.S Functional Area Expert (FAE) – MSW and Team Member

8 Mr.Pudi Rama Satya kamesh Associate Functional Area Expert (AFAE)- Meteorology, Air Quality Modelling and Prediction & team member.

1.8. Regulatory Context

The following environmental laws are applicable to the proposed project: Environment

Protection Act 1986, Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974, Air

(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981, Manufacture, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 as amended in 2000, Hazardous Wastes (Management,

Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2008.

The following guidelines and regulations are applicable for the proposed project: EIA

Notification and its amendments, Emission and wastewater discharge standards

stipulated by Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF&CC) and Bihar State Pollution

Control Board (BSPCB), Noise level standards, National Ambient Air Quality Standards,

minimum stack height requirements specified by Central Pollution Control Board, fly ash

utilization notifications etc.

1.8.1. Ambient Air Quality Standards

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, with its latest amendment, to

prevent and control air pollution, in line with the general standards prescribed in the Act.

The general standards for National Ambient Air Quality follow Schedule VII prescribed in

Environment (Protection) Rules 1986 and Schedule I of Environment (Protection) Rules

1986. The National ambient air quality standard is given in Table 1.3

Table 1-3 National Ambient Air Quality Standards

Pollutant Time

Weighted Average

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3)

Industrial Residential, Rural &

Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas (notified by

Central Government)

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

50 20





Page C1-39

Pollutant Time Weighted Average

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3) 24 hrs** 80 80

Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

40 30

24 hrs ** 80 80 Particulate Matter (Size less than 10 µg) (PM10) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

60 60

24 hrs ** 100 100

Particulate Matter (Size less than 2.5 µg) (PM2.5) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

40 40

24 hrs ** 60 60

Ozone (O3) (µg/m3) 8 hrs ** 100 100

1 hrs ** 180 180

Lead (Pb) (µg/m3) Annual

Average* 0.5 0.5

24 hrs ** 1.5 1.0

Carbon monoxide (CO) (µg/m3)

8 hrs ** 2000 2000

1 hrs ** 4000 4000

Ammonia (NH3) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

100 100

24 hrs ** 400 400

Benzene (C6H6) Annual* 5 5 Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP)- Particulate phase only (µg/m3)

Annual* 0.001 0.001

Arsenic (As) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.006 0.006 Nickel (Ni) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.020 0.020

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at

uniform interval.

** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However, 2% of the time, it

may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

1.8.2. Air Emission Discharge Standards for Thermal Power Plants

According to the revised standards emission discharge standards (MoEF&CC Notification

dated 7th December, 2015) stipulated by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), Thermal

Power Plant which is to be installed after 1st January 2017 including those have been

accorded environmental clearance and are under construction shall follow the below

emission standards.

S.No Industry Parameter Standards, mg/NM3

1 Thermal Power

Plant

Particulate Matter (PM) 30

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 100 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) 100

Mercury (Hg) 0.03





Page C1-40

1.8.3. Minimum Stack Height Standards

According to the environmental protection rules, a minimum stack height of the thermal

power plant will be defined based on the total sulphur dioxide (SO2) emission released

from the stack and this can be achieved through dispersion. Minimum stack height limit is

prescribed accordingly

Less than 200/210 MW unit capacity

H=14(Q)0.3 H= Stack Height Q=Emission rate of SO 2 in kg/hr

200/210 MW and above but less than 500 MW

220 m

500 MW unit capacity and above

275 m (Applicable for Current Project)

1.8.4. Work-zone Noise Standards

Noise levels in the work-zone area should not exceed 85 dBA for a cumulative exposure

time of eight (8) hrs. The CPCB has since finalised the Ambient Air Quality standards in

respect of Noise under Section 16 (2) (h) of the Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution)

Act, 1981 as amended in 1987. General noise standards are given in Table 1.4.

Table 1-4 General Ambient Noise Standards

Area Code Category Area Limits in dB (A) Leq

Day Time Night Time A Industrial area 75 70

B Commercial area 65 55 C Residential area 55 45

D Silence zone 50 40 Definition Day ti me: Between 6 AM and 10 PM, Night ti me: Between 10 PM and 6 AM

Silence Zone: Areas up to 100 metres around such premises as hospitals, educational

institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by the Competent Authority.

Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these

zones.

1.8.5. Thermal Power Plant – Specific Wastewater Standards

In addition to the general standards, certain specific standards have been developed for

effluent discharges from industries such as thermal power plants. Liquid effluent

standards for thermal power plant are presented in Table 1.5.





Page C1-41

Table 1-5 Liquid Effluent Standards for Thermal Power Plant

Source Parameter Concentration not to exceed, mg/l (except for pH & Temp.)

Condenser Cooling Water (once through higher cooling system)

pH Temperature

6.5 to 8.5 Not more than 5oC than the higher intake

Boiler Blow Down Free available Chlorine Suspended solids Oil & grease Copper (Total) Iron (Total)

0.5 100 20 1.0 1.0

Cooling Tower Blow down

Free available Chlorine Zinc Chromium (Total) Phosphate Other corrosion inhibiting material

1.0 0.2 5.0 Limit to be established on case by case basis by Central Board in case of Union Territories and State Boards in case of States

Ash pond effluent pH Suspended solids Oil & grease

6.5 to 8.5 100 20

1.8.5.1. Guidelines for Wastewater Discharge Point1

The discharge point shall preferably located at the bottom of the water body at

midstream for proper dispersion of thermal discharge.

In case of discharge of cooling water into sea, proper marine outfall shall be

designed to achieve the prescribed standards. This aspect is not applicable in the

current scenario as the project does not belongs to Coastal based power plant and

the treated waste water will be recycled back for ash conditioning, bottom ash

handling, dust suppression and green belt development

No cooling water discharge shall be permitted in estuaries or near ecologically

sensitive areas such as mangroves, coral reefs/spanning and breeding grounds of

aquatic flora and fauna. This aspect is not applicable in the current scenario of this

specific project.

1.8.6. Fly ash Utilization

As per Fly ash Notification by Ministry of Environment and Forests dated, 3rd November

2009, all coal or lignite based thermal power plants shall utilise the ash generated in the

1 EPA Notification [GSR 7, dated Dec. 22, 1998]





Page C1-42

power plants. Every coal or lignite based thermal power plant shall make available ash,

for at least ten years from the date of publication of this notification, without any payment

or any other consideration, for the purpose of manufacturing ash-based products such as

cement, concrete blocks, bricks, panels or any other material or for construction of roads,

embankments, dams, dykes or for any other construction activity. The unutilized ash will

be transported to the ash pond as high concentrate slurry using high concentrate slurry

pumps. For this purpose, an area of about 282 acres is identified.

As per the Fly ash Amendment Notification issued by MoEF&CC on 3rd November 2009, all

coal and, or lignite based thermal power stations and, or expansion u nits in

operation before the date of this notification are to achieve the target of fly ash utilization

as per the table given below:

S.No Percentage Utilization of Fly Ash Target Date 1 At least 50% of fly ash generation One year from the date of commissioning

2 At least 70% of fly ash generation Second year from the date of commissioning

3 At least 90% of fly ash generation Third year from the date of commissioning

4 100% fly ash generation Fourth year from the date of commissioning

1.9. Structure of the EIA Report

This EIA report is structured into nine chapters as below.

Chapter 1 – Introduction

Chapter 2 –Project Description presents details of the proposed project, process and

material balance, raw-materials and details of various supporting facilities required for

the project, and an outline of the project cost and project implementation schedules.

Chapter 3 – Baseline Environmental Status presents a comprehensive description of

the baseline environmental conditions of the study area. This includes the data obtained

from primary surveys and also secondary published data from various authentic sources.

All the specified environmental components such as meteorological data, air quality, noise

levels, surface and ground water resources, surface and ground water quality, geological

and mineralogical features, soil quality, land use and land cover in the study area,

cropping pattern, ecological and biological environmental conditions and socioeconomic

and cultural aspects of the proposed. All the relevant aspects as mentioned in the Terms

of Reference (ToR) were thoroughly addressed.





Page C1-43

Chapter 4 – Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures presents

the environmental aspects associated with the proposed project, envisaged emissions and

discharges from the facility, an overview of various pollution control systems proposed

under project planning activities in the detailed project report and construction and

operational phase environmental impacts.

Chapter 5 – Analysis of Alternatives gives the description of each alternative studied

and the selected alternatives are given.

Chapter 6 – Environmental Monitoring Program presents monitoring plan which

include measurement methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis, reporting

schedules, emergency procedures, & detailed budget.

Chapter 7 – Additional Studies this chapter describes various additional studies carried

out for the project such as risk assessment study, rehabilitation and resettlements

aspects, occupational health related aspects etc. Public Consultation/ Public Hearing was

carried out and the views and comments of the public on the proposed project also be

included in this final EIA report to MoEF&CC.

Chapter 8 – Project Benefits presents the benefits of the project.

Chapter 9– Environmental Management Plan presents the administrative aspects of

ensuring that mitigation measures are implemented and their effectiveness monitored,

after approval of the EIA.

Chapter 10–Summary and Conclusion presents the summary and Conclusion of EIA

Study.

Chapter 11–Disclosure of Consultant presents the declaration by the EIA consultant

organisation as per the NABET requirements .




Chapter 2- Project Description

Page C2-44

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1. Overview

This section describes about the salient features such as plant layout and design, details of

the process to be adopted, raw material requirement, utilities and services, infrastructure

facilities and sources of waste generation, their quantity, treatment and safe disposal of

the waste.

STPL proposed to setup Thermal power plant with two Units of 660 MW each with gross

installed capacity of 1320 MW. Overview of the proposed project requirements are

presented in Table 2.1.

Table 2-1 Overview of the proposed project requirements

Parameter As per 2008 EIA

study Current Submission as on August 2016

Status

Project Cost Rs.6,791 Cr. Rs.10, 520 Cr. Project Cost increased

Budget for environmental management plan

Rs. 236.5 Cr.. Rs. 1311.32 Cr.

Significant increase due to inclusion of FGD and other pollution control systems to meet the new thermal power plant emission norms.

Power Plant Area (except corridors)

1167 Acres 1064.69 Acres Efforts are made to reduce the land requirement

Configuration 1320 Mw

(2x660MW) 1320 Mw (2x660MW) No change

Fuel Linkage

Based on the envisaged fuel linkage from

Jharkhand mines.

Deocha-pachami Coal Block

Allocated by MoC through letter dated 6th September 2013

Coal requirement

6.25 MTPA 6.7 MTPA (Indian Coal) or 3.9 MTPA (Imported

Coal)

Imported coal will be used during the initial 4 year period and thereafter Indian coal will be used for the project.

Water Allocation

55 Cusec ( 5600 m3/hr)

55 Cusec ( 5600 m3/hr)

Water allocation was already granted for the





Page C2-45

Parameter As per 2008 EIA

study Current Submission as on August 2016

Status

project.

Water Requirement

5494 m3/hr 3265 m3/hr

Due to adoption of treated wastewater recycling program, the fresh water consumption will be limited to about 2.5 m3/MWhr.

BPIC has been looking at sites in and around Chausa village, District Buxar for locating the

Project. The important criterion for site selection being adopted by BPIC is as follows:

i. Total land required for setting up the project facility shall be around 1,000 to 1,500

acres at a stretch including the green belt and water bodies.

ii. The project site shall be close to the water source and near the source of fuel i.e.

coal.

iii. The project site requires minimum displacement of habitation and away from the

habitation area.

iv. The project site is closer to highway with hindrance free approach for

transportation of heavy equipment. Project site is well connected by roads.

v. The project site is close to railway lines to enable efficient transportation of coal.

Initially for 4 years Coal will be imported and used, subsequently coal supply will

be from the coal block allocated to the project in West Bengal and the

transportation for the proposed site will be by Railway wagons.

vi. The project site shall be free from forest growth.

The site comprising 1,064.69 acres of land area is located approximately 10 kms from

Buxar city on Ghazipur road. The site offers mostly barren land owned by the local

villagers. Hindrance free approach for the transportation of heavy equipment & coal is

provided through the main road which is 1 km from site and Eastern railway main line, 3

km from site. The site is approximately 3.5 kms from River Ganga, which is the source of

water for the Power project. The water requirement for the project is estimate d at 55

cusecs on continuous basis. Nearest airfield at Patna is more than 122 km from site and

hence the chimney would not fall within the approach funnel of the airport runway. The





Page C2-46

project site is free from reserve forestlands, sanctuaries and monuments and meets the

environment requirements and guidelines.

2.2. Land for the Project

The Central Electricity Authority (CEA) has prescribed the land requirement for different

configurations of thermal power plants. Accordingly 2x660 MW plant would require a

land of about 1480 acres. As land is precious and keeping in view of large requirement of

land for the proposed project, asadvised by MoEF&CC Expert Committee the project

proponent has made extensive efforts to optimize the land requirement for the proposed

project.

As an output of the exercise the project proponent could optimize the land requirement

for the proposed thermal power plant of 1320 MW (i.e. 2x660MW) from approximately

1480 acres to 1064 acres. Considering the CEA norms and domestic usage of the thermal

power plant the project proponent has optimized the land requirement for the proposed

power plant. Even though the proponent has optimized the overall land requirement,

considering the environmental aspects the land requirements for the green belt and ash

dyke are within the prescribed CEA norms.

The Government of Bihar is carrying out land acquisition and compensation is paid as per

the provisions of “The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition,

Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013”

The entire private land of 1048.69 acres has been acquired andthe compensation to 95%

beneficiaries has been disbursed by the District Administration, Buxar. For the 16 acres

of Government land, notification from Government of Bihar for transfer of land to the

Project has already been issued.

1,064.69 acres of land is required for the proposed project as per the broad break-up

given in the Table 2.2. The overall project Layout showing the proposed project is given

in Figure 2.1 and the photographs of the area for proposed facilities is given in Figure

2.2.





Page C2-47

Table 2-2 Land use break-up of the Proposed Plant

S.No Description Area in Acres 1 Main Plant, BOP & CHP & Misc. Facilities 450 2 Ash disposal area 282

3 Green Belt for total plant 178 4 Township 95 5 Land for miscellaneous facilities like roads, etc. 60

6 Total 1065 7 Railway Siding and water pipeline corridor 225

Figure 2-1 Proposed Project Layout

Ash dyke Area

Main Plant Area

Proposed Railway Line

Buda Nallah





Page C2-48

Figure 2-2 Photographs showing typical view of the proposed Project Site

2.3. Vision of the Project

2.3.1. Introduction

The installed power generation capacity of India as on 30th September 2016 is 3,06,358

MW and out of this the installed generation capacity in Bihar is 3,030 MW including the

allocated shares from central generating stations. As per the 18 th EPS published by

Central Electricity Authority (CEA), the estimated peak load demand in Bihar at the end of

13th 5-year plan (FY 2021-22) is 9,306 MW. The actual peak demand for the financial year

2015-16 in Bihar was 3735 MW and the peak demand met was 3484 MW leaving a peak

deficit of 6.7%. It may be noted that the actual power scenarios is less than the

projections as per the 18th EPS and also the per capita power consumption in Bihar is

lowest at 265 units per annum, against the national average of 1,060 units per annum.

The Bihar state government is taking steps to provide access to electricity all households





Page C2-49

and also agriculture needs in rural areas. To meet up with overall national objective and

to enable Bihar access to additional power required to sustain the high growth rate being

witnessed, Govt. of Bihar had taken the initiative for developing Thermal Power Projects

in the state through Bihar Power Infrastructure Company (BPIC), a joint venture between

Bihar State Power Holding Company Limited (BSPHCL) with IL&FS Energy Development

Company Limited (IEDCL). BPIC and BSEB had identified a site near village Chausa in

District Buxar for the development of 2x660 MW Coal based Thermal Power Project.

The proposed 2x660MW power project was conceived to meet the energy deficit of Bihar

state. As per the power purchase agreement 85% of the power generated at the proposed

project will be made available to Bihar state for various uses. Due to the location

advantage of the Project in terms of availability of water, power evacuation facilities and

coal, the cost of power is expected to be competitive.

The proposed project would cater to the ever increasing demand of electricity in the state

of Bihar. It will also increase the availability of electricity in rural areas for agricultural

purposes, small scale industries and subsequently helps in improving overall

development in agricultural, industrial and infrastructural facilities.

2.3.2. Long Term Vision for the Project

The long term vision of the proposed power project is sustainable power generation

maintaining high standards of efficiency and financial strength, over the design life (25

years) and extended life of the project through suitable Renovation and Modernization

Programmes from Time to Time and stated hereunder

2.3.2.1. Vision for Project Site

To provide uninterrupted and quality power to the Bihar state grid to bridge

the demand and supply gap

Optimal utilization of land by maximizing electrical generation per unit area

of the plant. Optimizing specific water consumption requirement for the

plant processes to meet the norms for the thermal power projects

prescribed by Ministry of Environment Forest and Climate Change

(MoEF&CC). Continual improvement in efficiency and PLF through efficient

operation and maintenance and Renovation and Modernization Programmes

from Time to Time gaining extended life of the project





Page C2-50

Certification of Project with ISO: 9001, ISO 14001, OSHAS-18001, SA-8000

2.3.2.2. Vision towards Technology Selection

The proposed 2x660 MW power plant based on super critical technology which is the

best available technology for the operation of the proposed project. The main advantages

of the technology are:

High Thermal Efficiency, PLF;

Lower fuel consumption;

Reduced ash generation;

Faster load-changes;

Faster start up time;

High part load efficiency and higher adaptability for sliding pressure operation

2.3.2.3. Vision Towards the Environmental Protection & Pollution Control

To achieve better performance of the 2x660 MW proposed power plant, the following

pollution control and abatement measures are envisaged.

Recycle and Reuse of wastewater

Adopting the good environmental management practices as per the applicable

guidelines and achieving 100% compliance with regulations,

275 m multi-flue stack with ESP of more than 99.99 % efficiency which will be

provided to control suspended particulate matter to less than 30 mg/Nm3,

Providing quality fly ash (low carbon content and desired grain size) to enhance

the fly ash utilization opportunities in the region, 20% of the fly ash will be

provided to local brick manufacturers with no cost to encourage alternative brick

manufacturing practices to conserve the natural clay soil that is being widely used

by the local brick manufacturers,

Dry fly ash handling system and achieving 100% fly ash utilization as per the

MOEF&CC fly ash utilization notification

Greenbelt will be developed in and around the plant site. Plantation of trees will

also be encouraged in the nearby villages. Greenbelt will be developed with locally

available plant species.

Surveillance of all important environmental parameters on a continuous basis and

application of corrective measures





Page C2-51

2.3.2.4. Vision towards CSR

To become an integral part of the local communities and encouraging social,

economic and cultural aspects in the region through a sustained and need

based Corporate Social Responsibility programs

CSR activities will be taken up to fulfill the basic requirements of the people

in the area. The basic requirements of the community needs will be

strengthened by extending health care; educational facilities will be

improved.

To participate in various CSR activities like infrastructure development,

education, medical facilities, self-employment, community development and

awareness programmes, vocational training in and around the project site.

The proposed power plant will provide direct and indirect employment to

many people based on their qualification, skill sets and experience

2.4. Process Description and Technology

2.4.1. Technology & Layout

The project proposes to use conventional coal fired boilers, which is a proven technology

for power generation. Around 450 acres of land would suffice to accommodate the main

Power plant, which would include besides the main power block, the Electrostatic

Precipitator, the chimney, coal handling plant, space for FGD transmission switchyard,

Water systems (including cooling towers), etc.

The layout shall include railway tracks proposed to be used for transporting fuel – either

by Indian Railways using the main line or a merry-go-round system, depending on where

the site is located with reference to the coalmines. The coal storage of 30 days

requirement of crushed coal is proposed to be provided at the power plant.

A common multi-flue concrete chimney for the two units has been proposed for this

project. A chimney height of about 275 mtrs has been considered in accordance with the

guidelines given by the Central Pollution Control Board. The plant is proposed to have a

50-meter wide green belt around perimeter as well as plantation in the other dust prone

areas like coal and ash areas.

While finalizing the plant layout the general principles under consideration are as under:





Page C2-52

All facilities of the 2 x 660 MW units are in close proximity to each other to the

extent practicable so as to accommodate all facilities efficiently within the plant

boundary

One(1) no. of multi-flue chimney (Two flues in one Chimney)

Sufficient area in the turbine hall allowing the laydown of all turbine components

during overhauls.

Location of Water source and method of drawl.

Space for coal storage for thirty (30) days.

Space for ash disposal.

Facility for dry ash disposal road tankers/ trucks starting with 25% utilization in

the first year and 100 % utilization during the 4th year

Space for fuel oil receiving, storage and handling etc.,

To facilitate movement of men and materials between the various facilities both

during initial construction and also during subsequent operation and maintenance.

Major external functional system are so oriented that any maintenance work as

well as subsequent construction work can be carried out without any interference

and/or hindrance to the operational units.

Steel storage yard and pre-assembly yard required for storing and assembling of

plant equipments during construction phase and later this space will converted

into green belt during the operational phase.

33KVA substation will be installed

Power evacuation corridor for connection to grid.

Approach road to power plant from the National Highways.

Unit system concept will be adopted for following systems with no interconnection

with other units of the plant:

a. Steam water cycle except with the interconnection on the Auxiliary steam

system.

b. Circulating water system.

c. Auxiliary cooling water system.

d. Closed circuit cooling water system.

Coal Handling system, Ash disposal, Fuel oil receiving & storage, River water

intake, DM plant, Waste water treatment plant, Fire protection, Labs, Workshop,





Page C2-53

Hydrogen Generation plant etc. will be common for all the units. However the

phasing of equipment, supply & erection will be detailed under project

implementation.

2.4.2. Design Parameters

The coal based Thermal Power Station is designed as a Two-unit station of 660 MW (at

Maximum Continuous Rating) capacity each. To achieve efficiency without sacrificing

availability, it has been decided to operate the steam parameters in the super-critical

range. 6.7 MMTPA of coal is required for the 1320 MW Power Plant. Coal for the proposed

thermal power station is expected to be made available from Deocha Pachmi coal block in

West Bengal. The coal with average gross calorific value of about 3500 Kcal/Kg is

considered for design and estimation purposes.

The steam parameters have been fixed at approximately about 250 kg/cm2 and 565°

C/595°C in line with the established practice of most of the international manufacturers

of 660 MW capacity machines. Single reheat is envisaged in the turbine cycle in

conformity with prevailing practice. The condenser vacuum i.e. heat sink level is

considered to be 76mm Hg absolute on consideration of circulating water inlet

temperature of 33 Degree Celsius (max).

The design of the system and system components for the proposed station would

consider the following basic design parameters:

Maximum ambient temperature 50 Degree Celsius Seismic Zone Zone IV as per IS:1893 (Part-I) 2002 Maximum wind velocity 39 m/sec

Power supply to drives (3-Ph, 50 Hz, DOL-start)

Up to 160 KW rating at 415 V Between 160 KW to 2000 KW rating at 6.6kVAbove 2000 KW rating at 11 KV

Control voltage for electrical equipment

At 220 V DC (unearthed)

Power supply for instrumentation and control

At 240 V AC (UPS)

Adequate provisions have been made for spare capacities in various systems and system

components both in size and number in accordance with good engineering practice for

high availability of the plant.

The plant will be designed to operate as a base load station. However, continuous

operation under two shift and cyclic modes during certain periods will also be envisaged:





Page C2-54

Examples of Possible operation modes:

Base load operation

Peak load operation

Island operation

Frequency support

2.4.2.1. Thermodynamic Cycle

A super-critical pressure reheat steam cycle with regenerative feed heating arrangement

is proposed.

The main steam from the boiler, after expansion through the HP turbine, would be sent

back to the boiler for reheating. The reheated steam, after expansion through double flow

IP and LP turbines respectively would be exhausted into the main condenser, where the

exhaust steam from the LP turbine would be cooled and condensed by circulation of

cooling water and its vacuum would be maintained by two (2) (1 working + 1 standby)

100% capacity vacuum pumps. The condensate from the hot well would be extracted by 3

x 50% capacity condensate extraction pumps (2 working + 1 standby) and pumped to the

de-aerator through condensate polishing unit (when in use), gland steam condenser and

the LP heaters. The feed water after being de-aerated in the de-aerator would be drawn

by the boiler feed pumps and pumped to the respective boiler through the high-pressure

heaters. Four (4) 50% capacity boiler feed pumps have been envisaged for each unit. The

boiler feed pumps will be provided with variable speed hydraulic coupling, lube oil

system, automatic leak off and minimum flow bypass valves. Feed water will be heated up

in the feed water heaters progressively by bled steam drawn from cold reheat line and

extraction points of the IP Turbine and Condensate water would be heated in the LP

Heaters by steam extracted from the extractions from LP Turbine.

Condensate drain from the HP heaters would be cascaded to the de-aerator feed storage

tank and drain from the LP heaters would be cascaded to the condenser through the drain

cooler.

Auxiliary steam for the station will be drawn from a suitable point in the boiler and after

pressure reduction and de-superheating would be used for various services. Auxiliary

steam system shall supply steam to the de-aerator, turbine gland sealing system (during

light load and start-up conditions), fuel oil heating and atomization system etc. Provision





Page C2-55

for steam supply to auxiliary steam system from cold reheat piping through adequately

sized pressure reducing and de-superheating station will be made. The 660 MW units will

also be provided with adequately sized HP and LP turbine bypass stations for quick hot

start and boiler stability with large load rejections.

2.4.2.2. Power-House & Ancillary Building

The superstructure of the powerhouse building is expected to be enclosed type in

fabricated structural steel work. The roof and floors will be RCC slab on steel truss/beam.

Side cladding may be of plastered brickwork supported on steel wall beams, double skin

insulated metal sheeting or PC panel.

The superstructure of the CW pump house, DM plant etc. will be of steel and enclosed

with brick walls, un-insulated metal or aluminum cladding.

All other building, viz., the workshop, store, control room buildings, pump houses,

administrative building etc. will have RCC frames with cast-in-situ roof and masonry

cladding. In case of long span roof, however, steel truss with AC/metal sheeting would be

adopted. Foundations in all cases will be of RCC spread or raft Type.

2.4.3. Steam Generating Unit and Auxiliaries

The steam generators shall be Super-Critical, once through, water tube, direct pulverized

coal fired, top supported, balanced draft furnace, single reheat, radiant, dry bottom type,

suitable for outdoor installation. The gas path arrangement shall be single pass (Tower

type) or two pass type.

Boiler design shall be suitable for variable pressure operation from 30% to 100%

BMCR with and without 20% throttle margin. The main parameters at 100% BMCR will

be as follows:

1 Main steam flow at Super Heater (SH) outlet 2120 T/Hr

2 Pressure at Super Heater outlet 256 kg/cm2 (a)

3 Temperature at SH outlet 5680 C

4 Steam flow to reheater 1708 T/Hr

5 Steam temperature at reheater outlet 5960 C

6 Feed water temperature at economizer inlet 293.70 C





Page C2-56

2.4.3.1. Furnace

The furnace will be radiant, dry bottom type with tangential or opposed wall firing and

enclosed by water cooled and all welded membrane walls. The furnace bottom shall be

suitable both for installation of water impounded bottom ash system and submerged

scrapper chain conveying system. Spray type attemperator is envisaged to contro l the

superheater and reheater outlet temperature for varying loads. The superheater and

reheater tubes will be a combination of radiation and convection type. Economizer will

be non-steaming type and shall be of modular construction.

2.4.3.2. Steam Generator Circulation System

The steam generator start up system envisages boiler start up drain system with boiler

start up drain circulation pump. Separator(s) will be used during start up for separating

the steam water mixture upto a load of 40% BMCR, above which it will be running dry.

Lower part of furnace / water wall will consist of vertical plain/rifle tubes or wrap

around /helical tubes.

2.4.3.3. Air and Flue Gas System

A balanced draft system will be provided. There will be two (2) axial type FD fans and

two (2) axial type ID fans and two (2) pairs of regenerative rotary type air pre-heaters.

One pair of air pre-heater will be used for primary air system & second pair for secondary

air system. Four (4) numbers of steam coil air pre-heaters-two on primary and two on

secondary air system will be provided for start-up, low load operation or abnormal

conditions when an increased air inlet temperature is considered desirable to minimize

the cold end corrosion of regenerative air pre-heaters.

2.4.3.4. Fuel Oil Burning System

Start-up, warm up and low load (upto 30%) carrying shall be done by Light Diesel Oil

(LDO). Boiler will be so designed that oil firing for flame stabilization will not be required

beyond 30% MCR. Necessary pumps, filters and heaters will be provided. Ignition of

heavy oil shall be directly by high energy arc igniters.

2.4.3.5. Coal Burning System

The coal burning system will comprise of coal mills of vertical spindle type which include

a) Bowl Mills,





Page C2-57

b) Roller Mills and

c) Balls & Race Mills or any approved equivalent

The number and capacities of the mills shall be so selected that while firing the worst and

design coals at BMCR/TMCR, the following spare capacities

With 90% mill loading of the working mills, no spare at 100% BMCR while firing

the worst coal.

With 90% mill loading of the working mills, at least one mill will be spare while

firing the design coal at 100% BMCR.

With 90% loading of the working mills at least one mill will be spare at 100%

TMCR load with worst coal firing. shall be ensured:

Coal from raw coal bunkers will be fed into the mills by belt driven gravimetric coal

feeders suitable for handling moist coal. There will be two axial Primary Air (PA) fans for

transporting the pulverized coal from mills to burners.

2.4.3.6. Auxiliary Steam System

Each of the unit will be provided with two auxiliary PRD stations i.e., high capacity and

low capacity PRDS taking their steam tap-offs from MS line and CRH line respectively. The

high capacity auxiliary PRDS will be designed for a minimum capacity of 150 T/hr and

steam parameters 16 ksc (g) and 3100C. Low capacity auxiliary PRDS will be sized for a

minimum capacity of 25 T/hr and steam parameters 16 ksc(g) and 210 0 C and will be

operated during the normal operation of the unit.

Auto-change over between the low and high capacity aux. PRDS stations depending on the

station auxiliary steam requirement is also envisaged. Each unit will have its own

auxiliary steam headers whereas for station services common station auxiliary steam

headers taking its tap off from the unit auxiliary PRD stations will also be provided. The

provision will also be made for interconnection with future units.

2.4.3.7. Chimney

A common multi-flue concrete chimney for the two units has been proposed for this

project. The total height of the chimney will be 275 meters above grade level as per

existing norms. External cage elevator (electric driven) will be provided for construction

and maintenance. The chimney shaft will be of RCC with slip form construction on a RCC





Page C2-58

raft foundation. As per statutory requirements, aircraft warning light and lightning

electrodes etc. on the top of the chimney would be provided.

2.4.3.8. Electrostatic Precipitators

In order to achieve the new standard for Thermal Power plants given by MoEF&CC

adequately sized electrostatic precipitators will be installed. It is proposed to install high

efficiency electrostatic precipitator having an efficiency that limits the outlet emission to

30mg/Nm3 with one filed out of service in all passes while the boiler is operating at its

MCR, firing worst coal having maximum ash content.

The electrostatic precipitators will have six (6) parallel gas streams, isolated from each

other on the electrical as well as gas side and will be provided with gas tight dampers at

inlets and outlets of each stream, so as to allow maintenance to be carried out safely on

the faulty stream, while the unit is working. ESP specific collection area shall not be

less than 250 m2/m3/sec at 100% TMCR. Electrostatic precipitator will be provided with

microprocessor based programmable type rapper control system and ESP management

system to ensure safe and optimum operation of ESP.

ESP transformer rectifier sets will use high flash point oil as the cooling medium. The dust

collection hoppers at all strategic locations will have a minimum storage capacity of eight

(8) hours. The hoppers will have heating arrangements to prevent ash sticking to the

sloping sides and down pipes. Level indicators to indicate ash levels in the hoppers and

trip the ESP in case of high ash levels in the ash hoppers are also envisaged to ensure

safety of ESP.

2.4.3.9. Flue Gas De-Sulphurization (FGD)

Flue Gas Desulphurization system and its auxiliaries for two (2) number steam generators

of 660MW nominal rating shall be installed. The FGD system shall be necessarily based on

Wet Lime Stone Forced Oxidation process technology to reduce the emissions of Sulphur

di oxide in flue gas produced by coal being fired in boiler to the limits specified. The FGD

system shall have an independent absorber for each unit, common limestone milling

systems for the two units and common gypsum dewatering system for the two units. An

auxiliary absorbent tank, common for the two units, for storage of absorber slurry of two

units shall be installed. The absorbers, limestone grinding system and gypsum dewatering

system shall be installed.





Page C2-59

All ducting, dampers, pumps, valves, supports, etc. as required for completeness of system

of absorbers, common limestone grinding system and common gypsum dewatering

system shall also be installed. Clean gas from the absorber shall be taken to the GGH

through two stage mist eliminators. Treated and reheated flue gas from the absorber

shall be discharged through a 275m high stack. Necessary lining in duct and chimney shall

be provided for protection of duct and chimney from low temperature acidic corrosion.

Provision shall be made for isolation of the flue gas flow through the absorber and also for

bypass of the absorber, to allow maintenance of the absorber with the unit in operation.

Limestone to the absorbers of the two (2 no) units shall be supplied by a wet limestone

grinding, common for the two units. Each wet limestone mill shall be fed from an

independent bunker through a gravimetric feeder. The classified limestone slurry from

the plant shall be stored in two (2 no) limestone slurry storage tank, from where the

slurry shall be pumped to the individual absorbers by dedicated limestone slurry pumps.

The gypsum from the two (2 no) absorbers shall be pumped by dedicated gypsum bleed

pumps to a common Gypsum Dewatering system consisting of multiple streams of

primary and secondary dewatering equipment. The water removed from the absorber

shall be recycled to the absorbers. The waste water from the system shall be collected and

neutralized using lime and neutralized effluent shall be pumped to Ash slurry sump.

Washed and dewatered gypsum from the dewatering system shall be fed to a belt

conveyor. Common gypsum dewatering system for the two units shall be installed. The

common dewatering system shall receive the gypsum slurry from each absorber through

slurry feed pipes and shall comprise of dewatering equipment. The filtrate water from

belt filter dewatering and washing system and the over flow from the secondary hydro -

cyclone shall be taken to a common filtrate water tank and further to absorber tank. For

both units SOx emission limit will be below to 100 mg/Nm3 (norm) dry.

2.4.3.10. Mercury abatement as co-benefit of reduction of NOx , SO2 and dust:

Mercury content in Indian coal ranges between 0.01 ppm to 1.1 ppm. Average mercury

content in coal found in India to be 0.272ppm as per CPCB. A typical power plant emits

90% of its mercury into air. The main reason for such high rate of emissions is that

mercury boils at operating temperatures of power plant.

Mercury exists in three forms in coal fired thermal power plants flue gas:





Page C2-60

i. Elemental Hg (O)

ii. Oxidized Hg (2+)

iii. Particle bound Hg (P)

Hg(2+) and Hg(P) are relatively easy to remove from flue gas using typical air pollution

control devices such as ESP and wet FGD.

Mercury is present as trace element in coal. When the coal is burnt in thermal power

plants, the mercury available in coal is released. Once released, the mercury is either

evaporated in the atmosphere; some part is trapped in pollution control instruments like

electrostatic precipitator, bag etc and the rest goes with the bottom and fly ash. The small

level of mercury can be tolerated without much harmful effects. The new thermal power

plant emissions standards limit the Hg emission from coal based thermal power plants to

30 µg/Nm3, whereas the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, USA has

suggested a threshold level of 100 µg/Nm3 in the ambient air. A detailed study

undertaken by a research group indicated that the Mercury content in Indian coals was

found to vary between 0.003 and 0.34 mg/Kg with the mean value being 0.14 mg/Kg. The

average mercury concentration in the flue gas at the outlet of ESP would be in range of 5

and 15 μg/Nm3. Significant portion of mercury present in feed coal have been found to be

associated with fly ash. Speciation of mercury in flue gas shows that proportion of

elemental mercury is much higher than oxidized mercury (ref)2. Control of mercury

emissions from coal-fired boilers can be achieved via controls used to remove particulate

matter (PM) and sulfur dioxide (SO2). This includes capture of Hg (particle phase) in ESP

and soluble Hg2+ compounds in wet flue gas desulfurization (FGD) systems.

STPL has proposed to install lime based scrubbing system for the combined control of SO2

and Mercury emissions. Hence the envisaged Mercury levels in the proposed power plant

will be less than 1 μg/Nm3. Considering a peak gas volume of 19,30,000 Nm3/hr from

each boiler, the estimated controlled Hg emissions from the proposed power plant will be

less than 4 g/hr hour which is insignificant. The predicted ground level concentration of

Hg will be in the order of 0.03 Nano Grams/m3, which is several folds lower than that of

the occupational health standard of 100,000 Nano Grams/m3.

2 Mercury Emissions from Coal Fired Power Plants of India - Case Study, Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad, Jharkhand, International Journal of Energy, Sustainability and Environmental Engineering Vol. 2 (1), September 2015, pp. 21-24,





Page C2-61

2.4.4. Turbine Generator Unit and its Auxiliaries

The scope of each TG unit of 660 MW shall broadly cover the Steam Turbine along with

its integral systems and auxiliaries like lube oil system, control-fluid system, condensers

condenser air evacuation system, HP&LP Bypass system, complete regenerative feed

heating system, condensate pumps along with their drives, boiler feed water pumps along

with their drives, automatic turbine run-up system, instrumentation and control devices,

turbine supervisory instruments, turbine protection and interlock system, automatic

turbine testing system and turbine hall EOT cranes. Necessary protective and supervisory

system to ensure trouble-free, safe and efficient operation of the turbo-generator will be

provided.

Steam Turbine- The steam turbine shall be tandem compound, single reheat,

regenerative, condensing, multi-cylinder design with separate HP, separate IP and

separate LP casing(s) or combined HP-IP and separate LP casing(s), directly coupled with

the generator suitable for indoor installation. The plant would be designed to operate as a

base load station. However, continuous operation under two-shift and cyclic modes

during certain periods of the year is also envisaged. The turbine design shall cover

adequate provision for quick start-up and loading of the units to full load at a fast rate.

The turbine shall be capable of operating on variable pressure mode as well as constant

pressure mode during part load and start up operation. The turbine shall be provided

with suitable margins for VWO flow.

The steam turbine shall conform to the following design and duty conditions:

i.

Output under Economic Maximum Continuous Rating (EMCR) at Generator terminals with Cycle make up of 3% of throttle steam flow and design condenser pressure.

660 MW (In case of static excitation system, the EMCR output at generator terminals shall be 660 MW plus excitation power requirement at EMCR).

ii. Turbine throttle steam pressure 247 kg/cm2 (abs) iii. Turbine throttles Main steam /Reheat Steam

temperature. 565OC/593OC

iv. Variations in rated Steam temperature & pressure

As per IEC-45.

v. Pressure drop in reheat circuit i.e., between HPT Exhaust & IPT inlet.

10% of HPT exhaust pressure.

vi. Condenser pressure with CW temperature of 330 C

77 mm of Hg

vii. Turbine speed 3000 rpm





Page C2-62

viii. Frequency variation range from rated frequency of 50 Hz

(+) 3% to (-5%) (47.5HZ to 51.5HZ)

ix. DM Water make up to thermal cycle under EMCR condition

3% of throttle steam flow

x. Final feed water temperature at 100 % TMCR & at EMCR condition.

287.5(+/-) 2.50 C

xi. Turbine protection against water induction. As per ASME-TDP-1(latest) xii. No. of extractions for regenerative feed water

heating As per cycle optimization by the bidder.

2.4.4.1. Condensing Equipment

Single pass or double pass condenser with stainless steel tubes of welded type as per

ASTM-A-249-TP304, shall be adopted. The condenser shall be with divided water box

construction. It shall be horizontal, surface type with integral air cooling section.

Condenser hot-well shall be sized for three (3) minutes storage capacity (between normal

and low-low level) of total design flow with the turbine operating at V.W.O condition, 3%

make-up and design back pressure. The condenser shall be adequately sized to cater to

all the conditions of turbine operation including the abnormal operating conditions such

that condenser would not be a bottleneck at any stage of operation. The exact condenser

parameters shall be optimized on the basis of site data and most economical combination

of cooling surface and circulating water quantity. The condenser shall be designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable requirements of the

Heat Exchange Institute (HEI), USA. Provision of separate sponge rubber ball type

condenser on-load tube cleaning system for each half of the condenser including ball

circulation pumps, strainer, ball monitoring system etc. shall be made.

2.4.5. Power Evacuation System

The power generated in the units will be evacuated through 400kV transmission lines by

Bihar Grid Company Limited/Power Grid Corporation Limited. STPL has requested Bihar

Grid Company Limited to determine power evacuation system for the project. Unit start-

up power requirement shall be met by back charging of one of 400kV transmission line.

The above scheme as considered presently shall be reviewed based on the finalized ATS

of the project. The provision presently being kept is approximate.

2.4.5.1. Auxiliary Power Supply System

The voltages adopted for the AC auxiliary system are:





Page C2-63

415 V for motors rated upto 200 kW. (Energy Efficient Motors have been

envisaged upto 160 KW.)

3.3 kV for motors above 200 kW and upto 1500 kW.

11 kV for motors rated above 1500 kW

The electrical auxiliary system proposed will derive station supply directly from 400 kV

systems via suitably rated transformers and unit supply via unit transformer connected

with the unit. These transformers will feed station and unit boards, which will have a

fault rating of 40 KVA break & 100 KVA make.

Presently, for FR provision, Station Transformer scheme has been kept considering 400

kV step up voltage. The Station supply is proposed to be derived at 400kV by providing

suitably rated 400 kV/11 kV station Transformer. The Generator Circuit Breaker scheme

shall also be evaluated based on techno economic consideration and power evacuation

voltage for the project. Interconnection between unit and station boards, between

different station boards will be provided to cater for unit or station transformer outage,

as shown in single line diagram.

2.5. Requirement of Major Inputs for Manufacture

2.5.1. Coal

Coal will be the primary fuel for the power plant. The coal required for the 2x660 MW

Thermal Power Project will be 3.9 MTPA (imported coal) or 6.7 MTPA (Domestic coal) at

90% PLF. The project is envisaged to be operated on imported coal through MMTC for 4

years and domestic coal from Deocha-Pachami coal block to Bihar State Power Generation

Company Ltd which was recommended by Ministry of Coal (MoC). Deocha-Pachami coal

block is located in south western part of Birbhum coalfield.

The coal allocation letter for Indian coal and copy of MoU for imported coal supply is

attached in Annexure 5. The calorific value of the typical Indian coal is in the order of

3500 Kcal/kg whereas the calorific value of the imported coal from Indonesia will be in

the range of 5300 to 5500 Kcal/kg.

2.5.2. Coal Transportation and Handling System

2.5.2.1. Coal Transportation

The daily coal requirement for 2X660 MW units shall be about 20400 TPD based on

washed coal with average gross calorific value of 3500 Kcal/kg, 90% plant load factor and





Page C2-64

2247.97 Kcal/kWh unit heat rate. The envisaged mode of coal transportation from the

coal mines to the power plant is by Indian Railways rakes. The rakes shall be unloaded at

the wagon tippler terminal. Similarly imported coal will be transported by railway lines

from nearest port as per the MoU with MMTC Limited. Eastern central railways has

provided inprinciple approval for railway siding arrangement vide letter dated 29th

September 2015, which is enclosed as Annexure 5.1.

2.5.2.2. Coal Handing System

It is proposed to have one coal handling plant of 2200 TPH rated capacity with parallel

double stream (one working and one standby) of belt conveyors along with facilities for

receiving, unloading, crushing and conveying the crushed coal to boiler bunkers a nd

stacking/reclaiming the coal to/from crushed coal stockyards. Two (2) nos.

unidirectional, rail mounted, travelling stacker-reclaimers, bucket wheel type are

proposed for coal stockyard management. Coal handling plant shall have a dedicated coal

unloading terminal. For unloading BOX-N wagon rakes four (3 nos) Wagon Tippers shall

be provided. For unloading BOBR wagon one no. Track Hopper shall be provided.

The overall operating hours of the coal handling plant shall be 16 hours spread over two

shifts per day leaving third shift exclusively for routine inspection and maintenance. The

proposed CHP shall cater to the peak daily requirement of coal for all units in two bunker

filling cycles in 12 hrs effective operation.

Coal received in BOX-N wagons will be unloaded in underground RCC hoppers by wagon

tipplers. Coal received in BOBR wagons will be unloaded in underground RCC hoppers by

Track Hopper. Unloaded coal shall be conveyed to the crusher house for sizing of coal to

(-)20mm. From crusher house the crushed coal can either be conveyed directly to the coal

bunkers through a series of conveyors or stacked on to the crushed coal stockpiles by

means of stacker reclaimers. Motorized travelling trippers shall be provided to feed

crushed coal into the raw coal bunkers of the boilers.

Coal stockyards proposed shall have crushed coal storage capacity equivalent to about 30

days coal consumption for 2x660 MW units.

2.5.3. Fuel Oil Handling Plant

Secondary fuel would be required for the initial start up. Light Diesel Oil (LDO) will be

used as Secondary fuel. Fuel oil unloading and storage system shall be designed to handle





Page C2-65

LDO. LDO shall be used for initial start-up, coal flame stabilization and low load operation

of the steam generator while firing coal.

Fuel oil (LDO) will be brought to the power plant by road tankers. The oil will be

unloaded from road tankers and will be pumped by unloading pumps to the storage

tanks. Fuel oil pressurizing pumps shall draw the oil from the storage tanks.

Three (3) number LDO unloading pumps, each of 100m3/hr capacity, shall be provided to

unload 5 nos. road tankers at a time. The unloading header with 80 NB x 5 nos. neoprene

rubber flexible hose connection shall be provided for unloading of light diesel oil.

Two (2) nos. of 2000m3 capacity fixed roof type LDO storage tanks shall be provided for

storage of LDO. One (1) no. of 100m3 capacity fixed roof type LDO day oil tank shall be

provided for auxiliary boiler. Two (2) nos. LDO transfer pumps, each of 25m3/hr capacity,

shall be provided for transfer of LDO from main storage tank to day oil tank. Oil-water

separator pit shall be provided. Control of FO Handling Plant shall be through DDCMIS.

2.5.4. Water Resources and Water Requirement for the Project

The total water requirement for proposed project will be around 3265 m3/hr. It is

proposed to be drawn from River Ganga.

2.5.4.1. River Water Intake System

The plant water for the project will be taken from the River Ganges, through properly

sized raw water intake system. Water will be collected by appro priate system to a

common sump at the river bed. Pump house will be located over the sump. The intake

water pump house will be provided with intake water pumps, piping, valves, fittings,

electrical, instrumentation and control systems. The raw water supply system will

provide raw water to the raw water storage reservoir in the power plant area for

subsequent use as circulating water makeup, supply to DM plant and other miscellaneous

requirements. The raw water pump structure will have three (3 x 50%) vertical raw

water pumps installed on the sump in a wet pit type pump structure.

The raw water pump shafts and column will be extended so that the motors will be

located above the maximum flood elevation. The raw water pumps will withdraw raw

water from the sump pit and discharge it to a single pipeline for conveyance to the raw

water reservoir. The raw water supply system will operate prior to plant initial operation





Page C2-66

to provide water for reservoir filling to maintain adequate storage requirement and

supply to the pre-treatment plant.

Location of the Proposed River Water Intake Point is enclosed as Figure 2.3 and the

layout showing the river water intake system is given in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2-3Location of the Proposed River Water Intake Point





Page C2-67

Figure 2-4 River Water Intake





Page C2-68

2.5.4.2. Water Requirement

The entire plant water requirements will be met from the river water. Water allocation

quantity from the river is 55 Cusec (5600 m3/hr), the water allocation letter from the

concern department is enclosed as Annexure 6. Specific water consumption of

~2.5m3/MWhr as against the current nation’s average of 4 m3/MWhr. Cooling tower

blow down will be used as make up water for bottom ash handling. The water balance

of the power plant is given in below table 2.3 and the flow diagram of the water balance

is enclosed as Annexure 7.

Table 2-3 Water Balance

End use Fresh water

make up

Recycled water

Evaporation

Wastewater discharge into

ETP and Recyled within the plant

Wastewater used for

gardening

Line losses etc 80 80 0 0 Raw water treatment and losses in transmission

105 80 25 0

DM plant regeneration etc 10 10 0 Boiler make up, soot blowing and losses

90 60 30 0

Cooling water pre-treatment and make up 2730 30 2160 600 0

Bottom ash transport and ash pond evaporation make up

415 415 0 0

Fly ash conditioning and dust suppression in coal yards etc

100 100 0 0

HVAC and AHS and plant service water water

180 180 0 0

FGD make up water 200 180 20 0

Total of plant use 3115 745 3175 685 0 Plant and colony domestic water 70 4 66 66

Net total 3185 745 3179 751 66

2.5.5. Water Treatment Systems

The water treatment system of the project comprises of Water Pre-treatment Plant,

Water Demineralizing Plant, Chlorination Plant, Condensate Polishing Plant and CW

Treatment Plant as described below:





Page C2-69

2.5.5.1. Water Pre-Treatment Plant (PT Plant)

The pretreatment plant would be designed to remove suspended/colloidal matter in the

raw water. Separate pre-treatment plant shall be provided for meeting the CW system

and Demineralization (DM) plant. A common chemical house shall be provided to store

chemicals such as chlorine, lime, alum & coagulant aid and respective lime, alum and

coagulant dosing equipments such as tanks, pumps etc for all the PT systems. The Water

PT plant for CW system shall consist of three (3) clarifiers of reactor type, of 1400

m3/hr capacity, one number of aerator and one number of stilling chambers (common

for all three clarifiers). The water PT plant for Potable water Plant shall two (2 x 100%

capacity) gravity filters each of 100 m3/hr for potable water purpose.

2.5.5.2. Water Demineralization Plant

The DM plant shall be sized to meet the make-up water requirement of the steam cycle,

make up to closed circuit auxiliary system, hydrogen generation plant, and stator water

cooling system. Considering the quality of water, it is proposed to adopt a service cycle

of 12 hrs for DM Plant. The D.M. plant shall consist of three (3) streams of 60m3/hr

capacity and each stream shall comprise of Activated carbon filter, Cation exchangers,

degasser system (comprising of degasser tower, degassed water tank, degassed water

pumps and degasser blowers etc), anion exchangers and mixed bed exchanger. The

plant shall be designed for semiautomatic operation with PLC based control. Two (2)

D.M. Water storage tanks each of 2000m3 capacity will be provided to store DM water.

One neutralization pit shall be provided for neutralizing the pH and discharging the

effluent water from the DM plant.

2.5.5.3. RO system for Zero Discharge Concept

The Reverse Osmosis (RO) plant is proposed to treat the cooling tower blow down

water to produce about 200 m3/hr of permeate. The purpose of RO system is to remove

the dissolved solids from the water to produce specified quantity of CW make up. Reject

water from RO trains will be used for dust suppression at coal handling plant.

2.5.5.4. Chlorination Plant

Separate chlorination plants will be provided for water pre-treatment (PT) plant and

Cooling Water system (at two locations). Cooling Water (CW) chlorination system

would consist of Three (3) numbers of chlorinator-evaporator sets of 100 Kg/hr





Page C2-70

capacity at two locations. For PT system there shall be Three (3) (3 x 50% capacity)

numbers of chlorinator sets each of 20 Kg/hr capacity. Chlorine leak absorption system

as plant emergency measure shall be provided for each of the CW chlorination plants

and PT chlorination plants to neutralize chlorine leakage from the plant.

2.5.5.5. Condensate Polishing Plant

For maintaining the feed water purity condensate polishing plant shall be provided in

the feed water cycle at the downstream of condensate extraction pumps as per the

existing practice. The condensate polishing plant shall be of full flow, deep mixed resin

bed type consisting of 3x 33% capacity service vessels for each unit.

2.5.5.6. CW Treatment System

It is proposed to provide suitable chemical treatment programme of acid dosing and

scale cum corrosion inhibitor for the CW system for control of CW system water

chemistry at two locations. It is proposed to provide acid & chemical storage tanks and

respective dosing pumps shall as a part of CW treatment system. The plant shall be

provided with neutralization pits, disposal pumps with required corrosion

measurement rack, instrumentation for interlocks and controls, control panels etc. to

facilitate safe & reliable operation.

2.5.6. Wastewater Treatment Systems

Wastewater to the tune of 720 m3/hr will be generated from the cooling tower blow

down, DM plant and clarifiers will be reused within the plant for ash conditioning,

bottom ash handling, dust suppression and green belt development. And hence no

waste water will be discharged into surface water bodies.

The liquid effluents shall be collected and treated/recycled generally as per the

following design philosophy.

i. The filter backwash water of PT Plant shall be collected and recycled back to the

CW system clarifier

ii. The sludge from clarifiers of Water PT plants shall be collected and sent to ash

slurry sump for disposal to ash dyke

iii. The waste effluents from neutralization pits of DM plant and Condensate

Polishing Plant shall be collected in the respective neutralization pits and

neutralized before pumping to ash slurry sump for final disposal





Page C2-71

iv. The Power cycle effluents sent to CW make up with the help of pumps

v. CW system blow down would be used for coal dust suppression system and Ash

handling Plant, FGD system. Excess CW blow down shall pass through RO system

for reuse. Water after RO system shall be sent to CW makeup.

vi. A coal settling pond shall be provided to remove coal particles from coal

handling plant waste. Decanted water shall be pumped back to the coal dust

suppression system

vii. Service water effluent drains from various areas shall be separately routed to a

sump. From the sump the service water shall be pumped up to lamella clarifier

for treatment of suspended solids. Treated service water shall be sent back to

service water tank to the extent possible for re-use.

2.6. Solid Waste Generation

2.6.1. Fly Ash Generation

Estimated quantity of ash produced from the proposed 2x660MW plant with 90% PLF

will be in the order of 2.7 MTPA and 0.48 MTPA when the plant is operated with Indian

coal and imported coal respectively. The envisaged fly ash generation from the

proposed 2x660MW plant is given in below Table 2.4. Out of the total ash generation

about 0.6 Million tons per year of bottom ash will be disposed to ash pond. 100% fly ash

utilization will be achieved from the fourth year operation as per the fly ash Notification

and its amendments. Fly Ash will be utilized for road construction and other related

works. Consent letter from Rural works Department, Government of Bihar for the

utilization of fly ash and Expression of Interest (EOI) from the Cement Manufacture and

brick manufactures is attached as Annexure 8.

Table 2-4 Envisaged Fly Ash Generation

Parameter Units Based on Indian

Coal Use Scenario Based on Imported Coal Use Scenario

Coal consumption in each 660MW unit

TPH 425 262

Total Annual coal demand in 2x660MW

MTPA 6.7 3.9

Ash content %w/w 41 12

Total ash generation TPD 8364 1506

Total ash generation MTPA 2.7 0.45

Bottom as generation @ 15% of MTPA 0.40 0.07





Page C2-72



total ash

Fly ash generation @ 85% of the total ash

MTPA 2.30 0.38

2.6.2. Ash Disposal Area

For ash disposal from Buxar TPP (2X660MW) plant, about 282 acres of land is

identified. The proposed land is located adjacent to railway siding facility. The ground

levels on proposed land are undulating. The ash disposal area is planned in an area of

about 232 acres. Balance 50 acres of land will be occupied by Over Flow Lagoon,

Sedimentation Basin & associated dykes, ash slurry pipe line corridor, maintenance

road etc along the periphery of the dyke and recirculation system facilities.

2.7. Reduction in Carbon Footprint

Sustainable power generation has been one of the prime objectives of STPL. Towards

achieving this objective, various measures shall be introduced to ensure minimum

degradation of the environment due to the operation of the power station. There is

growing concern world over and STPL is no exception towards contribution of green

house gases released due to fossil fuel firing towards global warming. As a part of the

agreement under Kyoto Protocol the CDM has been introduced to enable trading of

Certified Emission Reduction (CER) between the developed countries and the

developing countries. Although, this issue is being exhaustively deliberated to establish

long ranging solutions, accordingly, it is proposed to have super-critical boilers at the

Buxar Thermal Power Project. In view of the increased efficiency (2.4%) of super -

critical boiler as compared to sub-critical boiler, the coal consumption per unit of

electricity generation would be lower with consequent reduction in CO2 emissions. The

reduction in CO2 emissions would be of the order of 0.26 million tons per year. For the

entire life of the plant (i.e. 25 years), it would be of the order of about 6.5 million tons.

Since the super-critical technology is still under implementation stage in India,

operation of super-critical boilers using the low grade Indian coal is challenging and

technology barriers will have to be overcome. Investment costs for plant with super -

critical boilers is higher as compared to the plant with sub-critical boilers





Page C2-73

2.8. Project Cost Estimates and Schedule

The estimated cost of the power project is around Rs. 10,520.48 Cr as per the revised

estimates at June 2016 price level. The commercial operation (COD) of the 1st unit will

be in 52 months from the date of investment approval. 2nd unit will have a phase gap of

six months.




Chapter 3- Baseline Environmental Status

Page C3-74

3. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1. Preamble

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the study

area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study area covers

10 km radius around the boundaries of the proposed Project site.

3.2. Study area

The site is geographically located at North Latitude 25027’51” and East Longitudes

83052’49” and falls in the Survey of India Topo sheet 63 O/15. The site is located in the

village Chausa, of Buxar District. Chausa village is located at about 122 Kms West of

Patna, in the Bihar – Uttar Pradesh Border. Topographically the study area is plain with

slight undulations. High Resolution Satellite image showing project site and its Latitude

and Longitude is given in Figure 3.1 and the topo plan of the study area is shown in

Figure 3.2.

Site coordinators





Page C3-75

Figure 3-1High Resolution Satellite image showing project site and its Latitude and Longitude

3.3. Scope and Methodology of Conducting Baseline Study

The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline environmental

conditions, which are described with respect to climate, hydro-geological aspects,

atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, vegetation pattern, ecology, land use

and socio-economic profile of the people.

The baseline studies were undertaken by EPTRI during the period of April 2008 to June

2008 and again in 2015 AES Laboratories Pvt Ltd was awarded the assignment of

carrying out baseline monitoring studies for the monitoring location which selected as

for the earlier baseline study. The objective of this study is to find out environmental

settings of the study area in the current period in order to assess whether any variation

in the status of baseline environment had taken place from the earlier period.

The primary baseline data monitored by AES Laboratories Pvt Ltd covered three (3)

months i.e., from 11th March – 13th June 2015, and secondary data was collected from

Government and Semi-Government organizations.

As per the ToR No.J-13012/69/2008-IA.I (T) dated 07.06.2016, one month monitoring

is completed i.e, from 17th May 2016 to 15th June 2016, and secondary data was

collected from Government and Semi-Government organizations. The primary baseline





Page C3-76

data has been generated by AES Laboratories Pvt Ltd, an MoEF&CC and NABL approved

Environmental Testing Laboratory.

An area, covering a 10 km radial distance from the project site is considered as the

study area for the purpose of the baseline studies. As part of Environmental and Social

Impact Assessment, this study was undertaken for a period of one month from 17th May

2016 to 15th June 2016. Primary data on Water, Air, Land, Flora, Fauna & Socio -

Economic data were collected by a team of Engineers and Scientists. Secondary data

was collected from various Departments of State/Central Government Organizations,

Semi-Government and Public Sector Organizations. Table 3.1 gives various

environmental attributes considered for formulating environmental baseline and Table

3.2 gives the frequency and monitoring methodology for various environmental

attributes.

Table 3-1 Various Environmental Attributes

S.No. Attribute Parameter Source of Data

1 Land Use Trend of land use change for different categories

Topo sheet and Satellite imagery and ground truth verification

2 Ambient Air

Quality

As per NAAQs standard parameter i.e, Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), Sulfur dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Ammonia (NH3), Ozone (O3), Lead (Pb), Benzene (C6H6), Benzo (a) Pyrene, Arsenic (As), Nickel (Ni)

Ambient air quality monitoring at eight locations

3 Water Quality Physical, Chemical and Biological parameters

Water samples are collected at two surface water location and eight ground water locations during this study period

4 Noise levels Noise levels in dB(A) Noise level monitoring at eight locations

5 Ecology

Study of Existing terrestrial flora and fauna within the 10 km radius of project influence area through Quadrate and Line transact method for trees, shrubs and herbs, Point count method for birds, Belt transect method for road side trees and butterflies. Reconnaissance survey (Near Agricultural, Human habitations and Road side), identification of ecologically

Secondary sources and Field studies and Reconnaissance survey





Page C3-77

S.No. Attribute Parameter Source of Data sensitive receptors based on literature survey and field investigations

6 Geology Geological history Secondary sources

7 Soil

Soil types and samples analyzed for physical and chemical parameters.

Data collected from secondary sources and soil sample analysis at eight locations

8 Socio economic

aspects

Primary Survey was undertaken at the designated villages to establish the existing socioeconomic status of the study area. Socioeconomic indicators such as demography, literacy, health and livelihood, amenities and cultural aspects were studied, Secondary Published data on population and amenities obtained from Directorate of Census Operations, GOI characteristics were collected

Based on field survey and data collected from secondary sources

Table 3-2 Frequency and Monitoring Methodology

Attributes Sampling Measurement

Method Remarks

Network Frequency

A. Air Environment

Particulate Matter (PM10) Total 8 locations

to represent both upwind, down wind and background concentrations as per the CPCB guidelines.

24 hourly, two days in a

week and 12 weeks in a

month

Gravimetric (High- Volume with Cyclone) As per

CPCB Standards under November 18th 2009 Notification for NAAQS

Particulate Matter (PM 2.5)

Gravimetric (High- Volume with PM10 Impactor)

Oxides of Sulphur (SO2)

EPA Modified West & Gaeke method

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

Arsenite Modified Jacob & Hochheiser

B. Noise

Hourly equivalent noise levels

Requisite locations in the project influence area

Once

Instrument : Noise level meter

IS: 4954-1968

C. Water





Page C3-78

Attributes Sampling Measurement

Method Remarks

Network Frequency Water Quality Set of grab

samples At requisite locations for ground and surface water

Once

Samples for water quality collected and analyzed as per IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for sampling and testing of Industrial effluents Standard methods for examination of water and wastewater analysis published by American Public Health Association.

D. Land Environment Parameter for soil quality: pH, texture, electrical conductivity, organic matter, nitrogen, phosphate, sodium, calcium, potassium and Magnesium.

Requisite soil samples be collected as per BIS specification within project influence area

Once

Collected and analyzed as per soil analysis reference book, M.L.Jackson





Page C3-79

Figure 3-2 Topo Map (10 Km radius) of the Study area





Page C3-80

3.4. Administration Setup of the Study Area District3

Buxar district was carved out of Bhojpur district on 17 th March 1991 having Buxar town

as district Head Quarter. Earlier it was a sub-division of Bhojpur district. The Buxar

district is situated between 25°18’ to 25045’ latitudes north & 84020’ to 84040’

longitude east. The district is included in the Survey of India topo sheets nos.72 C. Its

geographical area is 1624 Km2. The river Ganga forms a natural boundary in the north

and northwest and the river Karamnasa makes forms district boundary in the west-

southwest. Bhabua & Rohtas districts in the south, and Bhojpur district in the east forms

its district boundary. It comprises of 2 sub-division, 11 community development blocks,

and 1102 villages. The total population of district is 1707643 i.e. Rural 1543476 &

Urban (2011 census). The district boundaries, administrative divisions, major roads,

rivers, and HNS locations are presented in Figure 3.3.

Figure 3-3 Administrative Map of Buxar District

Source: Ground Water Information Booklet Buxar District, Bihar State Central Ground water Board, Ministry of Water Resources, Govt. of India-Mid-Eastern Region, Patna

3 Ground Water Information Booklet Buxar District, Bihar State Central Ground water Board, Ministry of Water Resources, Govt. of India-Mid-Eastern Region, Patna





Page C3-81

3.5. Land Environment

3.5.1. Physiography and Drainage

3.5.1.1. Physiography

Buxar District is a part of the southern Ganga Plain. Physiography of the district is a

alluvial plain having gentle slope towards north. The plain land is marked by presence

of several minor depressions. The elevation of the land surface in the district varies

between 55 m AMSL and 85 m AMSL. Broadly the district can be divided into two micro

physiographic units,

The low-lying northern plain - extends from the Ganga. The river Ganga, has built

a long natural levee along its course. Every year this unit gets fresh deposit of

silt. As a result of siltation the region is rich in fertile soil. The low-lying areas are

important for the cultivation of wheat, Maize and gram. The entire geographical

area of Simri and Chakki blocks and a part of Buxar and Brahampur blocks fall

under this category.

The flat region of the south – It extends southwards of the railway line, which

passes through the district in east-west direction. This geomorphic unit is

densely populated, covered by network of canal of Sone Canal System. Its

western limit follows the course of river Ganga followed by Karamnasa. This unit

covers major part of the district occupying entire geographica area of Chausa,

Rajpur, Kesath, Nawanagar, Itarhi, Dumraon blocks and parts of Buxar &

Barhampur blocks. The unit is considered to be suitable for wheat and paddy

cultivation.

The Physiographic map of the study area (10 km radius) and the project site is

presented below Figure3.4





Page C3-82

Figure 3-4 Physiographic map of the study area

3.5.1.2. Physiography of the Study Area

The project area (10 km radius) exhibits plain terrain in the and relatively elevated

terrain in the southern side of the project site. There is no reserved forest within 10 km

radius from the project site boundary. The minimum and maximum elevation of the





Page C3-83

study area (10 km radius) is 53 m and 79 m AMSL (above mean sea level) respectively.

The maximum elevation is noticed in the southern side of the study area. There are no

hillocks noticed with in 10 km radius of the project site. The minimum and maximum

elevation of the Project site is 58.5 m and 64.5 m AMSL (above mean sea level)

respectively.

The Physiographic map of the project site in Figure 3.5

Figure 3-5 Phyisiography of the Study Area

3.5.1.3. Drainage of the Region4

This district is part of the Lower Ganga sub-basin of the Upper Ganga basin. The Ganga

touches the district near Chausa. The river Ganga flows towards east parallel to the

district boundary. The other rivers flowing from south to north, through the district, are

4 Ground Water Information Booklet Buxar District, Bihar Sta te Central Ground water Board, Ministry of Water Resources, Govt. of India-Mid-Eastern Region, Patna





Page C3-84

the Noni and the Thora. Most of these are ephemeral. The river Karmanasa delimits the

district in the west and southwest. It debouches in the river Ganga near Chausa. The

river Karmanasa is an important for irrigation in the western part of the district. There

are many lift irrigation schemes and side channels to carry overflowing river water to

the field. The drainage map of Bihar is given in Figure 3.6

Figure 3-6 Drainage Map of Bihar

3.5.1.4. Drainage of the study area

The Study area forms part Lower Ganga sub-basin of the Upper Ganga basin. The Ganga

touches the district near Chausa. The river Ganga flows towards east parallel to the

district boundary. The other rivers flowing from south to north, through the study area,

are the Noni and the Thora. Most of these are ephemeral. The river Karmanasa delimits

the district in the west and southwest. It debouches in the river Ganga near Chausa. The

river Karmanasa is an important for irrigation in the western part of the district. There

are many lift irrigation schemes and side channels to carry overflowing river water to





Page C3-85

the field. The Karmanasa River located at a distance of 0.8 km from the project

boundary in the north western site. The River Ganga is located at a distance of 3.5 km in

the north of the project boundary. The drainage and water bodies map is given in

Figure 3.7.

Figure 3-7 Drainage & Water Bodies Map of the Project Site





Page C3-86

3.5.1.5. Regional Hydrology

The Study area forms part of Lower Ganga sub-basin of the Upper Ganga basin. Ganga is

the major river in study area. The rivers are structurally controlled.

Bihar is India’s most flood-prone State, with 76 percent of the population, in the north

Bihar living under the recurring threat of flood devastation. Out of total geographical

area of 94,160 sq Km, about 68,800 comprising 73.06 percent is flood affected.

The plains of Bihar, adjoining Nepal, are drained by a number of rivers that have their

catchments in the steep and geologically nascent Himalayas. Kosi, Gandak,Burhi Gandak,

Bagmati, Kamla Balan, Mahananda and Adhwara Group of rivers originates in Nepal,

carry high discharge and very high sediment load and drops it down in the plains of

Bihar. About 65% of catchments area of these rivers falls in Nepal/Tibet and only 35%

of catchments area lies in Bihar. A review by Kale (1997) indicated that the plains of

north Bihar have recorded the highest number of floods during the last 30years. In the

years 1978, 1987, 1998, 2004 and 2007 Bihar witnessed high magnitudes of flood. The

total area affected by floods has also increased during these years. Flood of 2004

demonstrates the severity of flood problem when a vast area of 23490 Sq Km was badly

affected by the floods of Bagmati, Kamla & Adhwara groups of rivers causing loss of

about 800 human lives, even when Ganga, the master drain was flowing low.

A brief Flood history for the last 25 years in the State is as follows

3.5.1.6. Flood during (1998-2014)

In the year 1998 maximum discharge in the first week of July in most of the rivers in

North Bihar caused excessive pressure on the embankment along the rivers resulting in

damages at several places. Embankments of Burhi Gandak, Bagmati, Adhwara and Kosi

were partially damaged.

In the year 1999 there was unexpected heavy rains in the month of October in the

catchments in Nepal and flood level suddenly touched the 1987 HFL at Jhanjharpur

Railway Bridge in Kamla Balan river and the spurs in Kosi river experienced threat

throughout the flood season.

In the year 2000 Kamla Balan and Bhutahi Balan catchments received heavy rainfall

during first and last week of July resulting in unexpected rise of water level. In first

week of August 2000 Eastern Kosi Afflux Bund was punctured.





Page C3-87

In the year 2001 north Bihar was badly affected by flood due to heavy rain in Nepal

portion of catchments of rivers. Western Kosi embankment, Bhutahi Balan right

embankment, Bagmati left embankment and Burhi Gandak left embankment were

partially damaged.

During year 2002 North Bihar experienced serious flood and overtopping reported in

Kamla Balan left embankment and Khiroi right embankment. Four hundred and eighty

nine persons died.

In the year 2003 HFL at Bhagalpur surpassed the 1978 record of 34.18m and at

Gandhighat, Patna the HFL surpassed the 1994 record of 50.27m in river Ganga and the

status of flood in other rivers except Ganga and Gandak remain normal.

In the year 2004 catchment area of North Bihar rivers received heavy rainfall in the first

week of July itself which not only broke last three years flood record but also surpassed

the 1987 flood. Flood level at Dubbadhar site on river Bagmati surpassed all time high

flood level by about 1.18 m. Similarly Burhi Gandak river on 15.7.04 and Kamla Balan

river on 10.7.04 touched all time high flood level. This itself speaks about the fury of

flood in the year 2004. Many places in the embankments of north Bihar were breached,

resulting in flood inundation in a vast area of North Bihar. Unprecedented flood in river

Bagmati, Burhi Gandak, Kamla Balan and Bhutahi Balan and Adhwara group of rivers

breached the embankments at many places and there was loss of life and property on a

large scale. In river Kosi, situation by and large remain normal. There were altogether

53 number of breaches during 2004 flood season.

Flood situation during 2005 and 2006 remain normal but in the year 2007 the flood

situation was serious in north Bihar due to heavy rainfall in catchments of almost all

rivers flood situation during 2007 was very serious in north Bihar. There were 28

breaches at different locations of the embankments during 2007 flood season. Heavy

spell of rainfall (average 82.70mm) was observed in the beginning of flood season. In

Burhi Gandak and in Bagmati river basins there has been regular rainfall in July and

August which kept the river water level continuously rising.

In 2008 an appreciable amount of rainfall was received on very first day of monsoon

season i.e. 15th June (160mm at Chanpatia, 141 mm at Sikanderpur and 92.2 mm at

Khagaria ). July was the wettest month having maximum rainy days followed by August-





Page C3-88

08. There was an unprecedented flood due to breach near 12.9km of Eastern Kosi Afflux

Embankment near Kussha village in Nepal on 18th August 2008 that took a shape of a

catastrophe leading to miseries to lakhs of people in Sunsari and Saptari districts of

Nepal and Supaul, Madhepura, Araria, Saharsa, Katihar and purnea districts of Bihar.).

In 2009 The rainfall was scanty in entire Bihar in the year 2009. The situation was so

aggravated that Disaster Management Department GoB declared 26 districts as draught

hit. The first appreciable rain fall was recorded in late June-09 and early July-09. There

were few isolated storms at few stations of some basin in September and October. Flood

situation remained normal this year except few breaches such as Tilak Tajpur on right

embankment of river Bagmati under Runnisaidpur block of Sitamarhi district,

Gobindpur site of Labha Choukia Paharpur embankment of Mahananda river and

Sallehpur Tandespur site of Gandak river.

In 2010, the flood situation this year remained quite normal with normal average

rainfall. Only a few cases of breaches were reported viz. eastern Kosi Afflux Bundh and

Saran 10 Embankment in a length of 200 m between 122.75 km and 122.95 km near

Simaria village both due to sharp change in the river course. In 2010 the flood situation

remained normal with a few exceptions such as damage of nose of spur no-9 between

Ismailpur and Bindtoli and that of revetment in 30 m length near Kazikoria of Raghopur

village u/s of Vikramshila Setu and at spur no-9 and spur no-7 in a length of 138 m and

65 m respectively in d/s of Vikramshila Setu under Gopalpur block of Bhagalpur district,

both on left embankment of river Ganga due to non-completion of anti-erosion work on

time. Damages were also reported in Pataraha Chharki and P. D. ring bund in Gopalganj

district under Chief Engineer, Siwan jurisdiction. It is worth mentioning that water level

attained by river Ganga at Bhagalpur this year was recorded as 34.17 m on 19.08.2011

against the water level of 33.26 m recorded last year on 03.09.2010. There was

unprecedented flood in river Sone also with a max discharge of 9,58,000 cusecs on

25.9.11 at Indrapuri Barrage whereas the same was 61,130 cusec last year on 14.7.10.

In 2011 Gandak remained in spate since the beginning of monsoon and kept on exerting

pressure on both its embankments. The incessant pressure on Gandak right

embankment, especially in Pipra-Piprasi reach was so enormous that round the clock

vigil and protection work had become necessary. The problem was accentuated by

eroded length of spur at Dhuniawapatti at 26.75 km of PP right embankment.





Page C3-89

Heavy rain in the catchment of Burhi Gandak resulted in overbank flow in smaller rivers

and rivulets causing some flash flood in West Champaran, where overtopping on

railway track was reported at Sikta railway station.

From year 1991 to 2014 monthly observation has been done during flood season. There

is no flood in the month of June during above periods. Years of flood has been shown in

the table below.

Years of Flood Month Lalbeghiaghat Sikanderpur Samastipur Rosera Khagaria

June W.L<D.L W.L<D.L W.L<D.L W.L<D.L W.L<D.L

July 1998,02,03,04 1993,1998,02, 03, 04

93,96,02,03, 04,98,99,

93,96,98, 99,02,03, 04,06

2000,01,12

August 1998,01,05, 93,98,99,01, 02,03,05

93,,95,,96,98, 99,01,02,03, 04,05

91,94,96, 98,99,01, 03,05,06

91,94,96, 98,99,01, 03,05,06

September

1994,01,05 94,98,99, 01,05,11

93,94,96,98,99, 01,03,05

93,94,98, 99,01,03,05

91,92,93, 94,95,96, 98,99,01, 03,05

October

W.L<D.L W.L<D.L 2001,11 94,01,12 2003,09,12

W.L <D.L = Water level below Danger Level.

3.5.2. Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data

Information of land use and land cover is important for many planning and

management activities concerning the surface of the earth (Agarwal and Garg, 2000).

Land use refers to man's activities on land, which are directly related to land (Anderson

et al., 1976). The land use and the land cover determine the infiltration capacity. Barren

surfaces are poor retainers of water as compared to grasslands and forests, which not

only hold water for longer periods on the surface, but at the same time allow it to

percolate down.

The terms ‘ land use’ and ‘land cover’ (LULC) are often used to describe maps that

provide information about the types of features found on the earth’s surface (land

cover) and the human activity that is associated with them (land use). Satellite remote

sensing is being used for determining different types of land use classes as it provides a

means of assessing a large area with limited time and resources. However satellite

images do not record land cover details directly and they are measured based on the





Page C3-90

solar energy reflected from each area on the land. The amount of multi spectral energy

in multi wavelengths depends on the type of material at the earth’s surface and the

objective is to associate particular land cover with each of these reflected energies,

which is achieved using either visual or digital interpretation. In the present study the

task is to study in detail the land use and land cover in and around the project site. The

study envisages different LULC around the proposed project area and the procedure

adopted is as below in Figure 3.8





Page C3-91

Figure 3-8 Flow Chart showing Methodology of Land use mapping

3.5.2.1. Scale of Mapping

Considering the user defined scale of mapping, 1:50000 IRS-P6, LISS-III data on 1:50000

scale was used for Land use / Land cover mapping of 10 km radius for proposed site.

The description of the land use categories for 10 km radius and the statistics are given

for 10 km radius.

SOI Topographical

maps

IRS-P6, LISS-II FCC Imagery Collateral Data

Landform May

Initial Rapid Reconnaissance

Interpretation

Keys Visual

Interpretation

Land use Classes

Pre-field Interpretated Map

Ground Truth

Updated & Validated Land use

Ground Photographs

Land use MAP

QAS





Page C3-92

3.5.2.2. Interpretation Technique

Standard on screen visual interpretation procedure was followed. The various Land use

/ Land cover classes interpreted along with the SOI topographical maps during the

initial rapid reconnaissance of the study area. The physiognomic expressions conceived

by image elements of color, tone, texture, size, shape, pattern, shadow, location and

associated features are used to interpret the FCC imagery. Image interpretation keys

were developed for each of the LU/LC classes in terms of image elements.

May 2015 FCC imagery (Digital data) of the study area was interpreted for the relevant

land use classes. On screen visual interpretation coupled with supervised image

classification techniques are used to prepare the land use classification.

Digitisation of the study area (10 km radius from the proposed site) from the topo

maps

Satellite Data Selection: In the present study the IRS –P6 satellite image and SOI

topo sheets of 63-O/14 and 66-O/15 have been procured and interpreted using

the ERDAS imaging and ARC-GIS soft ware adopting the necessary interpretation

techniques.

Satellite data interpretation and vectorisation of the resulting units

Adopting the available guidelines from manual of LULC mapping using Satellite

imagery (NRSA, 1989)

Field checking and ground truth validation

Composition of final LULC map

The LULC Classification has been done at three levels where level -1 being the broad

classification about the land covers that is Built-up land, agriculture land, waste land,

wet lands, and water bodies. These are followed by level –II where built-up land is

divided into towns/cities as well villages. The Agriculture land is divided into different

classes such as cropland, Fallow, Plantation, while wastelands are broadly divided into,

Land with scrub and without Scrub and Mining and Industrial wasteland. The wetlands

are classified into inland wetlands, coastal wetlands and islands. The water bodies are

classified further into River/stream, Canal, Tanks and bay. In the present study level II

classification has been undertaken. The Satellite imagery of 10 km radius from the

project site is presented below:





Page C3-93

3.5.2.3. Field Verification

Field verification involved collection, verification and record of the different surface

features that create specific spectral signatures / image expressions on FCC. In the study

area, doubtful areas identified in course of interpretation of imagery is systematically

listed and transferred on to the corresponding SOI topographical maps for ground

verification. In addition to these, traverse routes were planned with reference to SOI

topographical maps to verify interpreted LU/LC classes in such a manner that all the

different classes are covered by at least 5 sampling areas, evenly distributed in the area.

Ground truth details involving LU/LC classes and other ancillary information about crop

growth stage, exposed soils, landform, nature and type of land degradation are recorded

and the different land use classes are taken and the same is presented below:

3.5.2.4. Description of the Land Use / land cover classes

Built-up land- It is defined as an area of human settlements composed of houses,

commercial complex, transport, communication lines, utilities, services, places of

worships, recreational areas, industries etc. Depending upon the nature and type of

utilities and size of habitations, residential areas can be aggregated into villages, towns

and cities. All the man made construction covering land belongs to this category. The

built- up in 10 km radius from the proposed project site is as follows.

S.No Land use Area in Sq.km Percentage

1 Built-up (Rural, Urban and Industry) 2.36 0.65

The built up land occupies 0.65 %.

Agricultural land- This category includes the land utilized for crops, vegetables, fodder

and fruits. Existing cropland and current fallows are included in this category.

It is described as an area under agricultural tree crops, planted adopting certain

agricultural management techniques. The Agricultural land in 10 km radius from the

proposed project site is as follows.

S.No Land use Area in Sq.Km Percentage

1 Crop Land 249.39 68.62

2 Plantation 21.36 5.88

3 Fallow Land 70.06 19.28





Page C3-94

Of all the agricultural lands, Crop land occupies maximum of 68.62 % area within 10 km

radius.

Wasteland- Wastelands are the degraded or underutilized lands most of which could

be brought under productive use with proper soil and water management practices.

Wasteland results from various environmental and human factors.


1 Barren Land 0.12 0.03

Water bodies- The category comprises area of surface water, either impounded in the

form of ponds, reservoirs or flowing as streams, rivers and canals. River cater channel is

inland waterways used for irrigation and for flood control. The details are furnished

below


1 Water Bodies – Tank, River 20.13 5.54

The land use analyses show that the area is of predominantly Built-up Land of urban,

Rural and Industrial nature followed Crop Land in the core and buffer zones of the study

area.

Different Land use classes around 10 km radius from the project site is given in Table

3.3 and bar chart showing the land use classification is given in Figure 3.9.

Table 3-3 Land use classes around 10 km radius

S.No Land use Percentage Area in Sq.Km 1 Barren Land 0.03 0.12

2 Built-up Land (Rural, Urban and Industry) 0.65 2.36

3 Crop Land 68.62 249.39

4 Fallow Land 19.28 70.06

5 Plantation 5.88 21.36

6 Water body (Tank - River) 5.54 20.13

7 Total 100.00 363.42





Page C3-95

Figure 3-9 Bar Chart showing the Land use classes around 10 km radius

IRS Resourcesat-2 L4FMX multispectral satellite data of 16th December 2013 was

utilized for the buffer zone and core zone are shown in Figure 3.10 and Figure 3.11

Figure 3-10 IRS Resourcesat-2 L4FMX Image of the Buffer Zone (10km)





Page C3-96

Figure 3-11 Land Use/Cover Map of 10 Km Radius Area





Page C3-97

3.6. Geology and Soil Quality

3.6.1. Geology of the Region5

Geologically, it represents the extreme northern front of Indian sub-continent. These

include (i) the belt of Himalayan foothills in the northern fringe of Paschim Champaran

(ii) the vast Ganga Plains, (iii) the Vindhyan (Kaimur) Plateau extending into Rohtas

region, (iv) thesporadic and small Gondwana basin outliers in Banka district, (v) the

Satpura Rangextending into large part of the area North of Chotanagpur Plateau, (vi) the

parts of Bihar Mica belt in Nawada, Jamui and Banka districts and (vii) the Granite

Gneissic complex of Chotanagpur plateau. Nearly two third of Bihar is under cover of

Ganga basin composed of alluvium and masks the nature of basement rocks. The

geological map of Bihar is presented in Figure 3.12

Figure 3-12 Geological Map of Bihar

Source: State of Environment Report, Bihar- Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Patna & Department of Environment & Forest, Govt of Bihar, February 2007.

5 State of Environment Report, Bihar- Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Patna & Department of Environment & Forest, Govt of Bihar, February 2007.

Project Site





Page C3-98

3.6.2. Geology of the Study Area

Buxar District forms a part of the axial belt of the Indo-Gangetic plain and consists of

Newer and Older alluvium of Quaternary age. The entire study area forms part of

Alluvium of sedimentary formation. The generalized geological succession is given

below in Table 3.4

Table 3-4 General Geological Succession

System Series Formation Lithology

Quaternary

Recent to Upper Pleistocene

Newer Alluvium Sand, silt and clay , Coarse textured facies

Upper to middle pleistocene

Older Alluvium Clay, with Kankar, fine medium, coarse grained sand. Coarse textured facies.

-------------------------------------------------Unconformity--------------------------------------------------- Pre Cambrian Vindhyan formations

The geology of the study area is presented below in Figure 3.13





Page C3-99

Figure 3-13 Geology of the Study area

3.6.3. Geomorphology

Buxar district is a part of the southern Ganga Plain. It extends southwards of the

railway line, which passes through the district in east-west direction. This geomorphic

unit is densely populated, covered by network of canal of Sone Canal System. Its

western limit follows the course of river Ganga followed by Karmnasa. This unit covers

major part of the district occupying entire geographical area of Chausa, Rajpur, Kesath,





Page C3-100

Nawanagar, Itarhi, Dumraon blocks and parts of Buxar & Barhampur blocks. The unit is

considered to be suitable for wheat and paddy cultivation.

The land forms / geomorphic units and structures such as fractures, fissures and faults

have been interpreted from the recent satellite image. All the landform / geomorphic

units and structures occurring in the study area are mapped. The geomorphology and

structures of the area plays the vital role in identifying the ground water potential

zones. The geomorphic unit of the study area is as follows:

1) Fluvial Origin – Active Alluvial Plain

2) Fluvial Origin – Older Alluvial Plain

3) Fluvial Origin – Older Flood Plain

4) Fluvial Origin – Younger Alluvial Plain

All the land forms are having very good ground water potential. The Project site is

located in Younger Alluvial Plain of Fluvial Origin. Apart from the above there are

fractures occur in and around the project site. The fractures are the good ground water

conduit. High yielding bore wells expected in the intersection of fractures. In the

proposed site there are no promising fracture systems. However, there are promising

fracture aquifer within 1km from the project boundary. The Geomorphology of the

study area is presented below in Figure 3.14





Page C3-101

Figure 3-14 Geomorphology of the Study area

3.6.4. Soil Environment

There are mainly three types of soil found in the district.

a) Recent Alluvium Soil (Levee Soil) - It is found along the banks of the River Ganga.

It is a new alluvium calcareous soil and white to light grey in colour. It is light in





Page C3-102

texture and has medium to high fertility. The pH varies between 6.6 and 7.5.

Main crops are Maize, sugarcane, Wheat, Gram and other Rabi crops.

b) Tal Soil (Kewal soil) - It is found in south of the levee soil. It is light to dark grey

in colour and very fertile. Its water retention capacity is high. Its texture ranges

from medium to heavy and pH varies between 7 and 8. This soil is suitable for

Rabi crops, Wheat, Gram, Peas and Barley etc.

c) Old Alluvium Soil - It is a combination of Kewal soil and clayey soil. According to

textural analysis clay is the dominant particle of this soil. It covers the central

part of the district, which is free from floods. pH value ranges from 7 to 8.5. Its

colour is reddish yellow to grey. The fertility of this soil is low to medium in

upper layer, and medium to high in the lower layers. The content of Zinc is very

poor in this soil and hence, it requires Zinc Sulphate to maintain its fertility. The

main crops grown in this soil are paddy, wheat, gram and linseeds.

3.6.4.1. Soil Classification

Soil type and its fertility of an area are essential to plan for cropping. Soils are primarily

derived from parent rocks. The colour, texture and mineral content are normally used

to classify the soils. The soils in the study area are classified into 4 types and is

presented in the below table. The soil map of the study area is prepared based on the

National Bureau of Soil Survey and Land use Planning, Nagpur

S.No. Soil Classification 1 Deep Well Drained, Sandy Soil

2 Deep, moderately well drained, calcareous, clayey soils

3 Deep, well drained, gravelly clay soils

4 Shallow Moderately Drained, Clayey Soil

The project site lies Shallow Moderately Drained, Clayey Soil. The Soil map is presented

below in Figure 3.15





Page C3-103

Figure 3-15 Soil classification of Study area

3.6.4.2. Background Soil Quality in Study Area

For studying soil quality in the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the

existing soil conditions in and around the existing plant area representing various land

use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were

determined. The present study of the soils establishes the baseline characteristics and





Page C3-104

this will help in future in identifying the incremental concentrations if any, due to the

enhancement of capacity and allied operations.

Eight locations within the 10 km around the study area were selected for soil sampling.

At each location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60

cm and 90 cm below the surface and are homogenized with the help of stainless steel

soil-sampling probe. Various physical and chemical parameters were analyzed as per

Indian Standards. The soil sampling locations are given in the Table 3.5 and the same

are shown in Figure 3.16

Table 3-5Details of Soil Sampling Locations

Location Name Location Code Type of Land Chunni S1 Agriculture Land

Surkraulia S2 Agriculture Land Bhataura S3 Agriculture Land

Banarpur S4 Agriculture Land Akhoripur Gola S5 Agriculture Land

South Boundary of the project site

S6 Agriculture Land

Sarenja S7 Agriculture Land

Bara S8 Agriculture Land





Page C3-105

Figure 3-16 Soil Quality Monitoring Location of the Study area

Physico-Chemical characteristics of soil samples collected within the study area is given

in Table 3.6 and the soil quality test reports are presented in Annexure 9. The soil

sampling results are compared with the standard soil classification.





Page C3-106

Table 3-6 Physico-Chemical characteristics of soil samples collected within the study area

S.No. Parameters Units Test Method S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 1 pH USEPA-846-9045(C) 8.5 6.95 7.95 8.34 6.83 7.86 8.18 8.2 2 Electrical conductivity (us/cm) APHA 2500(B) 283 242 212 193 510 221 263 265 3 Organic carbon % IS 2720(P22):1972 0.28 0.33 0.27 0.3 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.23 4 Total nitrogen mg/kg APHA 4500 160 230 183 220 211 274 162 208 5 Total phosphorous mg/kg AES/TD/ENV/SOP 59.0 23.8 23.9 19.2 26.48 30.24 26.6 19.58 28.18 6 Potassium mg/kg EPASW-846 Method 7610:1986 50.5 23.8 16 74 106.5 146.5 112 80 7 Iron mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 122 140 105 98 158 110 78 86 8 Water holding capacity % IS 2720 37 38.8 51.9 37.6 46.8 38.6 40.4 42.2 9 Zinc mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 36.82 25.37 26.05 32.92 28.75 33.1 29.9 21.4

10

Soil Texture - Sand % IS 2720(P4) 10.15 3.92 5.77 7.82 9.27 6.5 10.63 9.78 Silt % IS 2720(P4) 79.85 82.08 81.23 81.18 80.23 82.5 80.37 80.22 Clay % IS 2720(P4) 10 14 13 11 10.5 11 9 10

11 Copper mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 20.63 16.8 13.76 16.58 17 22.75 19.65 19.21 12 Acidity mg/kg APHA 2310 B 20 200 100 50 20 100 50 20 13 Alkalinity mg/kg APHA 2320 B 140 400 150 360 360 150 250 200 14 Chlorides mg/kg EPASW-846 Method 9253:1986 70 30 20 20 30 150 50 50 15 Moisture Content % IS 2720 (Part2):1970 2.76 2.64 2.2 3.4 4.87 3.7 4 3.9 16 Specific Gravity IS 2720 (P3) 1.16 1.28 1.31 1.42 1.56 1.37 1.37 1.21

17 Cadmium mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) ND

(<2.0) 18 Chromium mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 12.2 10.9 12.1 17.62 18.03 10.75 11.35 12.53 19 Cation Exchange Capacity meq/100gm By Calculation 2.4 1.2 1.8 2.7 3.9 1.7 1.5 2 20 Sodium Absorb Ratio By Calculation 4.15 1.23 2.91 2.72 2.47 1.51 1.61 2.2 21 Permeability cm/sec IS 2720 (P17) 8.6E-07 9.2E-07 8.9E-07 7.6E-06 7.8E-06 6.8E-07 5.8E-06 9.2E-06

22 Lead mg/kg USEPA 6010C:2007 4.4 3.32 3.36 4.05 3.48 6.26 4.05 5.48 23 Porosity % By Calculation 1.82 1.48 1.66 1.57 1.52 1.47 1.71 1.6

Note: BDL: Below Detectable Limi t





Page C3-107

3.6.4.3. Soil Analysis Result

The soil results are compared with soil classification as given in the Hand Book of

Agriculture, Indian Council for Agricultural Research (ICAR), New Delhi. The analysis

shows that the soil in the study area is predominantly silty clay in texture. Water

holding capacity of the soil ranges from 37.0 % to 52%. pH ranges from 6.83 to 8.5,

which indicates that the soil is moderately acidic at some areas and moderately alkaline

at some area.

Nutrients: Soil quality was tested for nutrients. The total organic carbon range from

0.19% to 0.33% indicates that soil is rated as low in organic matter as per ICAR

essential nutrients rating. The same is evident from the nitrogen content in soils which

in the current scenario ranges from 162 to 274 mg/Kg. Hence the soil requires organic

fertilizers to support vegetation.

Iron content was reported to range from 78 to 158 mg/kg, which indicates that the soil

is rich in iron. Other heavy metals such as Zinc, Lead, Chromium and Manganese were

also present in appreciably high quantities. Electrical conductivity was found ranging

less than 1millimhos/cm which indicates the soil is free of salinity and salt content.

Cation exchange capacity is in the range of 1.2 to 3.9 meq /100 gm. Phosphorous one of

the macro nutrients is in the range of 19.2 to 30.2 mg/kg which indicates that

Phosphorous present in the soil is medium.

3.7. Meteorological Conditions

Micro-meteorological data forms an important component of the Environmental Impact

Assessment (EIA) study. As a part of the EIA study, both published long-term data and

site specific meteorological data were collected as per the ToR (Terms of Reference)

awarded for the proposed project. A meteorological station was installed at the project

site.

3.7.1. Climatological Data – IMD Chapra (Bihar) Observatory

The meteorological data from “Climatological Normals” published by Indian

Meteorological Department (IMD) Pune was referred. The data was recorded over a

period of 30 years (1971 to 2000). The nearest IMD station located at Chapra (Aerial

distance - 90 km) was referred for the current project. This data was compared with the

site specific data generated during baseline monitoring studies.





Page C3-108

Chapra region experiences maximum temperature to the tune of 46.6 oC in June,

whereas the lowest temperature reported during the winter season (February month)

was in the order of 3.3ºC. The maximum relative humidity is generally experienced

during months of July, August and September with a peak value of 83%. The lowest

humidity was observed during April which was only 33%. The average annual rainfall of

the Chapra region was reported to be in the order of 1164.6 mm and about 95% of

rainfall occurs during monsoon season. The predominant wind direction throughout the

year was found to be North East and South West. Seasonal as well as annual wind rose

diagrams of the Chapra meteorological station are presented in Figures 3.17 and 3.18

respectively. The summary meteorological data of Chapra station is given in Table 3.7.

Table 3-7 Climatological Normals (30 Years Met Data: 1971-2001) Station: Chapra

(Bihar)

Month

Temperature (ºC)

Humidity (%)

Rainfall (mm)

Mean Extremes Monthly

Total

No. of Rainy days

Heaviest fall in

24 Hrs

Date and

Year Highest Lowest Highest Lowest

Jan 25.8 7.3 30.2 4.4 71.5 12.2 1.1 50.4 29,1959

Feb 30.3 8.4 39.6 3.3 62 13.5 1.1 32.5 6,1949 Mar 37.3 12.7 40.8 7.7 47.5 2.7 0.4 36.8 13,1940

Apr 41.0 18.4 44.1 13.3 42 8.5 0.6 46.2 22,1909 May 42.2 20.7 45.4 17.3 53 37.4 2.2 58.6 21,1964

Jun 42.2 23.0 46.6 18.1 65.5 112.7 6.1 135.4 20,1952

Jul 37.2 23.0 41.7 20.2 79 347.3 12.5 245.4 3,1981 Aug 36.1 23.6 39.4 19.8 79.5 304.6 11.5 205.0 3,1948

Sep 35.1 22.7 37.8 19.6 79.5 255.8 9.5 307.1 15,1921

Oct 34.5 18.3 36.9 13.8 72 59.9 3.1 243.0 5,1977 Nov 31.4 12.3 35.8 8.2 65 4.5 0.3 89.4 10,1969

Dec 27.3 8.5 32.0 4.7 69 5.4 0.7 21.6 27,1988

Avg/ Annual

Total 42.0 7.2 46.6 3.3 65.5 1164.6 49.1 307.1





Page C3-109

Figure 3-17 Annual Windrose as per IMD Chapra Observatory Data

Winter (January-February) Summer (March-May)

Monsoon (June-September) Post Monsoon (October-December)

Figure 3-18 Windrose Diagram for Various Seasons as per IMD Chapra

Observatory Data





Page C3-110

3.7.2. Site Specific Meteorological Data for the Study Period

The continuous weather monitoring station was installed near the proposed project site

at a height of 5m above the ground level and hourly measurements of the following

parameters were measured at site during the study period i.e. from 17th May 2016 to

15th June 2016. Wind speed (m/s), wind direction (Degrees), Temperature (ºC), Relative

humidity (%), Cloud cover and Rainfall (mm) were monitored.

3.7.2.1. Site Specific Ambient Temperature Profile

The maximum mean ambient dry bulb temperature was observed during the study

period was 42.0°C, whereas the minimum mean ambient dry bulb temperature was

observed to be 22.0°C.

3.7.2.2. Relative Humidity

The maximum humidity of 100% and minimum humidity of 30% was observed during

the study period. However the average humidity during the study period was reported

to be 64.4%.

3.7.2.3. Wind Direction and Wind Rose

The predominant wind direction (Figure 3.19) during the study period was from East.

The average wind speed during the study period was about 3.23 m/s (11.6 Kmph).

Figure 3-19 Site Specific Wind Rose for the Study Period (17th May 2016 to 15th June 2016)





Page C3-111

3.7.3. Rainfall

The study area receives fairly good amount of rainfall during South west monsoon. 10

years rainfall for the Buxar district was collected from State Government Department.

The 10 years normal rainfall of the study area is about 997.8 mm. The 10 years monthly

average rainfall and 10 years average rainfall of collected for the Buxar District is

presented below. The monthly average rainfall for 10 years depicts that the Buxar

District receives rainfall during South west monsoon period.

The yearly rainfall clearly depicts that highest rainfall received during 2009. In the past

10 years, during 2008 to 2011 and 2013 the study area received highest rainfall.





Page C3-112

The rainfall deviation from normal indicates that out of 10 years, 6 years the study area

received above normal rainfall. About 70% of above normal rainfall received during

2009.

3.8. Air Environment

The ambient air quality with respect to the study area of 10 km radius around the

proposed project site forms the baseline information. Various sources of air pollution in

the region are rural activities, traffic and industries. This section describes the selection

of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques and

frequency of sampling.

3.8.1. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Eight (8) air quality monitoring stations were selected for a detailed monitoring as per

the CPCB guidelines. Details of the air monitoring stations are presented in Table 3.8.

Location of the ambient air quality stations are presented in Figure 3.20.





Page C3-113

Table 3-8 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Location Code

Location Distance from

Boundary (Aerial Distance in km)

Direction (with reference to project

site)

AAQ1 Sonpa Jalilpur

4.0 SW

AAQ2 Banarpur 0.0 NW

AAQ3 Sikraul 2.0 W

AAQ4 Bechanpurva 5.0 E

AAQ5 Sarenja 7.0 E

AAQ6 Paliya 6.3 NNE

AAQ7 Dewasthapur 8.4 NE

AAQ8 Chausa 3.7 NE

Figure 3-20 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Location of the Study area





Page C3-114

Banarpur (Near proposed project site) Bechanpurva

Weather Monitoring Station Banarpur

(Near proposed project site) Cloud Cover Measurement

The following criteria parameters were monitored according to the terms of reference

and National Ambient Air Quality Standards as stated under MoEF&CC Notification

dated 16th November, 2009: (1) Particulate Matter (PM10) (2) Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

(3) Sulphur dioxide (SO2) (4) Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) (5) Carbon monoxide(CO) (6)

Ozone (O3) (7) Lead (Pb) (8) Ammonia (NH3) (9) Arsenic (As) (10) Nickel (11)

Hydrogen Sulphide (12) Mercury and (13) Hydro Carbons.

The AAQM results of current baseline (May 2016 to June 2016) are compared with the

previous baseline monitoring done on March to June 2015 and April 2008 to June 2008.

The consolidated data of ambient air quality monitoring is shown in the Table 3.9. and

comparision table is given in Table 3.10. The test analysis report is enclosed as

Annexure 9.





Page C3-115

Table 3-9 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants

(May 2016 to June 2016) in μg/m3

Parameters AAQ1 AAQ2 AAQ3 AAQ4 AAQ5 AAQ6 AAQ7 AAQ8 NAAQs

Standard

PM10 37.1 42.15 42.1 47.26 44.47 36.32 46.27 43.41 100

PM2.5 18.80 22.92 21.13 27.01 25.40 18.35 26.36 24.78 60

SO2 11.13 14.26 12.53 16.68 15.87 11.16 16.26 15.5 80

NO2 13.23 15.95 14.8 19.15 17.48 13.22 18.70 17.35 80

O3 6.48 9.6125 8.075 15.36 11.82 6.28 14.98 11.53 100

NH3 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 400

CO, mg/m3 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 04

Pb <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 1.0

Ar, ng/m3 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 -

Ni, ng/m3 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 -

H2S <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 -

Hg <0.001 <0.01 <0.01 <0.001 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 -

HC <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 -

Table 3-10 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants (April

to June 2008 VS March to June 2015)

Parameters

AAQ1-Sonpa Jalilpur

AAQ2-Banarpur

AAQ3-Sikraul AAQ4-

Bechanpurva AAQ5-Sarenja

April to

June 2008

Baseline

March to

June 2015

Baseline

April to

June 2008

Baseline

March to

June 2015

Baseline

April to

June 2008

Baseline

March to

June 2015

Baseline

April to

June 2008

Baseline

March to

June 2015

Baseline

April to

June 2008

Baseline

March to

June 2015

Baseline

TSPM * 91.9 - - - 74.4 - 91.6 - 110.4 -

PM10 - 35.9 - 40.8 - 40.4 - 46.4 - 44.4

RSPM 46.9 - - - 47.2 - 49.2 - 53.5 -

PM2.5 - 17.9 - 22.3 - 20.2 - 12.4 - 25.8

SO2 11.2 10.7 - 12.9 10.5 12.0 13.7 16.6 10.6 14.4

NO2 12.1 12.8 14.8 14.8 14.4 14.8 19.3 14.2 17.2

CO 1 <1 1 <1 1 <1 1 <1 1 <1

*The SPM values represent the sum of RSPM values and PM values of size more than 10 microns.





Page C3-116

3.8.1.1. Observation

Ambient air quality for the study area during May to June 2016 shows the PM10

concentration varies from 36.32 to 47.26 μg/m3 and the maximum PM10 concentration

of 47.26 μg/m3 was recorded at Bechanpurva. The PM2.5 concentration varies from

18.35 to 27.01 μg/m3 and the maximum PM2.5 concentration 27.01 μg/m3 is at

Bechanpurva. The SO2 concentration varies from 11.13 μg/m3 to 16.68 μg/m3 and NO2

concentration varies from 13.22 μg/m3 to 19.15 μg/m3 respectively. Similarly, the NO2

concentration varies from 13.22 to 19.15 μg/m3 and the Ozone concentration varies

from 6.28 to 15.36 μg/m3. The concentration of CO in the villages is found below

stipulated standards.

From the observed concentrations, it can be seen that at all the locations the PM10,

PM2.5, SO2 and NOX pollutants levels are well within the National Ambient Air Quality

Standards as notified on by CPCB.

3.9. Noise Environment

To evaluate the noise level in the study area, noise levels were recorded at eight

locations in the study area. The measurements were carried out using Type 1 noise level

integrated sound level meter. Monitoring was done at each location during the study

period for 24 hrs on hourly basis to obtain hourly equivalent sound pressure level. A

digital noise level meter was used to record the noise levels. From these values, day

time and night time and 24-hrs Leq values were calculated. Day time is considered from

0600 hrs to 2200 hrs and night from 2200 hrs to 0600 hrs.

Noise monitoring locations are represented in Table 3.11 and locations of the ambient

noise monitoring are presented in Figure 3.21. The measured noise levels have been

compared with the standard specified in Schedule III, Rule 3 of Environmental

Protection Rules.

Table 3-11 Noise Sampling Locations

S.No Location Location

code Type of Area

1 Sonpa Jalilpur N 1 Residential Area 2 Banarpur N 2 Residential Area

3 Sikraul N 3 Residential Area

4 Bechanpurva N 4 Residential Area

5 Sarenja N 5 Residential Area





Page C3-117

S.No Location Location

code Type of Area

6 Paliya N6 Residential Area 7 Chausa N7 Residential Area

8 Dewasthapur N8 Residential Area

Figure 3-21 Noise Sampling Locations

Based on the recorded noise levels, various statistical parameters have been

presented in Table 3.12 and test report is enclosed as Annexure 9.

Table 3-12 Recorded Noise Levels (May 2016)

S.No Location code Leq

Day Night

1 N 1 58.94 50.96 2 N 2 68.94 60.08

3 N 3 44.93 41.59

4 N 4 47.60 43.67

5 N 5 48.50 42.13 6 N6 62.13 54.63





Page C3-118

S.No Location code Leq

Day Night 7 N7 61.09 53.50 8 N8 51.86 44.53

Observations- Average day time and night time noise levels at residential areas in the

study area was found to be varying from 44.93 to 68.94 dB (A) and 41.59 dB(A) to 60.08

dB(A) respectively and the values are higher than CPCB limits for residential areas.

3.10. Water Environment

Both water resources and water quality have been studied within the 10 km radius of

the Project site under the EIA study. The source of water for the proposed project is

from River Ganga.

3.10.1. Surface Water Resources in the Study Area

The town Buxar is situated on the banks of River Ganga. The river Ganga flows from

West-South to East-North Direction. The danger level of river Ganga at Buxar is 62.85

meters. As expected, all the canals & drains in the town discharges in the River Ganga.

The project site is located at 3.5 Km from River Ganga.

The Karmanasa River is a tributary of the Ganges which is located at about 0.8 Km

from the project site. It originates in Kaimur district of Bihar and flows through the

Indian states of Uttar Pradesh and Bihar. Along the boundary between Uttar Pradesh

and Bihar it has the districts of Sonbhadra, Chandauli, Varanasi and Ghazipur on its left

and the districts of Kaimur and Buxar on its right.





Page C3-119

River Ganga

Figure 3-22 Surface water Resources in the Study area

3.10.2. Surface Water Quality

Water quality parameters of surface water resources within the study area have been

considered for assessing the water environment. To assess the water quality of the

study area a surface water sampling location was selected in two locations. The water

sample was collected in the Ganga River near to the project site and which is the major

source of water for the project. The location details of the sampling is given below in

Table 3.13 and Google map showing the location is given in Figure 3.28

Table 3-13 Surface Water sampling

Sample Location Location Code Karmnasa River SW 1

Ganga River- Upstream SW 2 Ganga River- Downstream

SW3

The observation of the surface water sampled during May 2016 is given below and

surface water quality analysis report is enclosed in Annexure 9.

Observations- The pH of Ganga river waters is found to be in the range of 7.14 to 7.23

along the river stretch. The ranges for desirable limit of pH of water prescribed for

drinking purpose by IS:10500, 1993 and WHO (1984) as 7.44 to7.59. DO level in the

Karmnasa River is 6.5mg/l and DO in Ganga River is 7.7 mg/l & 7.8 mg/l. The TDS varies

in the range of 324 mg/l to 364 mg/l. Total hardness is in the range of 144 mg/l to 160

mg/l. The Heavy metals concentrations are non-detectable. Bacteriological studies

reveal that Coliform bacteria is absent in the all sampling point. This inferred from the





Page C3-120

water quality parameter results, the water is suitable for drinking and can be used with

filtration.

3.10.3. Ground Water Resources

3.10.3.1. Regional Hydro-geological Features and Aquifer Details

The water bearing properties are the main guiding lines for grouping the geological

formations of Bihar. On this basis, four main subdivisions are made;

a) Main alluvial basin with good ground water potentialities having considerable

granular zone with effective porosity.

b) Marginal alluvial terrain which forms a part of the alluvial tract, but is dominated

by finer clastics or inadequate alluvial thickness and granular horizons fringing

the hard rock terrain and the localised alluvial pockets in the rocky terrain, viz;

near rivers and in valleys (20-30 m of alluvium).

c) Hard rock terrain, comprising the entire Archaean terrain and Vindhyan hill

areas with very little groundwater potentialities.

d) Soft rock areas, viz; Gondwana and Tertiary areas.

Hydrogeological parameters of the state have been depicted in the Figure 3.19. On the

basis of geological and geomorphological set up and characteristics of aquifers ,Bihar

can be divided into two broad hydrogelogical units, (1) fissured formations and

(2)porous formations. The details of the characterization of consolidated/ semi-

consolidated /unconsolidated formations in terms of age group, lithology,

hydrogeological conditions and ground water potential are summarized in Figure 3.23





Page C3-121

Source: State of Environment Report, Bihar- Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Patna & Department of Environment & Forest, Govt of Bihar, February 2007.

Figure 3-23 Hydrogeology Map of Buxar District Water level Behaviour- The pre-monsoon (May 2011) depth to water level generally

varies from 2.69 to 10.93 m bgl in major part of the district. The post-monsoon water

level generally varies from 0.42 to 7.2 m bgl in major part of the district. The post-

monsoon water level generally varies from 0.42 to 7.2 m bgl in major part of the district.





Page C3-122

3.10.3.2. Ground Water Resources- Block wise

The net annual replenishable ground water resource as on 31st March’09 works out to

be 59153 ha m. The gross annual draft for all uses works out to be 21093 ha m.

Allocation of ground water for domestic and industrial use for 25 years works out to be

5288 ha m. The stage of ground water development is 40.2%. The stage of ground water

development is highest in Chakki 81.0% and lowest in the Nawanagar 20%. Except the

Chakki block, all the blocks are under safe category. Block wise Stage of Ground Water

of Buxar District is depicted in Fig.5.

The proposed Project site falls under Chausa Block according to ground water

management survey by CGWB. Ground Water Resources & Development Potential of

Buxar District as per CGWB is given below in Table 3.14

Table 3-14 Ground Water Resources & Development Potential of Buxar District (in Ham)

Block Net Ground

water Availability

Existing Gross

Ground water

Draft for Irrigation

Existing Gross Draft

for Domestic

and industrial

water supply

Existing Gross Draft for all uses

Allocation for Domestic and

Industrial Requirement supply upto

next 25 years (2029)

Net ground water

Availability for future Irrigation

Development

Stage of Groundwater Development

Chausa 4509 1245 145 1390 232 3033 30.8

Source: Ground Water Information Booklet Buxar District, Bihar State Central Ground water Board, Ministry of Water Resources, Govt. of India-Mid-Eastern Region, Patna

3.10.3.3. Occurrence of Groundwater

The ground water occurs under water table condition in aquifer disposed at shallow

depth. This aquifer is commonly tapped by dug-wells of depth ranges from 5 to 10 m

bgl. The shallow tube-wells tap unconfined aquifer and disposed at a depth between 20

to 60 m. The ground water in the phreatic aquifer occurs under water table conditions.

The deep tube-wells have been constructed tapping aquifers disposed at deeper levels.

These aquifers are in semi-confined to confined condition. The arsenic free deep tube

wells constructed by CGWB is upto depth of 208m at Brahampur, 204 m in Arjunpur

village of Simri block and 223, in Churamanpur village of Buxar block. The study area is

completely composed of alluvial formation. The deeper aquifer in the area is free fro m

arsenic.

Ground water level data for a monitoring well collected from CGWB located in Chausa

observation well indicates that the deepest water level is 6.35 m bgl during May 2007





Page C3-123

and shallowest water level is 0.15 m bgl during August 2005. The season wise ground

water level data collected for Chausa monitoring well (1996 – 2014) is given in below

Figure 3.24

Figure 3-24 The season wise ground water level

The occurrence of ground water in the study area (10 km radius) has been studied in

detail by collecting the water level from 12 well (Bore well). The ground water levels

are collected from the bore well. At the time of the collection of water level the yield of

the wells have been recorded by oral enquiry. The ground water levels vary between





Page C3-124

9.2 to26.3 m bgl and yield of the wells varies between 60 to 220 liters / minutes. Ground

water level contour has been constructed and presented below.

The ground water level zone map shows that the water level ranging between 4-4.8 m

occupies 40% area. The project site is located in 3.2-4.0 m zone. The ground water level

zone map is presented below. The location, ground water level and depth collected from

the 10 m radius is given the Table 3.15 and Figure 3.25

Table 3-15 Ground water level and depth (10 m radius)

S.No Location Longitude Latitude Water level in m

1 Sikrau 83° 51' 58.575" 25° 28' 15.523" 3.3

2 Sarenja 83° 53' 42.91" 25° 26' 35.985" 4.0

3 Bara 83° 51' 17.8" 25° 30' 41.831" 2.5

4 Chunni 83° 55' 28.443" 25° 30' 1.057" 4.1

5 Shukraulia 83° 54' 57.263" 25° 27' 55.136" 4.6

6 Sonpa 83° 50' 28.631" 25° 27' 28.752" 3.0

7 Gahmar 83° 48' 33.503" 25° 29' 53.861" 2.0

8 Sayar 83° 48' 47.894" 25° 26' 4.805" 3.2

9 Sangraon 83° 51' 19" 25° 23' 19.309" 4.6

10 Kukurha 83° 58' 7.943" 25° 26' 53.974" 4.8

11 Loharpur 83° 54' 34.477" 25° 33' 3.343" 2.1

12 Hethua 83° 55' 51.229" 25° 24' 16.873" 4.9





Page C3-125

Figure 3-25 Ground water level zone of the Study area





Page C3-126

3.10.3.4. Movement of Groundwater

The movement of ground water is controlled by the hydraulic conductivity of the

aquifer and hydraulic gradient. In study area the hydraulic conductivity is mainly based

on the Primary porosity. The homogeneity of the sedimentary formation plays a vital

role in the movement of the ground water. In the study area the formations are

netrogenous in nature. The hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer is mainly due to the

coarseness of the sedimentary formations and fractures in the hard rock formations.

The entire Study area composed of Alluvial formation. Based on the water level data

(Pre and Post monsoon) the ground water table has been constructed for the Pre and

Post monsoon periods. The ground water table contour depicts two different patterns

1) ground water moves from south to north and 2) Northwest to north east part the

study area ( along the course of Ganga river) both the seasons. The hydraulic gradient

in the project site is moderate and has been observed as 4.6 m/Km in pre monsoon and

3.9 m/Km in post monsoon. The ground water table constructed for pre and post

monsoon periods of the study area is presented in Figure 3.26 & 3.27





Page C3-127

Figure 3-26 Ground water Table of the Study area (Pre monsoon)





Page C3-128

Figure 3-27 Ground water Table of the Study area (Post monsoon)

3.10.3.5. Evaluation of Aquifer Parameters

Pumping test is the most accurate reliable and commonly used method to evaluate the

hydraulic parameters of an aquifer, efficiency of a well / bore well, safer operational

rates of pumping and selection of suitable pump. The methods of a pumping test are





Page C3-129

highly varying in its application. The main objective of pumping test is to determine the

aquifer parameters such as Transmissivity (T), Storage co-efficient (S) Hydraulic

Conductivity (K), well performance and safe yield for execution of water supply.

The information on pumping test conducted in the same hydrogeological environment

has been collected from the government department. The results are as follows:

Bore Well in m 120

Static Water level in m 3.4 Pump capacity 7.5 HP

Discharge in lpm 260 lpm Time in min. 320 minutes Stability not attained Drawdown in m 1 m Specific Capacity lpm per m draw down 260

Transmissivity of the fractured aquifer m2/day 120 Rate of recovery In 40 minutes static water level was

attained

The pumping test results reveals that the drawdown is1 m at the pumping rate of 260

lpm. As the potential of aquifer, the drawdown is moderate. It is also observed that the

average T Value is 120m2/day which indicates the aquifer is productive aquifer.

3.10.4. Ground Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water resources within the study area

have been considered for assessing the water environment. To assess the water quality

of the study area, four ground water sampling locations. These samples were collected

as grab samples and were analysed for various parameters. Thirty water quality

parameters are analysed. The ground water sampling locations are listed below in

Table 3.16 and the locations are marked in 10 km map which is given below in Figure

3.28. The ground water quality analysis report is enclosed in Annexure 9.

Table 3-16: Details of Water Sampling Locations

Location Location Code Type Surkraulia GW 1 Bore well Bhataura GW 2 Bore well

Sikraul GW 3 Bore well Sarenja GW 4 Bore well Gosainpur GW5 Bore well Akhauripur Gola GW6 Bore well

Sirkaul GW7 Bore well

Katgharawa GW8 Bore well





Page C3-130

Figure 3-28 Water Sampling locations

Observation: The analysis results of ground water sampled during May 2016 indicate

that the average pH ranges in between 7.10 to 7.35, TDS ranges from 352 mg/l to 421

mg/l which are within the desirable limits, total hardness is in the range of 140 mg/l to

284 mg/l and the total hardness is within desirable limit. The heavy metal

concentration is non Detectable in all sampled locations and well within the standards

for drinking water as per IS: 10500 –1991 “Specification for drinking Water” for ground

water. Fluorides concentrations are in the ranges of 0.36 mg/l to 0.66 mg/l which are

found within the drinking water standards. The ground water analysis results are

compared with the standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 –1991 “Specification

for drinking Water” for ground water and the parameters are found to be well with the

desired Specification for drinking Water standard.





Page C3-131

3.11. Ecological Environment

3.11.1. Introduction

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to

recording the existing biological resources in the study area. Ecological studies are one

of the important aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment with a view to conserve

environmental quality and biodiversity. Ecological systems show complex inter -

relationships between biotic and abiotic components including dependence,

competition and mutualism. Protecting the environment and making efficient use of

natural resources are two of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social

development. The task of preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of

both national and global significance since there are no boundaries to the propagation

of anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the

successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline

information and undertake effective management plan.

Generally, biological communities are good indicators of climatic factors. Studies on

biological aspects of ecosystems are important in Environmental Impact Assessment for

safety of natural flora and fauna. The biological environment includes terrestrial and

aquatic ecosystems. The animal and plant communities co-exist in a well-organized

manner. Their natural settings can get disturbed by any externally induced

anthropological activities or by naturally occurring calamities or disaster. So, once this

setting is disturbed, it sometimes is either practically impossible or may take a longer

time to come back to its original state. Hence changes in the status of flora and fauna ar e

an elementary requirement of Environmental Impact Assessment studies, in view of the

need for conservation of environmental quality and biodiversity. Information on flora

and fauna was collected within the study area. Relevant details on aquatic life within the

study area were also collected from secondary sources.

Every anthropogenic activity has some adverse impact on the environment. More often

it is harmful to the environment than benign. However, mankind as it is developed

today cannot live without taking up these activities for his food, security and other

needs. Consequently, there is a need to harmonize developmental activities with the

environmental concerns. Environmental impact assessment (EIA) is one of the tools

available with the planners to achieve the above-mentioned goal.





Page C3-132

Habitat loss and fragmentation are major threats to biodiversity. Environmental impact

assessment and strategic environmental assessment are essential instruments used in

physical planning to address such problems. Yet there are no well-developed methods

for quantifying and predicting impacts of fragmentation on biodiversity. (Gontier et. al

2006). Biodiversity has become one of the central environmental issues in the

framework of recent policies and international conventions for the promotion of

sustainable development. Biodiversity data are rapidly becoming available over the

Internet in common formats that promote sharing and exchange. Currently, these data

are somewhat problematic, primarily with regard to geographic and taxonomic

accuracy, for use in ecological research, natural resources management and

conservation decision-making. (Guralnick, 2007).

For an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) to effectively contribute to decision-

making, it must include one crucial step: the estimation of the uncertainty factors

affecting the impact evaluation and of their effect on the evaluation results. Knowledge

of the uncertainties better orients the strategy of the decision-makers and underlines

the most critical data or methodological steps of the procedure. Accounting for

uncertainty factors is particularly relevant when dealing with ecological impacts, whose

forecasts are typically affected by a high degree of simplification. (Geneletti, 2003).

The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), the Ramsar Convention, and the

Convention on Migratory Species (CMS) recognize Environmental Impact Assessment

(EIA) as an important decision making tool to help plan and implement development

with biodiversity “in mind.” The Conventions require Signatories (“Parties”) to apply

EIA to proposals with potential negative impacts on biodiversity to help meet their

objectives, so that development proposals respect mechanisms for the conservation of

biodiversity, result in sustainable use of biodiversity resources, and ensure fair and

equitable sharing of the benefits arising from use of biodiversity. According to the

International Association for Impact Assessment (IAIA), Impact Assessment provides

opportunities to ensure that biodiversity values are recognized and taken into account

in decision-making. Importantly, this involves a participatory approach with people

who might be affected by a proposal.

The main aim of Conservation of Biodiversity is to ensure “No Net Loss”. The

biodiversity-related Conventions are based on the premise that further loss of





Page C3-133

biodiversity is unacceptable. Biodiversity must be conserved to ensure it survives,

continuing to provide services, values and benefits for current and future generations.

The following approach has been chosen by the IAIA to help achieve ‘no net loss’ of

biodiversity:

1. Avoidance of irreversible loss of biodiversity.

2. Seeking alternative solutions to minimize biodiversity losses.

3. Use of mitigation to restore biodiversity resources.

4. Compensation for unavoidable loss by providing substitutes of at least similar

biodiversity value.

5. Looking for opportunities for enhancement.

This approach can be called “positive planning for biodiversity.” It helps achieve no net

loss by ensuring the safety and survival of rare or endangered or endemic or threatened

(REET) species. This approach has been adopted by the proposed project in the study

under report.

3.11.2. Scope of Study

Scope of work for this study is in line with the ToR assigned to the industry which

includes identification of ecologically sensitive receptors based on literature survey and

field investigations and their mitigation with conservation action plan. The study was

carried out in core area (project site) and in buffer area i.e. 10 km periphery from th e

project site. The study was carried out systematically and scientifically using primary

and secondary data in order to bring out factual information on the ecological

conditions of the project site and its surroundings. The study involved assessment of

general habitat type, vegetation pattern, preparation of inventory flora and fauna of

terrestrial ecosystem in 10 km radius of the power project site. Biological assessment of

the site was done to identify whether there are any rare or endangered or endemic or

threatened (REET) species of flora or fauna in the project site or core area as well its

buffer zone and to identify whether there are any ecologically sensitive area within the

area that is likely to be impacted (buffer zone). The study also designed to suggest

suitable mitigation measures if necessary for protection of wildlife habitats

conservation of REET species if any.





Page C3-134

3.11.3. Objectives and purpose of the study

The basic objectives of the study are to evaluate the status of the flora and fauna of the

core area and the buffer areas with specific reference to the rare or endangered or

endemic or threatened (REET) species. Different levels of disturbance have different

effects on ant diversity. If our goal is to preserve biodiversity in a given area, we need to

be able to understand how diversity is impacted by different management strategies.

Because diversity indices provide more information than simply the number of species

present (i.e., they account for some species being rare and others being common), they

serve as valuable tools that enable biologists to quantify diversity in a community and

describe its numerical structure.

The objectives of the study

Baseline data of Terrestrial biological environment by studying distribution

pattern, community structure, population dynamics and species composition of

Flora and Fauna.

Baseline data of aquatic Flora and Fauna at the project area, including the coastal

area is to be ascertained by proper surveys including mangroves and marshes and

other coastal vegetation, sand dunes.

Areas used by protected, important or sensitive species of Flora or Fauna for

breeding, nesting, foraging, resting, over wintering, migration shall be as

ascertained.

Preparation of exhaustive seasonal wise list of Flora and Fauna of ter restrial and

aquatic ecosystems of core and buffer zones with special reference to Endangered

and dominant species.

Taking photographs of the flora and fauna including local habitats with date for

each season showing the status of the project site and study area for vegetation

cover.

Discussing the impact related issues with local villagers and EIA functional area

experts on air, water, noise and other pollutants.

Impacts quantification through vegetation analysis and site specific parameters.

Preparation of the mitigation measures.

List of Flora and Fauna issued by the concerned Divisional Forest officer.





Page C3-135

3.11.4. Review of the Literature

3.11.4.1. Literature Review

Considering the time limitation to undertake statistically rigorous data gathering

system, study also relied on existing knowledge about the ecology and biodiversity of

the region. Importantly, there are quite a few studies undertaken in the past dealing

with the impacts of ports etc. on flora and fauna and other concerns of biodiversity

conservation in many countries. Literature on power plants and associated

environmental issues were downloaded and collated through internet. Various relevant

literatures were surveyed during the study for collection of baseline information. Maps,

reports and documents collected from the project proponent were also reviewed and

used in the present study. Books on flora, fauna and wildlife were also studied in order

to understand the biology of several species.

3.11.4.2. Consultations

During the study, series of consultations were made with both technical and non

technical stakeholders including the proposed power plant staff, Forest Department

officials to get better picture on the project area/core area and buffer zone habitats. In

order to know more about the seasonal presence of several faunal species and their

movement, study team informally consulted and discussed with quite a large number of

local people, from the villages, herders and farmers that dwell close to the proposed

project. Other than the above, for the purpose of this study, relevant information was

also collected from following sources: Records of Forest Department; Publications in

National and International Journals; Google imageries/Google Maps; Communications

with subject experts.

3.11.4.3. General information regarding the region

Details of the flora and fauna were collected from Forest department and local villagers

(Letter to Forest Department acknowledged by Office of the FRO, Buxar and Local

people interaction photos and video are the evidence). Papers published in Journals

were collected to check the primary data collected during survey. The study area is

more of form lands and village settlements. There are no types of Sanctuaries and

National parks or reserve forests in the study area. River Ganga is passing in the study

area but no commercial fishing is done till date. The main livelihood of the people is





Page C3-136

agriculture and brick making only. The climate of the district is moderate. The hot

weather begins from the middle of March when hot westerly winds begin to blow

during the day. The months of April and May are extremely hot, normally the monsoon

sets in by the third week of June and continues with intermission till the end of

September. The cold weather begins from the months of November and lasts till the

beginning of March, January is the coldest month when the temperature comes down as

low as 10 ̊C. From the month of April, till the break of monsoon, the district experiences

occasional thunder storms also. Rain sets sometimes in June accompanied by fall in

temperature and increase in humidity. The district experiences maximum rain during

the months of July and August. There is slight rainfall in October but November and

December are quite dry. Due to deforestation, the forest area of this district is very thin.

Some common trees of this district are Mango, Seasum, Mahua, Bamboo and some types

of long grasses (Jhalas) are found near diara area of the river Ganga. Jhalas grass is

mostly used in roof making of kuccha houses. The forest of the district is not rich in

their products. Fire wood is the most important among its products. The district had

variety of wild animals and game birds when the forest is thick. With the increase in

irrigation facilities, the area under cultivation has grown, consequently diminishing the

forest. The wild animals have suffered in the process and their number has gone down

very considerably. Neelgain, spotted deer, are found in the Plains and near the Ganga

bank. A considerable number of monkeys are also found in the Buxar town area. Birds of

different types like Parrot, Patridges, Quails are also found in the district.

3.11.4.4. Live Stock

The district of Buxar has large majority of the people engaged in agricultural pursuits

and deriving their livelihood from agricultural pursuits. The possession of livestock

generally adds to the social status of the farmer. The quality of the live stock has

improved because of serious efforts by the Government and the response of the

farmers. Since the district has quite a large population of prosperous agriculturists

mostly due to the suitability of facilities of canal irrigation the farmers of the canal

irrigated area have considerably cattle wealth. Agricultural census conducted taken in

1991 shows the cattle wealth of the district as: Cow-184325, Sheep-15430, Horse-3341,

Camel-15, Buffalo-114112, Goat-82186, Mula-240, Ass-1646, Pig-13235, Poultry-70305.





Page C3-137

3.11.4.5. Study Area

GPS coordinates of the sampling points consider for the study is given in Table 3.17

and the map showing the Google earth depecting the GPS coordinates is given in Figure

3.29.

Table 3-17 GPS coordinates of the sampling points

Sampling point Latitude Longitude Core area 25°28'36.09"N 83°53'2.80"E

1 25°28'57.63"N 83°52'51.18"E 2 25°28'39.69"N 83°52'0.45"E 3 25°27'15.08"N 83°51'17.96"E 4 25°27'29.43"N 83°50'36.50"E 5 25°26'4.44"N 83°50'19.63"E 6 25°25'9.43"N 83°50'4.26"E 7 25°27'45.99"N 83°53'28.49"E 8 25°26'51.88"N 83°53'18.47"E 9 25°24'57.35"N 83°53'53.40"E

10 25°27'15.89"N 83°57'59.41"E 11 25°31'5.58"N 83°56'7.95"E 12 25°31'26.66"N 83°54'25.88"E 13 25°31'57.17"N 83°53'58.96"E 14 25°32'30.55"N 83°54'25.17"E 15 25°34'5.00"N 83°54'22.38"E 16 25°30'26.81"N 83°51'20.71"E 17 25°29'48.62"N 83°47'42.05"E 18 25°33'17.47"N 83°51'30.03"E 19 25°30'26.70"N 83°49'34.52"E 20 25°30'9.40"N 83°53'16.36"E





Page C3-138

Figure 3-29 Map from Google earth depecting the GPS coordinates

3.11.5. Methodology

3.11.5.1. Basic frame work of data collection

The prediction of impacts industries on flora and fauna depends on understanding of

the proposed activities, its magnitude/extent, scale and ecological conditions in the

surrounding area. Collection of comprehensive baseline information on flora and fauna

is therefore a prerequisite for assessment of impacts of development activities. It would

also help in advance planning and mitigate the impacts and ultimately managing the

natural habitats and resources. The approach to achieve the stated objectives within

defined scope of work, include field surveys, interviews, and reviews of literature.

Following is the basic fame work of the data collection and analysis for the present

study.

Desktop work: Before starting the field trip, the ecologist has collected the details of

the project from the EIA project coordinator and discussed the probable impact on the

local flora and fauna from the proposed activity and the extent of the area. Details of the





Page C3-139

proposed power plant area were collected through Google earth. The maps related to

road, rail network, drainage pattern, contour, forest type, forest cover, Land use and

Land cover were collected from the consultant office. The total area was analysed in

detail and around 21 sampling points were marked with GIS tool by covering the

various ecosystems of core and buffer zones in all the directions. A special emphasis has

been made to aquatic habitats while selecting the points.

Field survey: Local villagers were contacted to take support during the field survey.

The entire survey was planned to cover all the points in the shortest duration. During

the survey, a random observation was made for village side, road side and near the

agriculture. General Interviews were made with the local people about the native

animals and medicinal plants that are used frequently. A thorough review was made on

each sampling point for documentation of the flora and fauna in the prescribed

proformas. Photographs were taken at each point and vegetation structure.

3.11.5.2. Survey Types used

Reconnaissance survey (Near Agricultural, Human habitations and Road side)

Quadrate and Line transact method for trees, shrubs and herbs.

Belt transect method for road side trees and butterflies.

Point count method for birds.

Direct and Indirect evidences for Mammals and other faunal species.

3.11.5.3. Equipment / Instruments deployed

Digital Camera (NIKON P510 MODEL 42 X zoom)

GPS

Measuring tape (Small)

Binoculars

Field observation book

3.11.5.4. Methodology

Flora and fauna studies were carried out for one season to assess the list of terrestrial

plant and animal species that occur in the core area and the buffer zone of the project

site. Only photographs were taken during the field survey and no damage is created to

flora and fauna during the sampling. None of the specimens were collected as voucher

specimens and for herbarium. It is basically done through field observations only.





Page C3-140

A detailed survey has been carried out by using the following methodology.

Survey has been carried out in for core and buffer zones, habitat wise, forest

block wise and species-wise with special emphasis on endemic, endangered

and threatened species.

Secondary data has been collected from the forest department and local

villagers.

Prepared species-level exhaustive check list of flora and fauna.

Digital Photo documentation has been carried for identification of unknown

species.

Discussing the impact related issues with local villagers and EIA functional

area experts on air, water, noise and other pollutants.

Impacts quantification through vegetation analysis and site specific

parameters.

Preparation of the mitigation measures.

Prepared conservation based action plan for onsite implementations and for

proper management of the species and habitat.

Core Zone study: Within the core area, 5 sampling points were selected to quantify the

data. The core zone boundary is upto 5 sq km and the basically there is no forest land in

the proposed project activity area.

Buffer zone study: Within the 10 Km buffer zone, 20 samples of 100m2 each were

chosen by taking the following parameters into consideration.

Vegetation

Terrain

Topography

Cultivation

Road network

Villages

Aquatic Habitat





Page C3-141

A. Floral study:

Quadrate method has been used for carryout the study of trees, shrubs, her bs and

grasses. 20 m X 20 m for tree species, 5 m X 5 m quadrates for shrubs and 1 m X 1 m

quadrates for herbs. List of floral species observed at each quadrant is documented and

photographed. Species are compared with standard floras and identifying the plants

need for conservation.

Area-Species graph: For ecological studies this is most important to know scenically

and systematic enumeration. It means that during the survey of species at various

points, the species recorded will be repeated from the second point onwards a new

species will be added further in the list. There will be a point where we may not get any

further species added to the list. Till that stage, the survey has been carried out for

statistical analysis. However, zone wise, habitat wise and direction wise the entire study

area will be covered.

Listing of Existing Species: During the survey documented the various types of species

found at each sampling point along with their number. GBH is also taken for trees to

estimate the forest cover. The status of the each species is given in the consolidated

table with common, sporadic and rare. This is mainly depends upon the population

density and occurrence. Compared the RED DATA BOOK published by Zoological Survey

of India (ZSI)for each species and checked the REET species.

B. Faunal study:

A detailed study in has been carried out to cross check the list taken from secondary

source and local villagers. In case of vertebrate species, no sampling could be done.

Depending on as and when sighted, the species will be recorded if found within the

delimited project and buffer areas, the animal species are listed on secondary data and

circumstances evidence besides direct observations. These techniques are accepted in

EIA studies as per the EIA Notification of 2006.

Observations made on direct and indirect evidences for mammalian, avifauna and

reptilian fauna within the study area. As an entomologist, the effort was also made to

indentify invertebrate species. The species were photographed and identified with

standard pictorial guides. Scheduling of species according to Indian Wildlife Protection

act (1972) and IUCN is done for each species and checked the REET species. No





Page C3-142

quantitative data is calculated as some species are listed through secondary source. As

the animals are migratory, habitats used by protected, important or sensitive species for

breeding, nesting, foraging, resting, over wintering, migration are ascertained.

Aquatic Ecology

The conditions of the aquatic ecology of the water bodies which may be impacted were

also studied. Major components of aquatic life that have been studied are as follows:

Aquatic macrophytic vegetation

Aquatic vertebrates like fish, amphibians, reptiles and aquatic birds

3.11.5.5. Quantitative analysis of the vegetation cover

Plot-based random quadrate sampling method was adopted to generate the

Phytosociological data viz., density, frequency, abundance and important value index

(IVI). Quadrates of 20 m x 20 m size were laid out for the enumeration of the tree

species, quadrates of 5 m x 5 m for shrubs and saplings and quadrates of 1 m x 1 m for

herbs and seedlings.

Diameter at breast height (DBH) of 130 cm was consistently used during the present

study. In no case, the thicker part near branching position was considered. Instead

diameter of the tree having a branch at about 130 cm was measured either below 30 cm

from the branch or in case of all the stems above 30 cm from the branch and averaged.

All individuals above 10 cm of girth at breast height (GBH) were considered as trees and

all individuals below 10 cm of GBH or 2 m of height as shrubs and saplings. In each unit,

presence or absence of the species, number of individuals of each species, GBH (only for

tree species) to estimate basal area of the mangrove communities were recorded.

Other ecological parameters viz., abundance, density, frequency, IVI, Shannon-Wiener

diversity index, Simpson’s dominance index, Abundance/Frequency (A/F) ratio for

distribution pattern of species and Similarity Index were derived from the above basic

data.

Frequency, density, abundance and basal area were calculated following Misra (1968).

Number of sampling units in which a species occurs

Frequency: ______________________________________________________________ X 100

Total number of sampling units studied





Page C3-143

The frequency of individual species is the number of times the species occurs in the

sampling quadrant.

Total number of individuals in all sampling units

Density: __________________________________________________________

Total number of sampling units studied

Density is the measure of dense in the distribution of an individual species within a

given area.

Total number of individuals in all sampling units

Abundance: ____________________________________________________________

Total number of sampling units of occurrence

Total basal area or crown

Dominance = --------------------------------------------- x 100

Total area sampled

It reflects the species basal area covered by a species within the sampling area.

Relative Density and Dominance

The relative density and dominance values of different species found in the study are

shows that the dominant plants of various sites have a high percentage value of density

and dominance. These values are incorporated in calculating the Importance value

Index. Number of individuals of a species

Relative density: _______________________________ X 100

Total number of individuals of all species

Number of occurrences of a species

Relative frequency: X 100

Total number of occurrences of all species

Total basal area of individual species

Relative basal area: ___________________________________________________ X 100

Total basal areas of all species

Importance Value Index (IVI)





Page C3-144

Important Value Index was estimated from the formula developed by Cottam and Curtis

(1956).

IVI: RD + RF +RBA

IVI for trees (300) was derived from relative density (RD), relative frequency (RF) and

relative basal area (RBA) whereas the same was calculated for shrubs (200) and herbs

(200) from only relative frequency and relative density. The Importance Value Index

(IVI) is an expression used to summarize the plant data; it is desirable to use as many

values as possible. The Importance value allows quantitative comparison of each

species in a stand with the other species in the stand, or allows comparison of the

species in one stand with species in other stands.

Species Diversity

Shannon Diversity Index has been used for estimating the diversity among the three

sampling sites in order to highlight the most diverse site, calculate the Shannon Wiener

diversity index of each site using the formula:

Diversity = - Pi X ln Pi

S= Number of individuals of one species

Where Pi = ---------------------------------------------------------

N = Total number of all individuals in the sample

and, ln is the logarithm to the base e

Shannon – Wiener Indices of Diversity vary depending upon the species richness

(number of species present in a given unit area) and their dominance or evenness. As

the species richness and evenness increase, Shannon – Wiener Indices of Diversity also

increase correspondingly. On the other hand, when the species richness decreases and

as dominance increases, diversity decreases. Communities with less number of species

with high level of dominance or low level of uniformity will have lower diversity. Thus it

is a statistical function based on the richness and evenness components. Evenness and

dominance are inversely related. This can be also calculated through Statistical Software

“PAST”.





Page C3-145

3.11.6. Results

3.11.6.1. Summary of the Survey

As per reconnaissance survey, quadrate wise and line transect survey has been carried

out as per the methodology. Secondary data base has been compared with the existing

species in the study region. The published literature is also used for finalizing the list

present in the core and buffer zones. The flora and fauna recorded were also cross

checked with the local communities. An effort has been made to identify the impacts of

the existing project and cumulative effect of the nearby developmental activities’ or

industries or any other activities which will affect the plants and animals of the region

along with the resource utilization by the local communities such as timber, medicinal

and fishing etc. The mitigation measures were suggested only to the buffer zone and the

other parameters such as air emissions, Noise, effluents will further addressed with

functional area experts of the concern people. Conservation of Scheduled species has

been given.

3.11.6.2. Present Environmental Setting

Bihar is situated in the eastern part of India bordering Nepal and has a geographical

area of 94,163 km². It is part of gangetic plains and is drained by two major rivers, the

Ganga and the Gandhak. Annual rainfall in the state varies from 1000mm to 2000 mm.

The recorded forest area of the state is 6473 km² which is 6.87% of the geographical

area. Reserve forest constitutes 10.70%, Protected Forest 89.28% and unclassed Forest,

which is about 0.02% of the total forest area. The proposed project falls in 7 – Gangetic

plain as per the Biogeographic Classification of India and 7B Lower Gangetic Plain

Province of India.

The proposed Power plant area does not encounter with any kind of forest types like

Reserve Forest, Protected forest or unclassed Forest (declared Protected under “ The

Indian Forest Act, 1927”) and “Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 with Amendments Made

in 1988”. (Source: Forest Department). Further no tree cutting is involved in the project

and with a landscape design approach all the trees will be saved as part of this project.

Thus no forest Clearance is required for the proposed development.

One Wildlife National Park (Valmiki National Park) and twelve Wildlife Sanctuaries are

located in Bihar. However, no National Park and Wildlife Sanctuary is reported within





Page C3-146

10 km from project boundary. The Nearest wildlife sanctuary is Vikramshila Gangetic

Dolphin WLS which is more than 300 km (Arial distance) in District Bhagalpur.

Therefore clearance under “The Wildlife (Protection) Act – 1972” is not required for the

proposed project. During primary survey Schedule – I mammals as per WPA – 1972, like

fresh water Dolphin (Platanista gangetica gangetica) was seen in river Ganga stretch in

Buxar town.

Wetland: No wetland notified under “The Ramsar Convention – 1971” or listed under

“the National wetland Conservation Programme – 2009” is reported within 10 km from

project boundary. The Wetlands presenting Bihar state notified under National Wetland

Conservation Programme – 2009 are: 1. Kabar Wetland – District Begusarai 2. Barilla

Wetland – District Vaishali 3. Kusheshwar Asthan Wetland – Darbhanga.

Study area ecology: The Proposed project locality is 18 km from Buxar town with no

residential or forested habitat. It is near the Chausa village. To give the statistical

information of the core area, it is considered to be 5 km area (as shown in the map) for

flora and fauna of the region. The no national parks and sanctuaries exist in the core and

buffer area. Two rivers (River Ganga and River Karmnasa) exists here.

Proposed Power plant locality Chousa village near the proposed area





Page C3-147

Vegetation in the core zone Fauna in the 5 Km Radius

3.11.7. Ecosystem wise Study

A habitat wise survey was carried out both in the core zone (proposed area) and up to a

radius of 5 Km and buffer area from 5 to 10 km radius. As stated earlier, there are no

biosphere reserves or National parks or other protected areas or other ecologically

sensitive areas within the core area.

Core Zone Habitat: The core zone is Terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems with common

trees shrubs, herbs, climbers and other ornamental plants. No hilly areas present here.

The tree density is very less as there is full of farm lands and human habitations. Along

with cattle, it is also observed that few Nilgai, Blackbuck and Jackal species are also

exists here. Common bird species like Myna, black drango, green bee eater, crow,

Sparrow, Babblers and few reptilian species like garden lizards, skinks and amphibians

like frogs and toads are likely to be inhabited.

Buffer Zone Habitat: The buffer zone has rural zone with agricultural land and few

settlements. Some places away from the city inhabited with natural forest, wetlands and

Riverine ecosystems. In Buffer zone very common and less conservation priority

animals, birds and other floral species exists. The animals recorded in buffer zone are

Blackbuck, Nilgai, Jackal, Monitor Lizards, Mongoose, Snakes and very co mmon

terrestrial and aquatic birds species.

Ecosystem types:

1. Terrestrial Ecosystem

A. Reserve Forests (Nil)

B. Non Forest Habitats (Road side, Village side etc)





Page C3-148

C. Croplands

2. Aquatic Ecosystem

A. Reverine / Riparian Habitat (Ganga river, Karmnasa River)

B. Pond Ecosystem (Small water bodies)

C. Terrestrial ecosystem

A. Reserve Forests: (NIL)

There are no reserve forests within the Core and buffer zones. But the open places and

plantations by local people and forest officials make the environment green.

B. Non Forest Vegetation (Road side, Village side etc)

In the non-forest area, different types of vegetation are recorded. Tree species in are

mostly planted and few are natural. Trees available in the non-forest area are classified

into the following categories in the study area. These are:

Roadside: Trees planted along the road side. The dominant plant species are

Sisoo, Acasia, Neem, Ficus, Peltoforum, Pongamia, Borassus etc.

Village woodlot: Naturally growing or planted trees on community /private land.

The dominant plant species are Coconut, Terminalia (Badam), Ficus, Banana,

Mango, Bamboo, Mahua etc.

Pond side vegetation: Mostly planted trees along the pond side of the villages.

The dominant plant species are Ipomea, Typha ungustifolia, Cassia sp, Lantana etc.

C. Cropland Ecosystem

There are very few croplands in the buffer zone. The main crops are Musa, Coconut,

Areca nut and Mango trees. Paddy is the most commonly cultivated one. From the

secondary source, it is revealed that Rice, wheat, and maize are the major cereal crops

and Arhar, urad, moong, gram, pea, lentils, and khesaria are some of the pulses

cultivated in this region. Vegetables such as potato, onion, eggplant, and cauliflower and

fruits such as pineapple, mango, banana, and guava are grown here. Sugar cane and jute

are two other major cash crops of this region.





Page C3-149

3.11.7.1. Aquatic Ecosystem

Riparian Habitat

The study area comprises of Riparian Habitat (transition zone between aquatic and

terrestrial ecosystem). A riparian zone or riparian area is the interface between land

and a river or stream. Plant habitats and communities along the river margins and

banks are called riparian vegetation, characterized by hydrophilic plants. Riparian

zones may be natural or engineered for soil stabilization or restoration. These zones are

important natural bio-filters, protecting aquatic environments from excessive

sedimentation, polluted surface runoff and erosion. They supply shelter and food for

many aquatic animals and shade that is an important part of stream temperature

regulation. The proposed power plant inlet is partly comprises of Riparian Habitat and

partly terrestrial.

There are few small seasonal ponds and canals present in the buffer region. The list of

flora and fauna in the aquatic habitats are given in Annexure 10. The creaks present

near the River Ganga contain good habitat for trees and birds. Few small wetlands,

paddy fields and drains provide the suitable habitat for fresh water aquatic and semi

aquatic plants. A list of aquatic and semi aquatic plants found in the buffer zone is given

in along with the floral list. Pistia, Typha, Ipomia aquatica were most abundant in fresh

water wetlands. There were no REET category species of aquatic and semi aquatic

plants in the study area.

Habitat description: During primary survey it has been noticed that the existing habitat

along the banks of Ganga is natural type. Daily hundreds of people visit here to take bath

in Ganga as religious rituals. The floristic survey of the proposed site witnesses

scattered growth of grasses (mainly weeds), rooted hydrophytes, emerging

hydrophytes, shrubs in undisturbed area where human movement is absent and trees

leaning over river water.

Among herbs species, weed are commonly reported on the river bank. Commonly

reported weeds species are Congress grass (Parthenium hysterophorus), Lantana

(Lantana Camara), Eipatorium trilpineve, Solanum xanthiocarpum and Datura (Dathura

stromonium). This is mainly due to better survival rate, higher seed production and fast

growing in comparison to other herbs. The species of grasses reported along the banks

are Cyanodon dactylon, Achyranthes aspera, Saccharum arundinaceum, Vetiveria





Page C3-150

zizanoides, Ludwigia parviflora, Rungia repens, etc. These are mainly reported above the

water level, in an undisturbed area.

Rooted hydrophytes are reported along the banks, where water level is less than a foot

or water has recedes after flooding. The commonly reported hydrophytes are Ipomoea

carnea, Argeratum conyzoides, Azolla pinnata, Eichhornia crassipes, Lemna perpusilla,

Spirodela polyrhiza, etc. Ipomoea aquatic,etc.

Eichhornia crassipes Pistia stratiotes

Crocothemis servilia servilia Brachythemis contaminata

3.11.8. Flora of the Study Area

3.11.8.1. Flora of the core area (Upto 5 sq km)

The phytosociological study of the core zone (terrestrial habitat) beyond the riparian

habitat comprises of manmade ecosystem. Tree plantation in form of landscaping was

noticed due to nearby residential area, government offices, hospitals, schools, temple s

and market places. The species of trees reported are mainly planted, except few species

which are naturally growing. These trees are fruit, flower and seed bearing and attract

avifauna, small mammals and reptiles. Nesting was commonly reported.





Page C3-151

3.11.8.2. Flora of the buffer area: (From 5 to 15km radius)

There are no biosphere reserves or national parks or other protected areas within a

distance from 5 to 10 Km from the proposed power plant area (buffer zone). Dalbergia

sissoo, Acacia nilotica, Terminalia, Bamboo, Aegle marmelos and Ficus recemosa are the

few tree species that give shelter for local birds. More than 50% of the terrestrial

habitat of the buffer zone is under village habitats. The dominant vegetation includes

Coconut, banana, jack, sapota, mango trees. Teak is the most common cultivated timber

plant. Apart from the above several avenue trees such as Tamarind, Neem, Siris, Rain

tree, Gulmohar etc were very common. Polialthia longifolia, Aegle mormulus, Bauhinia

purpurea, Acacia auriculata, Peltophorum pterocarpum and Swietenia mahagoni are

most common trees are found in the buffer area. Annual or seasonal crops are grown in

small and isolated places. Paddy is mainly grown during the rainy season. It occupies

nearly half of the croplands of the buffer zone. Vegetables are common but limited to

very small size plots. Floristically the study area is fairly not very rich. The total

recorded flora (from primary as well as secondary data) from the study area was 220

species. The species recorded in the buffer zone is given in Annexure 10.

3.11.9. Fauna of the Study Area

3.11.9.1. Fauna in Core and Buffer Zones

As the animal species are capable of moving from place to place either for food or

shelter or mate, it is not proper to list them separately for core and buffer areas. Hence,

common check lists are prepared based mainly on available secondary data and also on

the basis of direct observation, indirect or circumstantial evidence such as foot prints,

pellets, feathers, skin, hair, hooves etc. The area of survey and study extends up to a

radius of 10 Km for terrestrial fauna. To study the diversity of fauna, various survey

methods were adopted. The survey was mainly carried out at dawn and at dusk to study

animal behavior and habitat. This study period is mainly selected as animals are most

active. Secondary data was collected from the forest department and interaction with

the local was also conducted to establish baseline study for distribution of wild animals

in the study area. Good number of wild mammals exists in the study area, even though

anthropogenic activity and urbanized habitat present here. Domestic mammals are also

reported in the study area which is not included in the present list.





Page C3-152

Mammals: There are mammals sighted directly from this region are Boselaphus

tragocamelus (Nilgai) (LC) (Schedule-III), Antilope cervicapra (Blackbuck) (NT)

Schedule I of the Indian Wildlife Protection Act of 1972 and Canis aureus (golden Jackal)

(LC), (Schedule-II Part-II) from the terrestrial habitat and fresh water dolphins

(Platanista gangetica gangetica) (Listed by IUCN as 'endangered' and placed in

Schedule-I of the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972) from the aquatic habitat. Certain trees

like Ficus recemosa and other large trees were identified as main nesting and roosting

spot for the aves and fruit bats. A list of mammals either spotted during the survey or

reported from the study area is given in Annexure 10.

Aves: The fauna reported in the study area are mainly avifauna (highest diversity)

followed by mammals and reptiles. The commonly reported avifauna in the study area

during primary survey, with higher diversity are Common crow, Lapwings, bee eaters,

Peacocks, Myna, Eagle, Sparrow, Babbler, Pigeon, Cattle Egrets, Red Vented bulbul,

Drongo, Sparrow, Indian Roller etc. During site visit higher frequency of birds recorded

in the project affected. This is mainly due to availability of nesting habitat, discarded

foods from rituals ceremony and fruits bearing trees. A list of birds either spotted or

reported from the study area is presented in Annexure 10.

Herpetofauna: Buxar is not fairly rich in reptile and amphibian diversity. They included

turtles, snakes, lizards like geckos, skinks and the agamids. Among the reptiles, no REET

category has been reported from the region. There are no Crocodiles in the region.

There are no significant places sighted for nesting ground for any of the Terrapins. A list

of herpetofauna either reported or recorded from the buffer area up to a radius of 10

Km are given in Annexure 10.

Invertebrates: Good number of butterfly and Dragonfly species observed here. None of

them are comes under conservation list.

3.11.10. Statistical Analysis

3.11.10.1. Quantitative Characteristics

The quantitative characteristics are the one, which can be readily measured.

Quantification has also been done for the species which are going to be removed due to

the proposed activity. In the ecosystem, the small grass plant is producer and on which

the insects, frogs, snakes and other higher animals depends. Hence for studying the food





Page C3-153

chain and food web of an ecosystem, all the floral and faunal species are to be

quantitatively assessed. The diversity and abundance shows the status of any region

through which conservation and management action can be taken up. Even though

there are no REET species found in the proposed site, we must know exactly how much

quantity of vegetation we are going to lose due to the proposed activity. If we start

estimating the value of ecosystem and biodiversity in terms of ecological value, it is

much higher than our expectations. As our activity is irreversible and going to be

increase the impact in the buffer area, these statistics gives alert to the project

proponent to take suitable conservation activities. As the primary data is collected in

various sampling points at core and buffer zones, the following statistical analysis can

be drawn from the raw data.

1. Density

2. Dominance

3. Frequency

4. Relative Density

5. Relative Dominance

6. Relative Frequency

7. Important Value Index

8. Shannan Wiever Index

9. Indices of Similarity

10. Raunkiaer’s “Law of Frequency”

11. A/F Ratio

3.11.10.2. Analysis

Ecosystem wise analysis:

Ecosystem wise distribution: The survey reveals that there are specific patches for

certain species and mass plantations like Bamboo, Sissoo, coconut, sapota, mango etc.

There are good number of plantations on the road side like Teak, Swietinia, Sissoo,

Acacia nilotica, Ficus, Polialthia longifolia, Aegle mormulus, Bauhinia purpurea,

Casuarina equisetifolia, Peltforum pterocarpum, Samania saman, Delonix regia, Plumaria

alba, Cassia fistula, Tectona grandis, Terminalia chebula and Acacia auriculiformis.





Page C3-154

The unique field observation is Dalbergia sissoo and Acacia nilotica are dominant

throughout the region. A good number of Butterfly and Dragon fly species are recorded

in the wasteland and agricultural habitats. The larval and nector host plants are very

common here. The specific obervations were also made for the micro habitats. Borassus

flabellifer, Ceiba pentandra, Cocos nucifera, Ficus benghalensis, Ficus religiosa, Ficus

recemosa, Mangifera indica, Prosopis juliflora, Tamarindus indica found near the village

premices. The common ornamental plants found throughout the city and listing was not

done as it is not having relation with present study and can be planted whenever

required.

Dominance D 0.04458

Shannon H 3.133

Simpson 1-D 0.9554

Evenness e^H/S 0.9558 Menhinick 1.383

Margalef 4.03

Equitability J 0.9858

Fisher alpha 6.132

Berger-Parker 0.06645

Shannon H’ diversity index is a mathematical measure of species diversity in a

community. Diversity indices provide more information about community composition

than simply species richness (i.e., the number of species present); they also the relative

abundances of different species into account. The Shannon Wienner Index in the study

area is 3.132 for the study area.

Interpretation of the result: Present study reveals that there are not only has a

greater number of species present, but the individuals in the community are distribu ted

more equitably among these species.

Reason: The result of the diversity index value may be due to much human interference

in plantations and managing the vegetation.

Status of Flora as per Raunkiaer’s Frequency Classes

This law suggests that species in a community are either rare or common, with only few

species having intermediate occupancies. Raunkiaer classified the occurrence of species

in an area into five classes of frequency Class – A (1 to 20%), Class – B (21 to 40%) Class

– C (41 to 60%) Class – D (61 to 80%) and Class – E (81 to 100). The normal distribution





Page C3-155

of the frequency percentages derived from such classification is expressed as

A>B>C=D<E, and has been named Raunkiaer’s “Law of Frequency”. The ecological

status of vegetation was calculated using the Raunkiaer’s normal frequency diagrams

and the results are given.

A<B<C>D>E

The result shows that, the distribution is Heterogeneous fulfilling the Raunkiaer’s law.

The Heterogeneity observed among the plant community reveals that, dominant

vegetation is common in core and buffer zone and occupies the class C. 100% Frequency

were recorded for Samania saman which widely planted long back. Though, ornamental

and commercial species are dominant, the distribution of vegetation is heterogeneous in

nature. The Heterogeneous status indicates that there is no human impact in the study

area.

Distribution pattern (A/F ratio): The ratio between abundance and frequency was

used to interpret the distribution pattern of species (Whitford, 1949). Distribution

pattern of species was identified as regular distribution if A/F ratio is < 0.025, random

distribution if A/F ratio is between 0.025 to 0.050 and contiguous/clumped distribution

if A/F ratio is > 0.050 as per Curtis and Cottam (1956). The present distribution pattern

ration is 0.0431 for the study area, which represents more contiguous/clumped type of

distribution is present in the study area which is very common in nature.

3.11.10.3. Discussions on Vegetation Analysis

Status of Flora

The interpretations based on the above analysis and the floristic composition reveals

that, the vegetation encountered in the study area is termed as urban forests. The type

of vegetation found in the study area is mixed type. There is no endangered, threatened,

or rare species of plants recorded in the study area.

Status of Fauna

Insects- The insects in the study area are interrelated with each other and other

organisms. They are in perfect balance in their existence. Some of them act as pests,

while others are useful and beneficial to the environment and human beings.





Page C3-156

Amphibians- The toads and frogs were the amphibians recorded in the study area.

Many of them were seen along the Lentic water system and other areas.

Reptiles- The reptiles recorded in the study area include lizards, and snakes.

Birds- Birds play an important role in understanding the ecological balance and its

interrelationships. The occurrence of birds in various locations largely depends on the

site characteristics and their presence in different study sites reveals that there is a

good relationship between the birds and other organisms and the environment. The

maintenance of the eco-balance could be seen in the selected study areas.

Mammals- The distribution of mammals is largely dependent upon the environment of

the respective areas. The mammals present in the study area includes Indian palm

Squirrel, Bat, rats and mongoose etc. These mammals are spread over the study area.

3.11.10.4. Identification of local Protected Species

As per Botanical Survey of India records and available published literature pertaining to

the study area and current detailed study of project site, no threatened, endangered and

rare plant species were observed from the study area. The topo map indicating the

absence of National park, Sanctuary, Elephant/Tiger Reserve, Migratory routes/

Wildlife corridor with in 10 km radius indicates that this region is not ecologically very

significant. As per the Indian Wildlife Protection Act (1972), those animals, which have

been enlisted in the schedules of the Act, have been presented in subsequent section.

The schedules are based on the species namely, rare, endangered, threatened,

vulnerable etc. According to threat of extinction Schedule-I contains those species

which need topmost priority, while II, III, IV and V have lesser degree of threat. Most of

the avi-fauna has been listed in Schedule–IV. As per the list of avi-faunal species, these

are mostly local migrant species only.

Threatened and Endangered Animal Species

Antilope cervicapra Blackbuck Schedule I NT

Platanista gangetica gangetica fresh water dolphins Schedule I EN Felis chaus Jungle cat Part II of Schedule II LC

Herpestes javanicus Common Indian Mongoose Part II of Schedule II LC Vulpus benghalensis Wild fox Part-I of Sch-II LC

Canis aureus Jackal Part-II of Sch-II LC Semnopithecus entellus Deccan Hanuman Langur Part-II of Sch-II LC

Boselaphus tragocamelus Nilgai Schedule III LC





Page C3-157

3.11.11. Aquatic Ecosystem

3.11.11.1. Planktons

There are microscopic life forms belonging to either phytoplanktons (algae) or

zooplanktons (protozoa or rotifers etc.) categories. They form the lowest trophic level

of the aquatic ecosystem. Water samples were collected from Ganga river and other

ponds and canals present in the buffer zone for planktonic analysis. None of the aquatic

forms are rare or endangered. Phytoplankton group reported from four locations are

basillariophyceae, chlorophyceae, myxophyceae and euglenophyceae members. About

26 species of phytoplankton were reported from four locations. Density of

phytoplankton group among the three locations was highest in lentic ecosystem (Aqua-

2) and lowest in (Aqua-1). The density of phytoplankton group ranged between 17 to 26

organisms/ml in all studied samples. Dominance of Bacillariophyceae members

followed by myxophyceae was observed in all the locations. The highest percentage was

Ankistrodesmus falcatus and Anabeana sp and the lowest percentage was Euglena sp

during study period was observed. The Shannon Wieners index for phytoplankton

varies between 2.86-3.14 for study area.

List of phytoplankton species identified from study area

Algal Species

Bacillariophyceae: Cymbella sp., Cyclotella sp., Diatoma sp., Gomphonema sp., Navicula

sp., Nitzschia sp.

Chlorophyceae: Ankistrodesmus sp., Chlorococcum sp., Chollera sp., Closterium sp.,

Eudorina sp.

Cyanophyceae: Anabaena sp., Anacystis sp., Lyngbya sp., Merismopedia sp., Phormidium sp.

Euglenophycea: Euglena sp., Phacus sp.

3.11.11.2. Zooplankton

Daphnia, Asplancha, Ceriodaphnia is predominant animal species in studied samples The

Shannon Weiner’s index for zooplankton varies between-2.45 and 2.57.

List of zooplankton species identified from study area

Copepoda: Cyclops sp, Nauplius larva





Page C3-158

Rotifera: Brachionus sp, Keratella quadridantatus, Trichocera sp.,

Cladocera: Daphnia sp., Diaphnosoma sp.

Conclusions on Aquatic Ecology

Surface water samples were collected for biological analysis from lentic and lotic water

bodies during study period. Biological samples were analysed and estimated diversity

index. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton and zooplankton varies from 2.08 –

2.48 and 2.39 - 2.37.

3.11.11.3. Freshwater Fishery

Ganga River is adobe for variety of fishes. To have an idea about the fishes distribution

netting were carried out along the proposed project, sand deposited area within the

river and on left banks. The number of fishes caught is less in the right bank in

comparison to the left bank. Catch of fishes were less in the project area. Secondary

information about fishes distribution was collected from fishery department and from

the fisher men. The species of fishes reported during primary visit are Rohu, Catla, Hilsa,

Mystus sp, Cirrhinus Sp, etc.. The species of fishes reported here are commonly reported

in the fresh water bodies like river, streams, lakes, pond and estuaries. They are

cosmopolitan in distribution and are reported all over India and Indian Sub continents.

These species of fishes are commonly used in aqua culture practice and had good

commercial importance.

Ecologically these species are primary and secondary consumer in the freshwater

ecosystem mainly in rivers. They are primary food for secondary consumers like fresh

water dolphins (Platanista Gangetica gangetica), gharials, crocodiles, turtles, etc. They

do not have fix breeding and nesting site and mainly spawn during monsoon season

when the water is diluted, laden with silt and current of water is high to keep their

spawn (egg) floating for hatching of eggs. Hence they breed all over river, streams,

lakes, etc. during favorable conditions. Therefore the species of fishes reported in table

are not confined to project site only but are reported all over Ganges courses.

Fishing is the major profession after agriculture in the study area. Major fresh water

fishing practiced in Ganga River. Fisherman’s community is majorly observed in the

coastal area. Nearly all fishermen’s use traditional method of fishing i.e. trapa, gillnet

and cast net are also used for fishing. The fishes found here are Rohu, Mullet, Mugri,





Page C3-159

Dingar, Haren, Bas, Kalwas, Chal, Katiya, Ghegra, Bighun, Jhingra, Grach, Bam, Papta,

Pariyasi, Gudheya, Tengan, Siland and Jhinga. Large quantity of fishing activities takes

place in the Ganga River and in nearby streams as water gets dry in streams and pond

during the summer season.

Aquatic Bird: 6 species of aquatic birds are recorded. All of them are very common and

no endemic or migratory birds present in the study area. There are no breeding habitats

in the core zone.

3.12. Socio Economic Environment

3.12.1. Socioeconomic Environment based on Census 2011

3.12.1.1. Demographic Profile

The demography profile of the study area based on the latest published Census 2011,

published by the Directorate of Census Department. The study area of 10 km radius of

the project site is covering Two Taluks (Mohammadabad and Zamania) of Ghazipur

District of Uttar Pradesh and four Taluks (Buxar, Chausa, Rajpur and Itarhi) of Buxar

District of Bihar State. Cumulative population in the study area is 2,57,103 with

1,33,1151 males and 123988 females. The population of children below 6 years old was

found to be 43,748 which are of about 17.01% of the total population. District’s

Population density is 1002 and 1072 for Buxar and Ghazipur Districts respectively. The

Sex Ratio was found at 931 females per thousand males. The Sex ratio of the children

was about 937. The Cumulative of Vulnerable population such as Scheduled Caste and

Scheduled Tribe population was 22,576 and 21,172 respectively. The urban rural ratio

of the study area is 0:100. Table 3.18 depicts the population distribution of the study

area.

Table 3-18 Population Distribution

S.No Villages HH POP Males Females Sex

Ratio Child

<6 SC ST

1 Akbarpur 157 492 258 234 907 87 0 0

2 Akhauripur 374 2331 1184 1147 969 398 30 0

3 Ami 6 41 20 21 1050 5 0 0

4 Ashanandpur 2 6 4 2 500 0 0 0

5 Atraulia 52 358 189 169 894 51 0 0

6 Atrauna 443 2774 1402 1372 979 495 487 7

7 Badauli Adai 267 1529 758 771 1017 254 189 0

8 Badauli Mafi 79 536 277 259 935 123 56 0





Page C3-160


Ratio Child

<6 SC ST

9 Badihar Mafi 4 21 10 11 1100 5 0 0

10 Baghelwa 129 904 470 434 923 184 0 0

11 Bahora Ta. Birpur 140 817 443 374 844 142 124 0

12 Bakainia 215 1504 783 721 921 267 654 0

13 Balua Tapa Amlakh

113 486 240 246 1025 75 303 0

14 Baluwa 445 2275 1209 1066 882 393 288 104

15 Bamhani 217 1217 632 585 926 195 283 1

16 Baniapatpur 43 351 185 166 897 44 0 0

17 Bansi 26 178 94 84 894 43 36 0

18 Bara 2988 21405 10828 10577 977 3883 2116 83

19 Bareji 344 2252 1187 1065 897 330 0 0

20 Barhana 152 1169 585 584 998 240 85 0

21 Barki Puraini 163 930 480 450 938 130 40 0

22 Barupur 269 1789 931 858 922 352 0 0

23 Basantpur 241 1470 739 731 989 236 440 21

24 Bechanpurwa 102 779 409 370 905 150 0 0

25 Belahi 120 864 445 419 942 147 0 0

26 Bhaluha 171 884 455 429 943 167 537 0

27 Bharkhara 176 1037 518 519 1002 200 300 0

28 Bhataura Buzurg 3 24 14 10 714 3 0 0

29 Bhataura Khurd 463 3287 1716 1571 916 447 567 0

30 Bhawar Kol 135 918 464 454 978 190 133 13

31 Bhelupur 176 1127 593 534 901 214 240 0

32 Bhitihara 327 2169 1094 1075 983 446 348 7

33 Bijhaura 520 3308 1709 1599 936 618 662 103

34 Birpur 1348 8560 4442 4118 927 1380 913 39

35 Bishunpur 18 115 59 56 949 20 0 0

36 Chak Bhago 88 486 266 220 827 57 185 0

37 Chak Mir Mohd. Bhawar Kol

1 13 8 5 625 1 0 0

38 Chaurahi 3 16 9 7 778 7 16 0

39 Chausa 1362 9011 4757 4254 894 1557 1015 420

40 Chhotki Puraini 182 999 491 508 1035 199 706 0

41 Chilbila 296 1848 960 888 925 397 230 0

42 Daulat Pur 10 55 23 32 1391 2 19 0

43 Dehri 1144 7759 3991 3768 944 1263 972 1

44 Deuriya 41 290 147 143 973 39 0 0

45 Dev Chand Pur 144 839 464 375 808 105 458 39

46 Dewasthapur 161 1170 590 580 983 191 164 0

47 Dharmagatpur 5 28 15 13 867 4 0 0

48 Dhundhani 47 369 187 182 973 60 34 0





Page C3-161


Ratio Child

<6 SC ST

49 Ekdar 78 677 362 315 870 123 0 0

50 Firoj Pur 391 2870 1513 1357 897 484 450 6

51 Gadaipur 25 165 78 87 1115 16 0 0

52 Gahmar 4365 25994 13367 12627 945 3650 3295 327

53 Gajarahi 58 301 159 142 893 37 0 0

54 Gobindapur 211 1430 750 680 907 201 283 0

55 Gyani Chak 49 306 161 145 901 57 0 0

56 Hadipur 59 453 239 214 895 61 6 0

57 Hakimpur 371 2563 1306 1257 962 456 409 0

58 Haripur 240 1490 760 730 961 292 0 0

59 Harnathpur 21 82 45 37 822 20 0 0

60 Hathauri 181 875 463 412 890 152 0 0

61 Hethua 506 3329 1754 1575 898 631 770 70

62 Holartikar 57 329 173 156 902 70 223 0

63 Husenpur 48 314 169 145 858 50 12 0

64 Isapur 20 183 100 83 830 37 0 0

65 Ismailpur 103 709 324 385 1188 105 122 0

66 Itwa 9 47 24 23 958 11 0 0

67 Jagdishpur 15 47 25 22 880 7 0 0

68 Jagwal 77 319 171 148 865 80 313 0

69 Jaipura 144 942 499 443 888 199 0 0

70 Jamauli 659 3791 2022 1769 875 714 1011 0

71 Jarigawan 207 1408 711 697 980 278 210 141

72 Jivnrain Pur 73 435 238 197 828 62 24 0

73 Jokahi 63 418 210 208 990 71 0 47

74 Kadipur Kalan 87 561 293 268 915 102 135 9

75 Kamarpur 573 3074 1617 1457 901 546 750 57

76 Kamhariya 122 907 502 405 807 131 0 22

77 Kanak Narayanpur

204 1333 707 626 885 237 2 45

78 Karhansi 563 4248 2256 1992 883 637 572 2

79 kashipur 64 416 201 215 1070 103 0 0

80 Kathaja 75 688 374 314 840 89 404 0

81 Kathtar 101 814 431 383 889 148 204 0

82 Khakrahi 189 1134 618 516 835 206 406 47

83 Khelafatpur 198 1242 650 592 911 241 774 12

84 Khemrajpur 30 215 107 108 1009 57 0 0

85 Kishunipur 83 469 246 223 907 72 0 0

86 Kocharhi 420 2489 1298 1191 918 421 348 0

87 Korarawa 80 478 236 242 1025 95 179 0

88 Kudratipur 134 642 318 324 1019 141 0 0

89 Kukurha 890 5802 2978 2824 948 1084 898 124





Page C3-162


Ratio Child

<6 SC ST

90 Kusahi 118 762 375 387 1032 92 96 1

91 Kushahi 34 262 144 118 819 63 0 0

92 Kusiyra 30 165 84 81 964 33 165 0

93 Kusrupa 312 2051 1076 975 906 341 605 41

94 Kutubpur 160 1069 556 513 923 169 467 0

95 Lahana 525 3533 1816 1717 945 583 798 0

96 Larai 76 445 226 219 969 71 0 0

97 Lohandi 219 1705 878 827 942 278 153 12

98 Loharpur 434 2498 1289 1209 938 404 508 0

99 Lugra Sugra 69 380 201 179 891 79 0 0

100 Magarkhai 256 1966 1054 912 865 245 896 0

101 Makuriya 22 126 65 61 938 26 0 0

102 Malahipur 82 478 243 235 967 85 0 0

103 Malikpur Lazi 2 23 11 12 1091 4 0 0

104 Mangolpur 268 1959 1002 957 955 353 17 53

105 Mangopur 55 317 164 153 933 75 317 0

106 Mangraon 563 3492 1793 1699 948 637 989 0

107 Mania 544 3160 1583 1577 996 442 778 187

108 Marahi 111 768 406 362 892 172 0 0

109 Masarhia 40 278 133 145 1090 47 0 0

110 Mitanpura 74 421 219 202 922 71 0 0

111 Mohanpurwa 70 401 207 194 937 75 26 0

112 Musar Dewa 97 537 321 216 673 88 100 0

113 Naniaura 113 764 368 396 1076 145 359 4

114 Narainapur 105 744 384 360 938 95 133 0

115 Narbatpur 670 4376 2269 2107 929 778 566 42

116 Nasirpur Mirzabad

55 389 230 159 691 30 0 0

117 Nawagawan 115 640 322 318 988 129 296 0

118 Nikrojpur 178 1073 572 501 876 188 305 0

119 Nizampur 1 18 11 7 636 1 0 0

120 Nyayapur 311 1950 1075 875 814 290 786 289

121 Paliya 260 1683 936 747 798 316 536 5

122 Pathara 514 3463 1794 1669 930 560 893 18

123 Piprarh 225 1747 920 827 899 289 137 0

124 Pithari 141 1030 521 509 977 119 163 4

125 Puraina 36 284 158 126 797 36 0 0

126 Raisenpur 152 987 479 508 1061 190 0 0

127 Rajapur 278 2087 1090 997 915 368 797 0

128 Raje Pah 1 6 5 1 200 2 0 0

129 Rajmal Bandh 34 238 134 104 776 32 0 0

130 Rampur Kanwa 5 20 10 10 1000 4 0 0





Page C3-163


Ratio Child

<6 SC ST

131 Rasulpur 120 795 396 399 1008 97 0 0

132 Rauni 309 1976 1009 967 958 343 628 0

133 Reka Khurd 77 458 237 221 932 81 51 0

134 Rohinibhavan 257 1543 818 725 886 264 486 0

135 Rupapokhar 202 1265 653 612 937 241 32 0

136 Sagrawan 389 2642 1414 1228 868 373 242 27

137 Sahipur 115 787 420 367 874 193 130 0

138 Sakarahat 42 234 133 101 759 34 0 0

139 Samaria 4 35 19 16 842 7 0 0

140 Saraon 87 483 265 218 823 80 0 0

141 Sarenja 1246 8483 4434 4049 913 1614 729 16

142 Sauri 114 699 377 322 854 121 144 0

143 Sauwanbandh 34 353 193 160 829 70 0 54

144 Shair T Gahmar 1073 7164 3628 3536 975 1220 781 0

145 Shamar Pura 54 339 173 166 960 63 35 0

146 Sharifpur 15 161 87 74 851 27 0 0

147 Shukraulia 305 2295 1180 1115 945 447 798 0

148 Sidhabandh 113 770 382 388 1016 129 45 0

149 Sikraur 725 4839 2528 2311 914 836 875 0

150 Sisrarh 397 2721 1385 1336 965 515 680 6

151 Sultanpur 6 44 21 23 1095 13 7 0

152 Tandwa 132 854 409 445 1088 144 401 14

153 Taranpur 135 829 435 394 906 174 566 1

154 Tikaitpur 3 27 15 12 800 3 0 0

155 Trawn 370 2510 1298 1212 934 386 575 32

156 Trilochanpur 42 253 131 122 931 39 0 0

157 Uchitpur 16 57 29 28 966 12 0 0

158 Ujiarpur 2 11 6 5 833 5 0 0

159 Umarpur 1 15 8 7 875 1 14 0

160 Utari 206 1329 689 640 929 228 81 0

161 Wah Saroop 9 58 30 28 933 13 0 0

Total 3971

0 25710

3 13311

5 123988 931 43748

42616

2553

HH-Number of Households, Pop- Total Population, SC- Scheduled Caste Population, ST-

Scheduled Tribe Population

Source: Census 2011.

3.12.1.2. Population Under Below Poverty Line

Below Poverty Line (BPL) is an economic benchmark of any particular area. Higher the

rate of BPL family, lower is the prosperity of the area. Based on the Baseline Survey





Page C3-164

2012, Ministry of Drinking water and Sanitation indicated that an average of 40.33%

population in the study area Blocks falls under BPL category.

Table 3-19 BPL Households and Rate of BPL Households in Blocks

S.No. Block Name Household BPL Households BPL %

1 Mohammadabad 43543 13304 30.6 2 Zamania 55314 12488 22.6

3 Buxar 38480 20630 53.6 4 Chausa 23275 11228 48.2 5 Itarhi 36164 16262 45.0

6 Rajpur 48266 24923 51.6

Total / Rate 2,45,042 98,835 40.3

Source: Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan, Ministry of Drinking Water & Sanitation, 2011.

3.12.1.3. Employment and Livelihood

The total working population in the study area is 81,776 with the percentage of 31.8%.

64.85% of the working populations are main workers, shows the improved employment

activity as they are employed for more than 6 months in the year. About 76.36% of the

total working population is engaged in agricultural activity. The agricultural workers

group is sub-grouped into Cultivators and Agricultural Labors. In which 63.19% were

cultivators and 36.8% were Agricultural Labors. Household Industry relates to

production, processing, servicing, repairing or making and selling of goods. Other

workers are all workers who have been engaged in some economic activity like

employed in industries, fishing activity, wagers, construction workers, etc., but are not

cultivators or agricultural laborers or Household Industry. The percentage of Household

and Other workers group were 4.21% and 19.41% respectively. The higher rate of

Agriculture with respect to study area shows the majority of the people are depended

on agriculture for their livelihood.

Table 3-20 Workers Group Distribution in the Study Area

S. No

Villages Working Population Agriculture Workers

Household Workers

Other Workers

Total MAIN MGN MCL MAL MGC MGA MHH MGH MOT MGO

1 Akbarpur 214 197 17 0 190 0 17 2 0 5 0

2 Akhauripur 1078 680 398 101 362 9 197 58 161 159 31 3 Ami 26 18 8 12 6 2 1 0 5 0 0

4 Ashanandpur 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 5 Atraulia 166 107 59 27 17 0 2 23 22 40 35

6 Atrauna 860 634 226 229 262 22 169 9 3 134 32

7 Badauli Adai 567 464 103 162 253 0 98 11 1 38 4 8 Badauli Mafi 205 204 1 20 178 0 1 0 0 6 0





Page C3-165

S. No


Household Workers

Other Workers


9 Badihar Mafi 10 10 0 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 Baghelwa 341 290 51 104 179 17 34 0 0 7 0

11 Bahora Ta. Birpur 422 357 65 55 293 2 2 1 53 8 8

12 Bakainia 364 246 118 98 67 8 101 11 3 70 6


133 133 0 4 122 0 0 1 0 6 0

14 Baluwa 699 326 373 114 94 17 236 1 4 117 116

15 Bamhani 430 256 174 47 208 0 170 0 0 1 4

16 Baniapatpur 95 27 68 19 6 23 45 0 0 2 0 17 Bansi 66 66 0 5 61 0 0 0 0 0 0

18 Bara 4856 3356 1500

1153

431 66 993 280 90 1492 351

19 Bareji 1213 1093 120 562 72 30 26 28 3 431 61

20 Barhana 497 187 310 111 37 145 135 10 25 29 5

21 Barki Puraini 177 132 45 96 11 0 21 12 13 13 11 22 Barupur 904 293 611 86 190 89 514 7 4 10 4

23 Basantpur 392 291 101 116 112 13 84 0 0 63 4 24 Bechanpurwa 211 152 59 146 0 0 59 0 0 6 0

25 Belahi 206 54 152 12 18 17 82 1 2 23 51

26 Bhaluha 331 86 245 62 10 8 232 0 0 14 5 27 Bharkhara 280 175 105 53 56 1 88 5 4 61 12

28 Bhataura Buzurg 7 7 0 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0

29 Bhataura Khurd 1098 909 189 211 448 14 80 36 10 214 85 30 Bhawar Kol 333 276 57 140 57 29 26 10 0 69 2

31 Bhelupur 578 153 425 44 97 16 406 0 1 12 2 32 Bhitihara 620 497 123 224 139 0 104 1 4 133 15

33 Bijhaura 1151 538 613 275 186 39 507 2 16 75 51

34 Birpur 3053 2421 632 794 895 94 365 132 48 600 125 35 Bishunpur 26 20 6 15 0 3 0 0 0 5 3

36 Chak Bhago 276 221 55 76 140 2 45 0 8 5 0


4 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0

38 Chaurahi 5 2 3 0 2 0 3 0 0 0 0

39 Chausa 2973 1935 1038 301 145 112 589 227 50 1262 287 40 Chhotki Puraini 262 89 173 4 37 5 164 2 1 46 3

41 Chilbila 606 372 234 248 109 16 161 0 0 15 57 42 Daulat Pur 15 15 0 3 9 0 0 0 0 3 0

43 Dehri 3303 1575 1728 478 839 296 1373 37 21 221 38

44 Deuriya 72 60 12 58 0 12 0 0 0 2 0 45 Dev Chand Pur 366 208 158 38 141 3 155 16 0 13 0

46 Dewasthapur 253 212 41 176 19 0 41 1 0 16 0

47 Dharmagatpur 9 6 3 0 6 0 3 0 0 0 0 48 Dhundhani 211 211 0 0 210 0 0 0 0 1 0

49 Ekdar 201 33 168 0 0 99 67 0 0 33 2 50 Firoj Pur 982 705 277 80 536 10 249 7 5 82 13

51 Gadaipur 57 49 8 37 0 1 0 0 0 12 7

52 Gahmar 7058 4399 2659

1700

1179

116 1396 207 317 1313 830

53 Gajarahi 79 79 0 66 2 0 0 0 0 11 0

54 Gobindapur 414 225 189 87 8 57 118 3 2 127 12 55 Gyani Chak 79 10 69 5 4 6 63 0 0 1 0

56 Hadipur 157 101 56 62 2 34 15 0 1 37 6





Page C3-166

S. No


Household Workers

Other Workers


57 Hakimpur 699 508 191 226 233 15 161 8 5 41 10 58 Haripur 439 218 221 47 5 19 77 8 2 158 123

59 Harnathpur 52 0 52 0 0 0 52 0 0 0 0

60 Hathauri 246 204 42 101 94 10 12 1 0 8 20 61 Hethua 1164 758 406 358 284 110 285 3 3 113 8

62 Holartikar 130 8 122 2 0 0 122 0 0 6 0 63 Husenpur 137 69 68 24 28 28 32 3 3 14 5

64 Isapur 43 39 4 27 8 2 2 0 0 4 0

65 Ismailpur 166 163 3 70 84 2 1 1 0 8 0 66 Itwa 21 21 0 12 9 0 0 0 0 0 0

67 Jagdishpur 18 10 8 7 0 7 1 0 0 3 0

68 Jagwal 145 59 86 0 57 3 64 1 11 1 8 69 Jaipura 375 9 366 0 1 3 360 0 0 8 3

70 Jamauli 1089 924 165 85 775 5 159 2 0 62 1

71 Jarigawan 301 154 147 69 66 66 62 3 12 16 7 72 Jivnrain Pur 339 126 213 0 107 0 25 17 183 2 5

73 Jokahi 134 86 48 19 45 1 14 2 1 20 32 74 Kadipur Kalan 219 77 142 70 4 37 103 0 0 3 2

75 Kamarpur 1303 846 457 347 299 194 249 3 0 197 14

76 Kamhariya 265 195 70 47 52 3 41 1 1 95 25

77 Kanak Narayanpur

410 334 76 60 180 39 5 24 4 70 28

78 Karhansi 992 866 126 502 312 25 95 13 0 39 6 79 kashipur 193 100 93 22 60 27 66 8 0 10 0

80 Kathaja 176 14 162 8 0 40 119 0 0 6 3 81 Kathtar 300 207 93 91 46 55 12 49 24 21 2

82 Khakrahi 336 166 170 122 5 38 130 1 0 38 2

83 Khelafatpur 504 279 225 107 64 14 133 24 49 84 29 84 Khemrajpur 73 40 33 3 33 2 29 2 1 2 1

85 Kishunipur 250 125 125 124 1 0 123 0 2 0 0

86 Kocharhi 883 733 150 173 246 9 132 7 0 307 9 87 Korarawa 104 75 29 24 38 8 14 0 1 13 6

88 Kudratipur 186 14 172 1 4 2 28 0 3 9 139

89 Kukurha 1801 1031 770 517 403 195 539 4 13 107 23 90 Kusahi 509 90 419 63 7 15 169 5 209 15 26

91 Kushahi 54 38 16 17 21 13 3 0 0 0 0 92 Kusiyra 61 40 21 2 33 0 21 4 0 1 0

93 Kusrupa 579 530 49 111 285 5 41 25 0 109 3

94 Kutubpur 284 276 8 117 70 1 1 7 0 82 6 95 Lahana 892 665 227 172 248 17 157 6 2 239 51

96 Larai 92 28 64 26 1 10 54 0 0 1 0

97 Lohandi 666 255 411 124 95 13 378 0 1 36 19 98 Loharpur 533 523 10 422 58 4 0 2 4 41 2

99 Lugra Sugra 81 77 4 17 52 1 1 0 0 8 2 100 Magarkhai 472 385 87 90 220 17 51 6 0 69 19

101 Makuriya 29 9 20 7 1 3 6 0 0 1 11

102 Malahipur 196 182 14 4 177 0 14 0 0 1 0 103 Malikpur Lazi 5 5 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 2 0

104 Mangolpur 464 344 120 155 170 13 37 1 0 18 70

105 Mangopur 123 7 116 1 1 6 110 0 0 5 0 106 Mangraon 1180 652 528 144 389 28 357 13 28 106 115

107 Mania 1021 828 193 205 380 17 158 16 3 227 15





Page C3-167

S. No


Household Workers

Other Workers


108 Marahi 186 181 5 13 141 0 4 1 0 26 1 109 Masarhia 65 65 0 59 1 0 0 0 0 5 0

110 Mitanpura 109 102 7 54 19 1 3 0 0 29 3

111 Mohanpurwa 173 172 1 14 149 0 0 0 0 9 1 112 Musar Dewa 151 131 20 65 23 2 2 2 1 41 15

113 Naniaura 276 107 169 78 16 2 167 1 0 12 0 114 Narainapur 203 191 12 84 17 0 0 3 0 87 12

115 Narbatpur 1668 698 970 168 204 133 553 22 14 304 270


196 121 75 13 16 0 11 39 40 53 24

117 Nawagawan 272 177 95 63 94 46 47 0 0 20 2

118 Nikrojpur 383 362 21 74 274 1 18 0 0 14 2 119 Nizampur 6 6 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

120 Nyayapur 607 352 255 72 221 2 224 1 0 58 29

121 Paliya 766 534 232 134 379 89 139 4 0 17 4 122 Pathara 1314 842 472 440 235 5 339 27 76 140 52

123 Piprarh 453 335 118 122 142 16 74 32 19 39 9 124 Pithari 348 259 89 158 95 47 41 4 0 2 1

125 Puraina 92 87 5 59 11 3 2 4 0 13 0

126 Raisenpur 141 94 47 50 8 5 2 2 2 34 38 127 Rajapur 885 716 169 123 559 22 134 5 3 29 10

128 Raje Pah 2 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

129 Rajmal Bandh 44 40 4 22 18 0 2 0 1 0 1 130 Rampur Kanwa 7 5 2 5 0 0 2 0 0 0 0

131 Rasulpur 262 202 60 136 53 24 5 0 0 13 31 132 Rauni 621 610 11 114 393 0 8 10 0 93 3

133 Reka Khurd 111 104 7 2 95 0 0 1 7 6 0

134 Rohinibhavan 652 176 476 96 73 129 347 0 0 7 0 135 Rupapokhar 501 142 359 86 46 7 339 2 6 8 7

136 Sagrawan 747 509 238 365 92 106 99 11 6 41 27

137 Sahipur 281 161 120 62 90 0 119 0 1 9 0 138 Sakarahat 52 0 52 0 0 1 51 0 0 0 0

139 Samaria 12 8 4 0 1 0 0 3 2 4 2

140 Saraon 123 107 16 63 36 2 13 1 0 7 1 141 Sarenja 2417 1749 668 399 735 10 566 42 11 573 81

142 Sauri 248 91 157 49 34 54 101 3 0 5 2 143 Sauwanbandh 140 136 4 16 117 0 0 0 0 3 4

144 Shair T Gahmar 2063 1185 878 572 401 206 422 21 16 191 234

145 Shamar Pura 109 75 34 30 30 1 31 8 0 7 2 146 Sharifpur 70 48 22 39 0 22 0 0 0 9 0

147 Shukraulia 549 487 62 206 198 4 48 21 6 62 4

148 Sidhabandh 165 126 39 99 1 10 24 7 4 19 1 149 Sikraur 1828 1239 589 265 745 34 529 24 7 205 19

150 Sisrarh 1118 371 747 138 216 6 707 3 31 14 3 151 Sultanpur 10 9 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 7 1

152 Tandwa 259 241 18 108 95 4 5 13 3 25 6

153 Taranpur 186 161 25 29 101 1 18 3 0 28 6 154 Tikaitpur 4 4 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

155 Trawn 682 643 39 254 307 4 27 6 0 76 8

156 Trilochanpur 78 5 73 3 0 67 3 1 0 1 3 157 Uchitpur 31 2 29 2 0 4 23 0 2 0 0

158 Ujiarpur 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2





Page C3-168

S. No


Household Workers

Other Workers


159 Umarpur 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 160 Utari 360 287 73 222 58 0 71 0 0 7 2

161 Wah Saroop 17 17 0 10 0 0 0 7 0 0 0

Total

81776

53035 2874

1 18716

20748

3625

19363

1745 1700 1182

6 4053

Total- Total Working Population, MAIN – Main Workers, MGN- Marginal Workers, MCL- Main Cultivators, MAL-Main Agricultural Labors, MGC- Marginal Cultivators, MGA- Marginal Agricultural Labors, MHH- Main Household Industry, MGH- Marginal Household Industry, MOT – Main Other Industry, MGO- Marginal Other Industry.

3.12.1.4. Education Indicators

In the study area about 71.8% of the total populations are literates, which is more than

the national literacy rate of 74.04%. The below table shows the higher rate of literacy

rate is observed in the areas and the rate of male literacy is more when compared with

the female literacy rate. Most of the villages in the study area are having primary

schools within the village, Middle schools and High schools are available within the

respective Panchayat. Higher education facilities such as colleges are present at the

average distance of 10km.

Table 3-21 Literacy pattern in the Study Area

S.No Villages Total

Literates

Total Literacy

Rate

Male Literates

Male Literacy

rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

1 Akbarpur 247 61.0 152 73.1 95 48.2

2 Akhauripur 1446 74.8 813 82.3 633 67.0

3 Ami 35 97.2 17 94.4 18 100.0

4 Ashanandpur 5 83.3 4 100.0 1 50.0

5 Atraulia 248 80.8 146 89.6 102 70.8

6 Atrauna 1462 64.2 839 73.5 623 54.7

7 Badauli Adai 869 68.2 510 80.6 359 55.9

8 Badauli Mafi 239 57.9 152 69.4 87 44.8

9 Badihar Mafi 9 56.3 5 62.5 4 50.0

10 Baghelwa 493 68.5 322 84.5 171 50.4

11 Bahora Ta. Birpur

447 66.2 280 76.1 167 54.4

12 Bakainia 894 72.3 537 84.2 357 59.6


214 52.1 148 70.5 66 32.8

14 Baluwa 1438 76.4 882 88.6 556 62.8

15 Bamhani 557 54.5 330 62.4 227 46.0

16 Baniapatpur 215 70.0 137 83.0 78 54.9

17 Bansi 55 40.7 42 59.2 13 20.3





Page C3-169

S.No Villages Total

Literates

Total Literacy

Rate

Male Literates

Male Literacy

rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

18 Bara 13765 78.6 7628 86.7 6137 70.4

19 Bareji 1448 75.3 926 90.4 522 58.1

20 Barhana 721 77.6 405 87.5 316 67.8

21 Barki Puraini 686 85.8 398 95.2 288 75.4

22 Barupur 1008 70.1 645 86.9 363 52.2

23 Basantpur 948 76.8 542 86.2 406 67.1

24 Bechanpurwa 446 70.9 298 87.9 148 51.0

25 Belahi 496 69.2 312 84.8 184 52.7

26 Bhaluha 490 68.3 300 79.4 190 56.0

27 Bharkhara 617 73.7 357 85.4 260 62.1

28 Bhataura Buzurg 6 28.6 5 41.7 1 11.1

29 Bhataura Khurd 2091 73.6 1253 84.9 838 61.4

30 Bhawar Kol 522 71.7 312 85.0 210 58.2

31 Bhelupur 540 59.1 365 76.2 175 40.3

32 Bhitihara 1261 73.2 723 83.7 538 62.6

33 Bijhaura 1880 69.9 1119 80.6 761 58.4

34 Birpur 4496 62.6 2691 72.4 1805 52.1

35 Bishunpur 94 98.9 46 97.9 48 100.0

36 Chak Bhago 311 72.5 191 82.0 120 61.2


11 91.7 7 100.0 4 80.0

38 Chaurahi 3 33.3 1 20.0 2 50.0

39 Chausa 5807 77.9 3449 87.0 2358 67.5

40 Chhotki Puraini 528 66.0 328 81.8 200 50.1

41 Chilbila 801 55.2 526 68.4 275 40.3

42 Daulat Pur 45 84.9 21 95.5 24 77.4

43 Dehri 4485 69.0 2664 79.6 1821 57.8

44 Deuriya 225 89.6 121 94.5 104 84.6

45 Dev Chand Pur 489 66.6 326 78.7 163 50.9

46 Dewasthapur 701 71.6 414 82.5 287 60.2

47 Dharmagatpur 21 87.5 12 92.3 9 81.8

48 Dhundhani 205 66.3 128 82.1 77 50.3

49 Ekdar 488 88.1 287 97.6 201 77.3

50 Firoj Pur 1524 63.9 987 77.1 537 48.6

51 Gadaipur 127 85.2 62 93.9 65 78.3

52 Gahmar 17108 76.6 9897 86.4 7211 66.2

53 Gajarahi 260 98.5 136 99.3 124 97.6

54 Gobindapur 1035 84.2 587 91.7 448 76.1

55 Gyani Chak 158 63.5 107 81.7 51 43.2

56 Hadipur 330 84.2 196 94.7 134 72.4

57 Hakimpur 1519 72.1 895 83.3 624 60.4





Page C3-170

S.No Villages Total

Literates

Total Literacy

Rate

Male Literates

Male Literacy

rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

58 Haripur 763 63.7 490 80.3 273 46.4

59 Harnathpur 2 3.2 1 3.1 1 3.3

60 Hathauri 562 77.7 349 89.3 213 64.2

61 Hethua 2047 75.9 1219 85.4 828 65.2

62 Holartikar 155 59.8 107 74.8 48 41.4

63 Husenpur 207 78.4 137 94.5 70 58.8

64 Isapur 123 84.2 77 92.8 46 73.0

65 Ismailpur 372 61.6 186 66.2 186 57.6

66 Itwa 20 55.6 10 62.5 10 50.0

67 Jagdishpur 24 60.0 14 58.3 10 62.5

68 Jagwal 32 13.4 23 17.8 9 8.2

69 Jaipura 508 68.4 321 79.7 187 55.0

70 Jamauli 1762 57.3 1135 68.8 627 43.9

71 Jarigawan 839 74.2 466 80.3 373 67.8

72 Jivnrain Pur 174 46.6 110 52.6 64 39.0

73 Jokahi 261 75.2 139 79.9 122 70.5

74 Kadipur Kalan 375 81.7 214 89.9 161 72.9

75 Kamarpur 1911 75.6 1142 86.8 769 63.4

76 Kamhariya 636 82.0 398 93.2 238 68.2

77 Kanak Narayanpur

886 80.8 523 89.2 363 71.2

78 Karhansi 2562 70.9 1525 79.4 1037 61.3

79 kashipur 241 77.0 134 88.2 107 66.5

80 Kathaja 439 73.3 269 82.3 170 62.5

81 Kathtar 377 56.6 262 75.1 115 36.3

82 Khakrahi 755 81.4 444 90.4 311 71.2

83 Khelafatpur 757 75.6 426 81.0 331 69.7

84 Khemrajpur 88 55.7 59 73.8 29 37.2

85 Kishunipur 332 83.6 197 93.8 135 72.2

86 Kocharhi 1319 63.8 834 77.7 485 48.7

87 Korarawa 243 63.4 144 74.6 99 52.1

88 Kudratipur 128 25.5 84 33.7 44 17.5

89 Kukurha 3298 69.9 1962 80.8 1336 58.3

90 Kusahi 236 35.2 133 40.9 103 29.9

91 Kushahi 140 70.4 95 85.6 45 51.1

92 Kusiyra 57 43.2 35 49.3 22 36.1

93 Kusrupa 1283 75.0 773 85.8 510 63.0

94 Kutubpur 627 69.7 376 80.0 251 58.4

95 Lahana 2105 71.4 1275 84.9 830 57.3

96 Larai 266 71.1 159 85.0 107 57.2

97 Lohandi 1041 73.0 645 87.9 396 57.1





Page C3-171

S.No Villages Total

Literates

Total Literacy

Rate

Male Literates

Male Literacy

rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

98 Loharpur 1728 82.5 976 90.1 752 74.4

99 Lugra Sugra 214 71.1 141 87.0 73 52.5

100 Magarkhai 1319 76.6 810 86.5 509 64.8

101 Makuriya 86 86.0 47 92.2 39 79.6

102 Malahipur 283 72.0 178 88.1 105 55.0

103 Malikpur Lazi 16 84.2 10 100.0 6 66.7

104 Mangolpur 1205 75.0 684 82.5 521 67.1

105 Mangopur 157 64.9 97 78.2 60 50.8

106 Mangraon 1954 68.4 1196 80.8 758 55.2

107 Mania 2056 75.6 1170 86.3 886 65.1

108 Marahi 331 55.5 223 71.5 108 38.0

109 Masarhia 198 85.7 105 97.2 93 75.6

110 Mitanpura 202 57.7 121 67.2 81 47.6

111 Mohanpurwa 237 72.7 139 82.7 98 62.0

112 Musar Dewa 346 77.1 231 86.5 115 63.2

113 Naniaura 486 78.5 265 89.8 221 68.2

114 Narainapur 566 87.2 318 93.0 248 80.8

115 Narbatpur 2638 73.3 1621 86.4 1017 59.1


340 94.7 209 97.2 131 91.0

117 Nawagawan 276 54.0 171 65.8 105 41.8

118 Nikrojpur 596 67.3 392 83.2 204 49.3

119 Nizampur 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0

120 Nyayapur 1077 64.9 692 76.5 385 51.0

121 Paliya 886 64.8 591 78.0 295 48.4

122 Pathara 2147 74.0 1306 86.7 841 60.2

123 Piprarh 1073 73.6 630 81.2 443 65.0

124 Pithari 748 82.1 419 90.7 329 73.3

125 Puraina 155 62.5 98 73.7 57 49.6

126 Raisenpur 510 64.0 294 76.0 216 52.7

127 Rajapur 1140 66.3 690 77.9 450 54.0

128 Raje Pah 2 50.0 2 66.7 0 0.0

129 Rajmal Bandh 135 65.5 92 80.0 43 47.3

130 Rampur Kanwa 8 50.0 6 75.0 2 25.0

131 Rasulpur 490 70.2 290 85.0 200 56.0

132 Rauni 1343 82.2 762 91.1 581 72.9

133 Reka Khurd 251 66.6 155 80.3 96 52.2

134 Rohinibhavan 860 67.2 563 83.3 297 49.3

135 Rupapokhar 669 65.3 432 80.6 237 48.6

136 Sagrawan 1730 76.2 1056 86.8 674 64.0

137 Sahipur 442 74.4 267 82.7 175 64.6





Page C3-172

S.No Villages Total

Literates

Total Literacy

Rate

Male Literates

Male Literacy

rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

138 Sakarahat 88 44.0 65 59.6 23 25.3

139 Samaria 15 53.6 9 64.3 6 42.9

140 Saraon 310 76.9 193 86.9 117 64.6

141 Sarenja 4467 65.0 2693 74.6 1774 54.4

142 Sauri 379 65.6 251 79.4 128 48.9

143 Sauwanbandh 168 59.4 110 72.4 58 44.3

144 Shair T Gahmar 4223 71.0 2542 84.3 1681 57.4

145 Shamar Pura 180 65.2 118 82.5 62 46.6

146 Sharifpur 92 68.7 61 83.6 31 50.8

147 Shukraulia 1295 70.1 774 81.0 521 58.4

148 Sidhabandh 454 70.8 267 86.1 187 56.5

149 Sikraur 3018 75.4 1751 83.9 1267 66.1

150 Sisrarh 1525 69.1 904 80.5 621 57.3

151 Sultanpur 25 80.6 13 92.9 12 70.6

152 Tandwa 528 74.4 293 86.9 235 63.0

153 Taranpur 448 68.4 280 82.4 168 53.3

154 Tikaitpur 16 66.7 9 75.0 7 58.3

155 Trawn 1539 72.5 926 84.6 613 59.6

156 Trilochanpur 186 86.9 107 94.7 79 78.2

157 Uchitpur 15 33.3 12 46.2 3 15.8

158 Ujiarpur 4 66.7 4 100.0 0 0.0

159 Umarpur 11 78.6 6 85.7 5 71.4

160 Utari 808 73.4 485 85.5 323 60.5

161 Wah Saroop 29 64.4 18 78.3 11 50.0

Total 153245 71.8 91215 82.5 62030 60.3

Source: Census 2011.

Table 3-22 Summary Socioeconomic Indicators of the Study Area

S.No Particulars Study Area Bihar Uttar Pradesh

1 Study Area 161 Villages

Buxar, Chausa, Rajpur and Itarhi Taluks of Buxar

District

Mohammadabad and Zamania Taluk

of Ghazipur District

2 Total Households 39,710 1,89,13,565 3,34,48,035 3 Total Population 2,57,103 10,40,99,452 199812341 4 Sex Ratio 931 918 912

5 Children Population (<6 Years Old) 43,748 1,91,33,964 3,07,91,331

6 Children Sex Ratio 937 935 902 7 Urban Rural Ratio 0:100 11:89 22:78 8 SC Population 8.78% 15.91% 20.69% 9 ST Population 8.23% 1.28% 0.56%

10 Age at Marriage – Male 20-21 21.6 21.6





Page C3-173

S.No Particulars Study Area Bihar Uttar Pradesh

11 Age at Marriage – Female

18-19 17.6 18.4

12 BPL Households 40.3% 53.5% 37.7%

13 Working Group Population

31.8% 33.35% 32.93%

14 Main Workers 64.85% 61.51% 67.81% 15 Marginal Workers 34.15% 38.48% 32.18% 16 Agricultural Workers 76.36% 73.55% 59.25% 17 Household Industries 4.21% 4.06% 5.92% 18 Other Workers 19.41% 22.38% 34.82% 19 Institutional Birth Rate 60% 27.7% 24.5%

20 Childhood Immunization 70% 41.4% 30.3%

21 Sanitation Facilities 22.5% 21.41% 35.24% 22 Literacy Rate 71.8% 61.8% 67.68%




Chapter 4-Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Page C4-174

4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 General

The chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts due to the

proposed project during construction and operational phases and the mitigation

measures for impact identified. The environmental impacts are categorized as primary

and secondary. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly to the project

and secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and typically include the

associated investment and changed pattern of social and economic activities by the

proposed action.

The plan outlines potential problems that may impact the environment and

recommends corrective measures where required. Mitigation measures at the source

level and an overall EMP for the study area are planned for implementation, to improve

the supportive capacity of the study area and also to preserve the assimilative capacity

of the receiving bodies.

4.2 Identification of Likely Impacts

Every activity and operation has either adverse or beneficial impacts on environment.

The environmental impact identification has been done based on proposed project

activities. All the activities from construction phase to operational phases of the project

have been broadly covered, which is given in Table 4.1 and 4.2.





Page C4-175

Table 4-1 Activity-Impact Identification Matrix for Construction Phase of the Proposed Project

Construction Phase Potential Impacts

Main Activities

Sub –Activities

La

nd

use

La

nd

sca

pe

La

nd

/so

il

En

vir

on

me

nta

l

Surf

ace

/ gr

ou

nd

W

ate

r re

sou

rce

s

Wa

ter

qu

ali

ty

Air

qu

ali

ty

Soli

d

wa

ste

Ge

ne

rati

on

Am

bie

nt

no

ise

Le

vel

Tra

ffic

a

nd

T

ran

spo

rt d

ensi

ty

Re

sou

rce

u

se

(En

erg

y)

Eco

logy

Soci

al e

con

om

ic

Cu

ltu

re/H

eri

tage

Agr

icu

ltu

re

in

the

surr

ou

nd

ings

Site Preparation Site Clearing & Cleaning Ground leveling Waste handling and its transportation Soil Compaction

Labour Deployment - Camp Siting

Construction of labour sheds to accommodate labour, Supply of water, Supply of fuel/energy, Waste handling & its disposal Sewage Disposal

Excavation Moving of Heavy Machinery Soil Extraction and Stacking, Soil Loading and Transportation For Disposal, Various Tools Like Crow Bar Foundations for heavy machinery installation Construction Power through onsite Diesel Generators

Material Handling &

Transportation and Unloading of material from trucks Storage &





Page C4-176


Main Activities

Sub –Activities

La

nd

use

La

nd

sca

pe

La

nd

/so

il

En

vir

on

me

nta

l

Surf

ace

/ gr

ou

nd

W

ate

r re

sou

rce

s

Wa

ter

qu

ali

ty

Air

qu

ali

ty

Soli

d

wa

ste

Ge

ne

rati

on

Am

bie

nt

no

ise

Le

vel

Tra

ffic

a

nd

T

ran

spo

rt d

ensi

ty

Re

sou

rce

u

se

(En

erg

y)

Eco

logy

Soci

al e

con

om

ic

Cu

ltu

re/H

eri

tage

Agr

icu

ltu

re

in

the

surr

ou

nd

ings

storage Handling of steel sheets, metals, Fabricated structure, Cement, Concrete, Bricks, Steel etc. Conveyance of material within the project site

Plant Building Construction

Transportation of material to construction site Preparation/ Mixing of construction material Supply of water Operation of construction machinery (like cranes, Concrete Mix Plant, Floor Developer, Forklift etc.). Handling and disposal of construction wastes Diesel Generator Operation

Erection of sheds, installation of Machinery Building Fittings

Erection of sheds – welding/ cutting onsite, Installation of heavy machinery, pumps, Mechanical installation and sand blasting, Electrical installation





Page C4-177


Main Activities

Sub –Activities

La

nd

use

La

nd

sca

pe

La

nd

/so

il

En

vir

on

me

nta

l

Surf

ace

/ gr

ou

nd

W

ate

r re

sou

rce

s

Wa

ter

qu

ali

ty

Air

qu

ali

ty

Soli

d

wa

ste

Ge

ne

rati

on

Am

bie

nt

no

ise

Le

vel

Tra

ffic

a

nd

T

ran

spo

rt d

ensi

ty

Re

sou

rce

u

se

(En

erg

y)

Eco

logy

Soci

al e

con

om

ic

Cu

ltu

re/H

eri

tage

Agr

icu

ltu

re

in

the

surr

ou

nd

ings

& Furnishing Drilling and Fixing, Painting/ White washes Disposal of Wastes (empty paint cans, containers, electrical waste, wooden and metal waste etc.)

Demobilization of Construction Equipment

Dismantling of temporary support construction structures/ Equipments, Removal of construction machinery Transportation of Construction/ Dismantled waste Site cleaning/ washings

Site Commissioning

Trials functioning of Production & Warehousing units, Conveying and packing system, Plumbic fixtures, Electrical gadgets, Fire fighting system, Effluent Treatment plant, etc.,





Page C4-178

Table 4-2 Activity – Impact Identification Matrix for Operation Phase of the Proposed Project

Operation Phase Potential Impacts

Main Activity Sub –Activities

Air

qu

ali

ty

Wa

ter

qu

ali

ty

Surf

ace

wa

ter

reso

urc

es

Gro

un

d w

ate

r re

sou

rce

s

La

nd

an

d s

oil

q

ua

lity

No

ise

qu

ali

ty

Tra

ffic

v

olu

me

Eco

logi

cal

Soci

o

eco

no

mic

A

spe

cts

Transportation of coal Transportation of Indian coal from wagons and imported coal through truck to coal handling plant

Point Source and Associated Environmental Impacts

Emission generated from stack

Fugitive emission Fugitive emissions are envisaged from handling and storage of coal in the stock yard, fly ash handling systems and transfer operations

Noise emission Generation of noise from boiler section areas, Loading & Unloading areas, Machineries and Vehicle Movement

Utilization of Water resources River Ganga water utilization for the plant operation

Wastewater generation Generation, Treatment and Disposal of effluent

Fly ash generation from Boiler Fly ash generation and disposal and transportation

Occupational Health Effects on human health in the plant and nearby area due to plant operations





Page C4-179

4.3 Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

Most of the construction phase activities would exhibit reversible and short term

impacts which can be readily controlled and mitigated through robust and scientifically

designed construction work-method statements as per the best engineering and

management practices.

4.3.1 Land Use

a) Predicted Impacts on land use

The land use of the area will be changed as the vegetation cover and household may be

disturbed. The land will be developed by leveling and grading. As the land is not rocky,

no blasting is envisaged. Apart from localized construction impacts at the plant site, no

significant adverse impacts on soil in the surrounding area are anticipated.

b) Mitigation Measures

Construction debris will be removed continuously from the site

Construction debris will be stored at a designated area to ensure they do not find

their way to water bodies.

The topsoil removed during construction phase shall be stored separately to be

used afterwards for green belt development and leveling of site.

On completion of works all temporary structures, surplus materials and wastes

will be completely removed Optimization of land requirement through proper

site lay out design will be basic criteria at the design phase;

4.3.2 Soil Quality

a) Predicted Impacts on Soil Quality

The construction activities will result in loss of vegetation cover and top soil of

negligible extent in the plant area. About 9 million tons of Soil will be sourced from local

area. As the land is not rocky, no blasting is envisaged. Apart from localized

construction impacts at the plant site, no significant adverse impacts on soil in the

surrounding area are anticipated.


The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking so that it can

be used for greenbelt development.





Page C4-180

Oil trap for D.G set to prevent oil from damaging the soil.

Management of spilling of contaminants such as oil from equipment,

cement, etc. on the soil;

4.3.3 Air Quality

a) Predicted Impact on Air Quality

The movement of equipment at site, dust emitted during the leveling, grading,

earthworks, foundation works, vehicle movement on unpaved roads and other

construction related activities, exhaust emissions from diesel generators, vehicles and

other heavy construction equipment deployed at site will be the main sources of air

pollution during the construction period. Due to the short duration of the planned

action, any impacts on ambient air quality during construction activities are expected to

be short term.


Transport vehicles and construction equipment / machineries will be

properly maintained to reduce air emissions

Equipment will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against

stipulated norms

Exhaust vent of DG set will be kept at proper height to ensure quick dispersion

of gaseous emissions

Sprinkling of water on roads and construction site, sufficient vegetation are

some of the measures that would greatly reduce the impacts during the

construction phase.

Implementing proper upkeep and maintenance of vehicles, Pollution under

Control (PUC) certified vehicles will be used for transporting machinery.

4.3.4 Noise Levels

a) Predicted Impacts on Noise Quality

The activities such as foundation & infrastructure construction, plant erection will

produce periodic noise during construction phase. However, possible noise control

measures will be adopted and hence the impact of generated noise on the equipment is

likely to be temporary and insignificant.





Page C4-181


D.G set to be used during construction phase shall be provided with acoustic

enclosures

Where applicable, hearing protection shall be provided to the workers and

their use by workers shall be enforced by contractors as well as site

management.

In the event construction noise levels at the facility boundary exceed the

industrial limit of 70 dB(A), temporary noise barriers would be installed to

minimize the overall noise related impacts on the neighbouring areas due to

construction activities

4.3.5 Predicted Impacts on Water Quality

a) Impact on Water Quality and Quantity

The wash water from construction equipment maintenance centre will contribute to oil

and grease concentration. The wastewater from temporary labor colony will contribute

to BOD concentrations. Wastewater from the labor colony and equipment washing if not

treated properly might damage the water quality in the nearby water bodies. STPL will

undertake proper mitigation measures to ensure nearby surface water bodies are not

polluted. The overall impact on water environment during construction phase is likely

to be short term and insignificant.

The groundwater will not be used during construction phase. The entire water

requirement will be met from river and hence impacts are not envisaged on the quantity

of groundwater. The wastewater from the construction site may find its way to

groundwater and pollute the same,


Oil and grease trap at standby DG set site will be provided

As far as possible, the unskilled work-force will be sourced from the local

areas. Packaged Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)/septic tanks to treat sewage at

temporary construction workers’ colony shall be provided

Temporary sanitation facilities (soak pits/septic tanks/ Bio Toilets) will be set





Page C4-182

up to prevent contamination.

Since most of the construction work force will consist of floating population,

the demand for water and sanitation facilities will be low and it will be

managed by STPL

4.3.6 Solid and Hazardous Waste

a) Predicted Impacts of Solid and Hazardous Waste

The hazardous materials used during the construction may include diesel, welding gas

and paints. Construction sites handle small quantities of lube oils and diesel for running

the machine powered construction equipment. In case of spill of these materials, the soil

quality can get deteriorated and also in case of hazardous waste finding its way to the

water ways may pollute the surface and groundwater of the nearby areas.


In order to avoid soil contamination due to accidental spills, it has been

recommended to provide spill absorbing material at the construction site and

the contaminated soil should be excavated and these materials shall be stored,

and disposed of to hazardous waste disposal sites according to the guidelines

specified.

Hazardous waste such as used oil generated during construction activities

shall be stored at designated paved area at site and shall be sent for disposal

to an authorized recycler.

Other solid waste generated during construction phase such as packaging

waste i.e. paper, plastic and etc., shall be collected in dedicated area and shall

be disposed off to an approved scrap dealer.

Special care will be taken during deliveries of construction materials,

especially when fuels and hazardous materials are being handled.

Care will be taken to avoid direct contact and spillage of painting waste

containing heavy metals during painting job. It is recommended to cover

ground with protecting sheets to avoid damage to soil and groundwater.





Page C4-183

4.3.7 Ecology and Biodiversity

a) Predicted Impacts on Ecology and Bio Diversity

There is no notified/protected ecologically sensitive area including national park,

sanctuary, Elephant/Tiger reserves existing in the study area. The study area comprises

of terrestrial and aquatic ecosystem. Predicted impacts are given below:

Changes in activity pattern of terrestrial fauna due to Noise

Loss of vegetation due to access cutting and site preparation

Accidental discharge of waste water may create impact on aquatic ecology if

not handled properly.

The predicted impacts on the surrounding ecology during construction phase are not

very significant.


Acoustic enclosures will be provided to the D.G sets being used during

construction phase to reduce the noise.

Green belt development using native species will provide habitat and food to

the birds and small animals.

STPL will avoid noise producing construction activities at night and also

unnecessary lighting at night to avoid any effect on avifauna.

4.3.8 Socio-Economic Impacts

There is no rehabilitation and resettlement for the proposed project. During

construction phase both direct and indirect employment will be generated. About 1000

people will work at the peak construction period. This will be beneficial to the local

economy. Hence no adverse impacts are envisaged during construction phase.

4.4. Impacts during operational phase

The possible impacts during thermal power plant operation on the environmental

attributes such as land use, soil quality, topography & climate, Ambient air quality,

water environment, noise levels, demographic & socio economics and health were

identified and presented briefly in report.





Page C4-184

In order to minimize the impact on climate change and harmonize the project

with the local eco system, an extensive green belt development program will be

adopted.

The water requirement for the power plant will be met from Ganga River and the

wastewater generated from the plant will be treated in an ETP to comply with

the norms of CPCB and the same will be used for plantation and green belt within

the plant premises during normal operations.

Acoustic enclosures will be provided to the turbines, generators and other

possible high noise producing equipments to reduce the transmission of noise to

the outside environment.

The overall impact on the socio economic environment will be beneficial as the

project increases the employment opportunities, increase the literacy rate,

improvement in socio-cultural environment of the study area.

The possible air emissions from the power plant for particulate matter, sulphur

dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen dioxide (NOX) are considered for predicting the Ground

Level Concentrations (GLC).

4.4.1. Land Use

The present land use of the area falls under both agriculture and undeveloped. After

proposed plant construction, land use will categorised as industrial so, there will not be

any adverse impact on the surrounding land use.

4.4.2. Air Quality

4.4.2.1. Point Source and Associated Environmental Impacts

Point source (stack gas) emissions are envisaged from the proposed 2x660 MW coal

based Thermal Power Plant. Stack gas emissions from the proposed Power Plant would

be constituted mainly of Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) and Sulphur dioxide (SO2).

Based on the preliminary information provided in the project report, the coal

requirement for the proposed 2 x 660MW coal based Thermal Power Plant pro ject will

be met by local coal from Deocha-Pachami coal block to Bihar State Power Generation

Company Ltd which was recommended by Ministry of Coal (MoC). Deocha-Pachami coal

block is located in south western part of Birbhum coalfield. The coal allocation letter is

attached in Annexure 5.





Page C4-185

It is expected that the coal from Deocha Pachami coal block may be available after the

four years of operation and hence the imported coal will be used during the period. The

calorific value of the typical Indian coal is in about 3500 Kcal/kg whereas the calorific

value of the imported coal from Indonesia will be in the range of 5300 to 5500 Kcal/kg.

The estimated quantity of coal requirement based on 100% Indian coal and 100%

Imported coal (@90% plf) will be 20,400 TPD and 5600 TPD respectively.

The Impact on Ambient Air Quality due to the proposed project was updated as per the

currently allocated coal characteristics and the existing baseline conditions. It can be

inferred from the below table that the peak emissions are envisaged due to Indian Coal

Scenario. The ambient air quality modeling was carried out for worst case scenario

(Indian coal) of maximum sulphur content of 0.6% with adoption of new power plant

emission standards of 100 mg/nm3 of SO2, 100 mg/Nm3 of NOx and 30 mg/Nm3 of PM.

The model inputs for the prediction of impacts are summarized in Table 4.3.

Table 4-3 Air Quality Modeling Inputs

Parameter Units Based on Indian coal worst case Scenario from each 660 MW unit

Based on Imported coal worst case Scenario from each 660 MW unit

Calorific value of coal Kcal/Kg 3500 5300

Station heat rate Kcal/Kwh 2247.97 2100


Sulfur content (max w/w) % 0.6 0.8

Coal consumption in each 660MW unit

TPH 425 262

Velocity of flue gas in each stack

m/s 22 14

Flue gas temperature ⁰C 125 50 Flue gas quantity from each plume

m3/hr 2574009 1571689

Flue gas at NTP Nm3/hr 1927273 1176792

Estimated Plume tip diameter

m 6.4 6.4

SO2 emission from each 660MW unit (uncontrolled emissions without FGD)

Kg/hr 5087 4184

SO2 concentration (without FGD)

mg/Nm3 2639 3556

SO2 concentration (with FGD) as per Standards

mg/Nm3 100 100

Minimum SO2 removal % 96 97





Page C4-186

Parameter Units Based on Indian coal worst case Scenario from each 660 MW unit

Based on Imported coal worst case Scenario from each 660 MW unit

required in FGD Resultant SO2 emission from each 660MW unit

Kg/hr 193 118

NOX emissions envisaged based on new standards

mg/Nm3 100 100

NOX emissions from each 660MW unit

Kg/hr 193 118

Particulate Matter emissions envisaged based on new standards

mg/Nm3 30 30

Particulate Matter emission rate from each 660MW unit

Kg/hr 58 47

Mixing heights play a vital role in predicting the ground level concentrations of the

pollutants. Mixing heights for the study area is obtained from “Atlas of Hourly Mixing

Height data” published by India Meteorological Data, New Delhi. The hourly averaged

mixing height pertaining to unstable ABL (Atmospheric Boundary Later) during the day

time (1000-1700 hrs) is seen to vary from a minimum of 640 m to a maximum of 1850

m.

Since the stack gas velocity is three times higher than that of the peak wind speed in the

area during the unstable environmental conditions, stack tip down-wash conditions are

not envisaged.

The site specific meteorological information indicated that, predominantly winds were

found to blow from east direction and hence the impact zone in the down wind direction

will be located in the west direction respectively. The input and output files used for

AERMOD modelling are enclosed in Annexure 11. In addition to the site specific data,

long term IMD data was also adopted for modelling.

4.4.2.2. Summary of the Air Quality Modeling Data

a) Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs Ground Level Concentration (GLC) of sulphur dioxide

will be in the order of 1.417µg/m3 and such concentrations will occur at a distance of

9km to 10km from the stack.





Page C4-187

The predicted concentrations were found to be insignificant which will get diluted

rapidly. The envisaged resultant post project concentrations (Table 4.4) in the down-

wind villages will be in the range of 12.2µg/m3 to 16.7µg/m3 during the post project

scenario, which will be below the prescribed NAAQ standards. The isopleths of SO2 is

given in Figure 4.1. Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Sulphur Dioxide

Concentration as per IMD 30 Yrs data is given in Table 4.5.

Figure 4-1 Isopleths of SO2

Table 4-4 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )

Sulphur Dioxide (µg/m³)

NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline as

per May –

June 2016

Post

Project

Scenario

AQ1 Sonpa Jalilpur WSW 4 0.196 11.1 11.296 80





Page C4-188

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )


NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline as

per May –

June 2016

Post

Project

Scenario

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0.032 14.3 14.332

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0.010 12.5 12.51

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0.0 16.7 16.7

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0.014 15.9 15.914

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.992 11.2 12.192

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.051 16.3 16.351

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0.0142 15.5 15.5142

Table 4-5 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Sulphur Dioxide

Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )


NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline as

per May –

June 2016

Post

Project

Scenario

AQ1 Sonpa Jalilpur WSW 4 0.75 11.1 11.85

80

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0.10 14.3 14.40

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0.96 12.5 13.46

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0.00001 16.7 16.70

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0.00001 15.9 15.90

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.00074 11.2 11.20

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.014 16.3 16.31

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0.014 15.5 15.51

b) Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)

The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs GLC of NO2 will be in the order of 1.417µg/m3 and such

concentrations will occur at a distance of 9Km to 10Km from the stack. The

concentrations were found to get diluted rapidly. The envisaged resultant

concentrations in the down-wind villages (Table 4.6) will be in the range of 14.2µg/m3

to 19.2µg/m3 during the post project scenario, which will be below the prescribed NAAQ

standards. The isopleths of NO2 is given in Figure 4.2.Estimated Post Project Scenario of

Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration as per IMD 30 Yrs data is given in Table 4.7





Page C4-189

Figure 4-2 Isopleths of NO2

Table 4-6 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Nitrogen Dioxide Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )

Nitrogen Dioxide (µg/m³)

NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline

based on

May – June

2016

Post Project

Scenario


80

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0.032 16.0 16.032

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0.010 14.8 14.81

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0.0 19.2 19.2

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0.014 17.5 17.514

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.992 13.2 14.192

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.051 18.7 18.751

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0.0142 17.4 17.4142





Page C4-190

Table 4-7 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Nitrogen Dioxide Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )

Nitrogen Dioxide (µg/m³)

NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline

based on

May – June

2016

Post

Project

Scenario


80

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0.10 16.0 16.10

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0.96 14.8 15.76

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0.00001 19.2 19.20

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0.00001 17.5 17.50

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.00074 13.2 13.20

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.014 18.7 18.71

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0.014 17.4 17.41

c) Particulate Matter (PM)

The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs GLC of PM will be in the order of 0.551µg/m3 and such

concentrations will occur at a distance of 9Km to 10Km from the stack. The

concentrations were found to get diluted rapidly. The envisaged resultant

concentrations in the down-wind villages (Table 4.8) will be in the range of 36.3µg/m3

to 47.3µg/m3 during the post project scenario, which will be below the prescribed NAAQ

standards. The isopleths of PM is given in Figure 4.3. Estimated Post Project Scenario of

Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration as per IMD 30 Yrs data is given in Table 4.9





Page C4-191

Figure 4-3 Isopleths of PM

Table 4-8 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Particulate Matter Concentration (Study period: 17th May to 15th June 2016)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )

Particulate Matter (µg/m³)

NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline

based on May

– June 2016

Post

Project

Scenario


100

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0 42.2 42.2

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0. 42.1 42.1

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0.001 47.3 47.301

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0 44.5 44.5

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.057 36.3 36.357

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.001 46.3 46.301

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0 43.4 43.4





Page C4-192

Table 4-9 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Particulate Matter Concentration (As per IMD 30 Yrs data)

Location Station

Direction

from

Stack

Distance

from

Stack

(in km )

Particulate Matter (µg/m³)

NAAQs

Standards GLCs

Average

Baseline

based on May

– June 2016

Post

Project

Scenario


100

AQ2 Banarpur NW 1.6 0.04 42.2 42.24

AQ3 Sikraul W 1.4 0.37 42.1 42.47

AQ4 Bechanpurva E 1.45 0 47.3 47.30

AQ5 Sarenja SSE 3 0 44.5 44.50

AQ6 Paliya SSW 6.8 0.0002 36.3 36.30

AQ7 Dewasthapur E 8 0.005 46.3 46.31

AQ8 Chausa N 4.2 0.005 43.4 43.41

4.4.2.3. Summary of the Air Quality Modeling Results

Based on the findings of the detailed air quality modelling exercise, it has been inferred

that the resultant cumulative concentration at the nearby villages will comply with the

NAAQ Standards. Insignificant rise in the background ambient air quality levels is

envisaged within the study area. Since there are no ecologically sensitive locations

present in the down-wind direction of the Project site, environmental risks due to

release of emissions from the proposed 2x660MW coal based thermal power plant will

be insignificant. The summary of the predicted GLCs is predicted in Table 4.10.

Table 4-10 Summary of the predicted GLCs and Post Project Scenario

Parameter Baseline (µg/m³)

Predicted GLCs (µg/m³)

Resultant Post Project scenario

(µg/m³)

NAAQs Standard

PM10 36.3 to 47.3 0.0 to 0.057 42.1 to 47.301 100 SO2 11.1 to 16.7 0.0 to 0.992 11.296 to 16.351 80

NOx 13.2 to 19.2 0.0 to 0.992 13.396 to 19.20 80

4.4.2.4. Mitigation Measures for Reduction of Emissions at Source

Particulate Matter Emissions: As per the latest MoEF & CC Notification dated 7th

December 2015, all the new thermal power plants to be commissioned from 1st January

2017 shall achieve the stringent emission levels of 30 mg/Nm3 of particulate matter as

against the current levels of 50 mg/Nm3. In order to meet such stringent standards, high

efficiency electrostatic precipitators (ESP) shall be installed. Table 4.11 shows the

possible peak emission load on the ESPs. Each flue gas line of the boiler will be passed





Page C4-193

through two parallel ESPs with a total four ESPs in the proposed 2x660MW power

plant. In general about 20 to 25% of the fly ash generated from the boiler will be

collected at the economizer and super-heater stages of the boiler, and the remaining 75

to 80% of the fly ash will reach ESPs. However for the purpose of the design of the ESPs,

STPL has considered a peak fly ash load of 85% of total fly ash on the ESP. Typical dust

load on the ESP and envisaged collection efficiencies are presented in Table 4.11.

Figure 4-4 Layout of the ESPs in the proposed 2x660MW Power Plant

Table 4-11 Envisaged Peak Fly Ash Load on the ESPs

Description Units Based on Indian coal (worst case

coal)

Based on Imported

coal

Total fly ash generation in each boiler TPH 174 31

Fly ash collected in economizer and air pre-heater etc

TPH 9 2

Peak fly ash load on the ESPs TPH 165 29

Fly ash load on each ESPs TPH 53 10

Flue gas quantity through each ESP Nm3/hr 19,30,000 19,30,000

Dust concentration - inlet to ESP g/Nm3 27.5 5.2 Dust concentration outlet of ESP (new standards)

g/Nm3 0.03 0.03

ESP efficiency % 99.89 99.42

The electrostatic precipitator design depends on the ash characteristics in terms of

quality and quantity and the gas volume to be treated. It also requires proper sizing and

optimizing the precipitator efficiency for performance. The precipitator performance





Page C4-194

depends on several factors such as specific gas volume and the dust load, gas flow rate,

particle size and size distribution, particle resistivity, gas temperature, collecting plate

and discharge electrode geometry, electrode spacing, current and voltage, and rapping

system and frequency.

4.4.2.5. Installation of Flue Gas Desulphurizing system (FGD) for Sulfur Dioxide

Emissions

The estimated SO2 emissions from a typical 2x660MW unit will be in the order of

~2639mg/Nm3 without any control measures in the flue gas depending on the coal

quality. As per the new power plant emission regulations, SO2 levels in the flue gas shall

be maintained less than 100 mg/Nm3. This means, suitable post combustion control

technologies shall be adopted to achieve at least 96% SO2 reduction efficiency. Flue Gas

Desulphurizing system (FGD) is the technology used for removing sulfur dioxide (SO2)

from the exhaust combustion flue gases of power plants that burn coal or oil to produce

steam for the turbines that drive their electricity generators.

The flue gas after the treating in the ESP will be subjected to scrubbing using lime

solution. Lime and limestone wet FGD systems are the mainstay of SO2 emission control

throughout the world. In the systems, SO2 removal is accomplished by recirculation

anaqueous slurry of lime or limestone in an absorber vessel to affect intimate contact

with the flue gas. Current state-of-the-art systems offer significantly improved

performance compared to the first-generation FGD systems. The largest single

improvement has been the development of sulfite oxidation control. Scale formation in

the early systems tended to occur as the result of uncontrolled crystallization of the

naturally oxidized product calcium sulfate (CaSO4•2H2O [gypsum]) from the

recirculating slurry. The blocky gypsum crystals typically represented 15 to 50 mol % of

the absorbed SO2 and, when intermingled with those of unoxidized calcium

sulfite(CaSO3• 1/2H2O) platelets in the slurry, were responsible for much of the

difficulty in dewatering. For limestone systems, blowing air into the slurry to force

oxidation to near 100% provides seed crystals that minimize scaling, while at the same

time producing more homogeneous slurries that dewater to concentrations in excess of

90% solids. For these reasons, the Limestone Forced Oxidation (LSFO) system has

become the preferred technology worldwide. Boiler manufacturers such as Alsthom,





Page C4-195

Babcock & Wilcox Power Generation Group, Inc etc are supplying such system. Typical

view and flow diagram of FGD systems is given in Figure 4.5 & 4.6.

Source: Babcock & Wilcox Power Generation Group, Inc

Figure 4-5 Typical View of a FGD System

Figure 4-6 Typical Process Flow Diagram of FGD System

4.4.2.6. Mercury abatement as co-benefit of reduction of NOx , SO2 and dust

Mercury is present as trace element in coal. When the coal is burnt in thermal power

plants, the mercury available in coal is released. Once released, the mercury is either





Page C4-196

evaporated in the atmosphere; some part is trapped in pollution control instruments

like electrostatic precipitator, bag etc and the rest goes with the bottom and fly ash. The

small level of mercury can be tolerated without much harmful effects. The new thermal

power plant emissions standards limit the Hg emission from coal based thermal power

plants to 30 µg/Nm3, whereas the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, USA

has suggested a threshold level of 100 µg/Nm3 in the ambient air.

A detailed study undertaken by a research group indicated that the Mercury content in

Indian coals was found to vary between 0.003 and 0.34 mg/Kg with the mean value

being 0.14 mg/Kg. The average mercury concentration in the flue gas at the outlet of

ESP would be in range of 5 and 15 μg/Nm3. Significant portion of mercury present in

feed coal have been found to be associated with fly ash. Speciation of mercury in flue gas

shows that proportion of elemental mercury is much higher than oxidized mercury

(ref)6.

Mercury emissions from coal-fired boilers can be controlled through proposed

measures for removing particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur dioxide (SO2) and Nitrogen

oxides (NOx). The Hg (P) fraction is typically removed by ESP, particulate control

device. The Hg(2+) portion is water soluble and therefore a relatively high percentage

can be captured by wet flue gas desulphurization (FGD) system. The Hg(O) fraction is

generally not captured by proposed air pollution control device.

STPL has proposed to install lime based scrubbing system for the combined control of

SO2 and Mercury emissions. Hence the envisaged Mercury levels in the proposed power

plant will be less than 1 μg/Nm3. Considering a peak gas volume of 19,30,000 Nm3/hr

from each boiler, the estimated controlled Hg emissions from the proposed power plant

will be less than 4 g/hr hour which is insignificant. The predicted ground level

concentration of Hg will be in the order of 0.03 Nano Grams/m3, which is several folds

lower than that of the occupational health standard of 100,000 Nano Grams/m3.

6 Mercury Emissions from Coal Fired Power Plants of India - Case Study, Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad, Jharkhand, International Journal of Energy, Sustainability and Environmental Engineering Vol. 2 (1), September 2015, pp. 21-24,





Page C4-197

4.4.2.7. Radio Activity of Coal

Based on the published information, it is inferred that radioactivity of the Indian coals

Coal, like most materials found in nature, contains trace quantities of naturally

occurring radionuclides, 238U, 232Th and 40K. A typical study by group research

institutions (ref)7 indicated average radon activity was reported to be in the range of

222 to 670 Bqm-3, which is less than that of the values reported in other coals found in

other countries. Another study conducted a research indicated that the average activity

concentrations of 226Ra, 232Th and 40K in feed coal was reported to be in the order of

10.46±5.24, 23.50±10.88 and 232.23±131.94 Bqkg-1 respectively. The study concludes

that the measured values were compared with other literature values. The radium

equivalent activity of Indian coal samples were less than 370 Bqkg-1 and external

hazard indices were less than unity. Therefore, there is no probability of immediate

health effect on workers and public due to natural radioactivity present in coal (ref)8.

4.4.3. Fugitive Coal Dust Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts

Fugitive emissions are defined as irregular and non point source emissions that would

be generated either from process operations or bulk material handling facilities. In the

current scenario, the proposed facility fugitive emissions may be released due to

handling of coal at the coal stock-yard. A dedicated water sprinkling system along with

proper enclosures will be used at the coal handling facilities in order to control the

fugitive dust emissions. Thus the envisaged fugitive coal dust emissions in the facility

will be reduced by 90%.

As a part of this EIA study, an attempt was made to estimate the wind -borne dust

emissions due to storage and handling coal at the stock yard within the plant site.

USEPA Published emission factor guidelines were adopted for estimating coal dust

emissions. The dispersion of the dust particle is dependent on the surface wind velocity

and the total dust emission per ha of the storage area is estimated using the factor 1.8U

7 Measurement of radon activity in fly ash samples from NTPC Dadri, India, Department of Physics, SV(PG) College, Aligarh, Department of Applied Physics, ZH College of Engineering and Tech, Aligarh and others, Indian Journal of Pure and Applied Physics, Vol 48, July 2010 8 Natural Radioactivity of Feed Coal and Its by-products in Barapukuria 2×125 MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant, Dinajpur, Bangladesh, IOSR Journal of Applied Physics (IOSR-JAP), Volume 5, Issue 6 (Jan. 2014), PP 32-38





Page C4-198

Kg/ha/hr (ref)9; where U is the mean wind velocity in m/s. The emission factor for the

typical diameter of 10 microns is derived by the particle size distribution data (ref10)

which is about 10% of the total dust emitted from the coal pile. The following inputs

were considered for estimating the coal dust emissions:

S. No. Particulars Units Value

1 Number of Coal Transfer Wagons Nos. 356 2 Total coal to be handled TPD 20,400 3 Coal Storage Area Sq. m 52500 4 Wind Borne dust from coal Storage areas Kg/Ha/hr 0.00015

5 Emissions due to dust control techniques (90% control)

Kg/Ha/hr 0.000015

6 PM10 emissions as per Particle Size Distribution (10% of total dust emitted)

Kg/Ha/hr 0.0000014

4.4.3.1. Fugitive Dust Modeling Output

By adopting the various fugitive dust control measures ensuring 90% dust emission

reduction, the predicted GLCs of particulate matter due to controlled fugitive dust

emission from coal yard at the facility boundary can be reduced to 35.4µg/m3. It is

inferred from the model output that the dust concentrations at the plant boundary is

not exceeding 10µg/m3. The concentration isopleths is presented in Figure 4.7 and

Figure 4.8. Hence the overall impacts due to fugitive dust emissions from handling coal

will be significantly minimized.

9Emission Factor Development – Western Surface Coal Mining, Chapter 11 10Particle Size Distribution Data and Sized Emission Factors for Selected Sources US-EPA, AP 42 Appendix B.1





Page C4-199

Figure 4-7 Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’S of PM10 due to Controlled Fugitive Dust

Emissions from Coal Stock Yard (Google Image – 5KM radius)

Figure 4-8 Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’S of PM10 due to Controlled Fugitive Dust

Emissions from Coal Stock Yard (Plant Layout)





Page C4-200

4.4.4. Fugitive Dust Control Management

Fugitive emissions from the proposed power project are envisaged from handling and

storage of coal in the stock yard, fly ash handling systems and transfer operations. A

detailed discussion on the coal handling and fly ash handling units are presented in

chapter 2. It can be noted that the bag filter ventilation systems are proposed for the

coal crusher unit, coal transfer units and coal storage silo. Hence major fugitive

emissions are envisaged from wind borne dust in the coal storage area, especially

during the unloading and load operations and open high wind erosion. The predicted

ground level concentrations due to fugitive coal dust emissions from the storage area

and handling area were reported to be about 5 µg/m3 at power plant boundary. Water

sprinklers will be installed to achieve a minimum discharge of about 15 m3/acre/hr to

maintain the moisture content of the top layer coal in the order of 20%. Treated cooling

water blow down will be used for coal dust suppression. The rate of water application of

the sprinklers will be equivalent to that of the evaporation loss and certain amount of

absorption on to the coal for further processing. Water sprinklers will be available in

the range of 25 to 50m radius of influence with a water flow rate of 3 to 20 liters/sec

with a working pressure of 4 to 6 bar. Selection of the sprinkler type and number of

sprinklers will be decided based on the coal yard layout. Typical sprinkler arrangement

is shown in Figure 4.9 and Figure 4.10.

Figure 4-9 Coal Dust Suppression Sprinklers Arrangements





Page C4-201

Figure 4-10 Typical View of Dust Suppression Sprinklers

(for Illustration Only)

4.4.5. Traffic related Impacts

The impacts due to the proposed thermal power plant related traffic movement such as

heavy duty trucks carrying Coal and Fly Ash were identified based on Passenger Car

Unit (PCU) factor. The PCU factors considered for this study were referred from the

Journal of Indian Roads Congress (IRC), 65(1), September 2004 (ref11). The total

incremental rise in the prevailing PCU’s volume due to the proposed vehicular

movement from the power plant is estimated and shown in Table 4.12.

Table 4-12 Proposed Vehicular Movement in Terms of PCU’s per Day

Type of Vehicles

Number of Vehicles per

day (one way)

Number of Vehicles per day

(Round Trip)

PCU – Conversion Factor (ref)4

(considering the road with 0%

gradient)

Total Volume in PCU’s/day

Fly Ash trucks with a capacity of 10Tons

530 1060 3.1 3286

Other material trucks with a capacity of 20 Tons 50 100 3.1 310

Passenger cars 100 200 1.0 200

Total vehicle movement in the Proposed service road

680 1360 3.1 3796

As per the proposed vehicular moment, only Passenger trucks, Fly Ash trucks and

passenger cars are envisaged. It can be inferred from the Table 3.6 that the total

vehicular movement due to the proposed project will be about 1360vehicles/day (to

11Satish Chandra, “Capacity Estimation Procedure for two -lane roads under mixed traffic conditions”, Journal of Indian Roads Congress, 65(1), September 2004, pp. 139 – 171.





Page C4-202

and fro). The corresponding PCU’s is estimated to be 3796/day (158 PCU’s/hr). As per

IRC: 64-1990, the design service volume for a two-lane rural road in plain terrain is

about 2400-3000 PCUs/hr. Hence the impact of additional traffic moment due to the

proposed power plant is insignificant.

4.5. Noise Levels and Impacts

4.5.1. Impact Assessment

The major noise emitting sources from the proposed coal based Thermal Power Plant is

presented in Table 4.13. Low noise generating equipment will be considered for the

project wherever applicable as per the recommended standards and guidelines. Some of

the major noise generating equipment will be housed inside the room with an average

wall thickness of 230 mm to attenuate noise emissions. According to the Noise Control

Handbook (ref12), a 230 mm brick wall will provide a noise reduction level of about 20

dB(A) across the wall. Considering such a reduction, the overall noise levels outside the

power Boiler will comply with work-zone and industrial noise level standards.

Table 4-13 Envisaged Equipment Noise Levels (Sound Pressure Levels)

Equipment Noise Levels in dB(A)

Steam turbine - outside the room 80

Boiler feed pumps 85

Boiler FD fans 85

Coal pulverizer etc 85

Boiler ID fans 85

Natural draft Cooling towers 75

According to the environmental regulations, industrial facilities should adopt sound

noise abatement and control program to meet the following criteria. Sound pressure

levels at the property boundary should be less than 55 dB(A) during daytime hours and

45 dB(A) during night time hours. Noise levels near the work-zone areas should comply

with a maximum permissible level of 85 dB(A). As a part of this EIA study, a detailed

noise propagation modeling was undertaken to establish the abated noise levels at the

facility boundary. Noise propagation from the above mentioned equipment and process

units have been modeled based on the international outdoor noise propagation

standards.

12 7: Acoustics and Noise Control Handbook for Architects and Builders, Leland K. Irvine Roy L. Richards





Page C4-203

ISO 9613-1:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors- Part 1:

Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere

ISO 9613-2:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors- Part 2:

General method of calculation

Noise propagation software model, Noise Sim Version 2.1 has been used for estimating

the sound pressure levels due to cumulative dispersion of noise emissions from all the

designated sources. The primary inputs required for the noise propagation modelling

are equipment noise Power Levels (Lw-dB), coordinates of the noise emitting sources,

acoustical characteristics of the walls and barriers etc, if any, and environmental

parameters such as relative humidity, wind speed, ambient temperature and typical

terrain characteristics.

Paved concrete surface has been considered in the present scenario to represent

maximum ground reflection. Noise source radiates power P and this result in a sound

pressure p. Sound power is the cause – Sound pressure is the effect. Sound Power is a

measure of total energy per unit time emitted by the source in all directions. Sound

pressure is a measure of the pressure at the receiver’s location. Sound Pressure is

dependent on the acoustic environment, which is generally referred to as acoustic

impendence (c).

The factors involved include the effects of nearby reflecting surfaces, receiver distance,

type of space, the amount and location of absorption in the space, the location in the

space, the presence of barriers, and the intrusion of ambient sounds. The relationship

between Sound Pressure Level (Lp) and Equipment Sound Power Level (Lw) can

express in the following equation. Both Lp and Lw are expressed as dB.

Lp : Sound Pressure Level

Lw : Sound Power Level

r : Distance from the equipment at which the Lp is measured (generally 1m)

Wref : Reference power level (10-12 watts)

41020 21010

ref

ref

P

cWLogrLogLwLp





Page C4-204

Pref : Reference pressure level (2x10-5 N/m2)

c : Acoustic impedance (rays)

Predicted sound pressure levels due to the proposed power plant operation are

presented in Figure 4.11. It can be inferred from the modeled data that the sound

pressure levels at the facility boundary will below 55 dB(A), which is well within the

stipulated threshold noise level of 75 dB(A) for industrial areas. Noise levels outside the

facility boundary will be further attenuated due to the proposed green belt all along the

plant boundary.

Figure 4-11 Predicted Noise Levels due to the Proposed Power Plant Operation

4.5.2. Mitigation Measures for Noise

4.5.2.1. Equipment Noise

To achieve the noise limitations around the equipment, the main measures taken shall

be as follows:

Each feed water pump sets shall be covered by a separate enclosure,

Each coal crusher shall be covered by a separate hood, small units like

condensate and vacuum pumps, shall be designed so as to limit noise emission,

Bypass valve, the de-superheater and the relevant piping shall be covered with

acoustic insulation.





Page C4-205

During maintenance/inspection works, the personnel will wear ear protections.

4.5.2.2. Far Field Noise

To achieve the far field noise limitations, the following main measures shall be taken, as

appropriate for that purpose:

Low noise fans may be considered to ensure that the overall noise levels should

not exceed a level of 85 dB(A) at 1m from the Cooling tower area

Steam turbines will be housed in a dedicated room with walls with Noise

Reduction Rate of 45 dB(A) so that the noise levels outside the room can be

maintained below 75 dB(A).

The steam generator draught fans, the electrostatic precipitators and the air

heaters will be designed to limit noise emission,

Steam vent pipes will be fitted with silencers,

Noise levels will be periodically monitored and necessary steps for reduction of

noise levels will be taken up.

Lining of chutes in coal handling plant for noise absorption.

Use of personal protective devices i.e., earmuffs and earplugs by workers,

working in high noise activity centre.

4.6. Water Environment

4.6.1. Impact

No ground water source will be tapped for meeting the water requirements during

operation of proposed plant. The water requirement of the project will be met from

River (Ganges) which is very near to the proposed project site. Detailed water drawl

study has been undertaken inorder to confirm the availability of requisite quantity of

make-up water for the proposed project and to suggest most suitable location of intake

considering its suitability for continuous drawl of water for 25 years at minimum water

level, maximum water level of river at intake location.

The river Ganga caries 94.0 cumec as absolute minimum discharge and 23.00 cumec as

90% dependable minimum discharge which is sufficient as compared to water

requirement of the proposed project.





Page C4-206

The river flows along its right bank during lean season and the proposed thermal power

project is also located on the right bank. So, it is an ideal condition for provision of

intake structure and its access. Since the deep channel of the river is very close to its

right bank, single well type intake structure has been considered suitable for lifting

water from the river to supply to project.

The estimated cooling water requirement for the plant, (Fire fighting system, ash

handling system, service water system, general use, staff colony, etc.,) will be in the

order of 3265m3/hr, which is meeting the stipulated water consumption limit of 2.5

m3/MW suggested in the MOEF&CC standards.

The proposed power plant will completely treat and reuse the wastewater from the

power plant. About 720 m3/day of wastewater from various sources will be reused in

the facility for make-up water requirements. About 70 m3/hr (~1700 m3/day) sewage

will be treated in a dedicated sewage treatment plant and will be used for greenbelt,

plantation and horticulture applications within the facility. Therefore the proposed

facility will not discharge any wastewater into natural water bodies. In order to achieve

a sustainable wastewater recycling program, a dedicated RO module has been

considered for reusing the treated wastewater for cooling tower make up requirements.

The Cooling Tower Blow Down will be used for coal handling dust suppression, ash

slurry system and gardening purposes. The cooling water system will comprise of

Natural draft counter flow type cooling towers with cooling tower basin, circulating

water pumps and cooling water piping. Closed Cooling Water system (DM Cooling

water) for turbine and steam generator auxiliaries will consists of 3x50% capacity plate

type heat exchanger out of which two will be working and one will be standby and

3x50% capacity auxiliary cooling water pumps will be utilized. The entire plant water

requirements will be met from the river water. The water balance of the power plant is

given in Annexure 7.

4.6.1.1. Mitigation Measures

The source of water for the project would be river water. River water is required for

make-up to the closed cycle re-circulation system of condenser cooling. Water for

process, service and drinking will be treated water. It is envisaged to utilize cooling





Page C4-207

water blow down and treated wastewater from various sources for ash handling and

coal handling purposes.

The meandering and bank erosion being as natural phenomenon in an alluvial river, anti

erosion measures will be taken. To protect the pump house and the bank slopes it is

proposed to provide 15mx1.5m boulder launching apron in wire crates.

The following measures will be taken up:

River water for condenser cooling water system make-up will be drawn for the

river through a suitable intake and pumping arrangement without affecting

aquatic life.

The water demand in the existing facility will be maintained as low as 2.5

m3/MWHR as against the current nation’s average of 4 m3/MWHR. This will be

achieved by reducing increasing the cycles of concentration in the cooling towers

and also utilization of the cooling tower blow-down water for bottom ash

quenching and ash disposal to ash pond area.

Based on the long term Ganga River water quality data published by Bihar Envis

Centre, it noted that the TDS, hardness and silica levels in the river water in the

Bihar region was found to vary between 150 to 300 mg/l, 90 to 150 mg/l and

less than 10 mg/l respectively. The values were found to vary with season. Based

on this information, it has been estimated that the facility will be able to achieve

about 5, 4 and 8 cycles of concentration in the cooling tower based on the TDS,

Hardness and silica levels in the intake water quality. In order to achieve a

minimum of 5 cycles of concentrations, a suitable Reverse Osmosis (RO) based

system for the treating the feed water reduce the TDS and hardness load on the

cooling towers. By maintaining the feed water TDS to the level less than 100ppm,

the cycles of concentration can be increased to as high as 8 thereby reducing the

blow down quantities by two folds. This will help to achieve the new power plant

standards of 2.5 m3/MWHR of fresh water demand for power plants.

Installation of RO plants also will help to reduce the use of acid and alkali use at

the DM plants and thereby reduction of TDS loads on the wastewater treatment

facilities. The opportunities for recycling of treated wastewater from the power

plant will enhance significantly.





Page C4-208

4.6.2. Wastewater Treatment

Waste Water Treatment system envisaged will cover all the plant waste water which

are to be disposed. Wastewater collected from other sources (cooling water system,

plant services, boiler blow down, washing area run-off and sanitary wastewater etc)

will be treated in a dedicated ETP (neutralization and clari-floculator) and will be

collected in a central monitoring basin with a 24 hours holding capacity.

The wastewater generated from the plant will be treated in an Effluent Treatment Plant

(ETP) to comply with the norms of CPCB.

It has been estimated that about 600 m3/hr of cooling tower town blow down will be

used as make up water for bottom ash handling and wet fly ash transport during the

emergency operations, FGD and fly ash conditioning. This waster will be subjected

evaporation in the evaporation pond.

RO system for ZERO discharge concept: Reverse Osmosis (RO) plant is proposed

to produce 200 to 300 m3/hr permeate. Cooling tower blow down (CTBD) water shall

be used as feed water to RO plant. The purpose of RO system is to remove the dissolved

solids from the water to produce specified quantity of CW make up. Reject water from

RO trains shall be led to CHP dust suppression tank.

A dedicated sewage treatment plant will be constructed to treat the sewage generated

from the colony and also main plant and the treated sewage will be utilized for

greenbelt development and horticulture applications within the plant. The proposed

STP will be designed to meet the new discharge standards (BOD: 20 mg/l and COD: 150

mg/l).

There are no significant adverse impacts identified on water resources and wastewater

and drainage.

4.7. Flood Risk Impact

4.7.1. Flood Scenario at the Project Site and Risk Mitigation Measures

Flood in the Bihar state are a common phenomenon since ancient times. Southern part

of Bihar (including Buxar district), on the other hand, is drained by rivers that are

largely rainfed, having their origins either in the Vindhyachal Hills or in the Hills of

Chotanagpur and Rajmahal. These rivers are either dry or have scanty discharges in





Page C4-209

non-monsoon months. Karmanasa, Sone, Punpun, Kiul, Badua, Chandan are the

important rivers of this region. It can be observed from Figure 4.12 that the land

parcels along the Ganga River and Karmasa River experience floods.

Figure 4-12 Flood Map of Bihar State (ref)13

Based on the long term data published by the Bihar state water resource department

and also the research report of IIT Roorkee indicated that the flooding in the study

area occurs due to backwater effect of River Ganga flood in Karamnasa. Frequency

analysis is carried out using the annual maximum water levels for 52 years (for the

period 1962 to 2013) provided by Central Water Commission for the gauging site at

Buxar. The estimated 25 year, 50 year, 100 year and 1000 year return period flood

levels at Buxar as per the Gumbel Distribution method would be in the order of 61.4m,

61.8m, 62.1m and 63.3m respectively. The contour map of the site indicated that the

height of the site was found to vary between 56.5m to 66.5m. Typical elevation of the

project site is shown in Table 4.14 and Figure 4.13& 15

13 http://disastermgmt.bih.nic.in/Map/images/FloodZoneBig.gif

http://disastermgmt.bih.nic.in/Map/images/FloodZoneBig.gif





Page C4-210

Table 4-14 Elevation at the Project Site

Plant Component Highest Elevation (m) Lowest Elevation (m) Main plant area 66.5 56.5 Ash pond area 63.5 57 Greenbelt area 66 56.5

Total plant area 66.5 56.5 As per the recommendations of the site specific hydrological studies undertaken by IIT

Rookee, the following flood control program will be adopted during the detailed

engineering and construction phases of the project.

The formation level of the project site is proposed to be raised to a level of 64m. It has

been estimated that 5.9 million cubic meters (9 Million Tons) of earth would be

required for raising the formation level of the site. The required earth will be sourced

from land/ borrow pits from the nearby areas. The use of river bed silt material for

filling may be explored. As far as possible construction debris from public works

department and over burden and tailing from the nearest coal and other mines will be

utilized for raising formation level during the construction phase. As an innovation

method, use of compacted fly ash from the nearest NTPC thermal power plant also will

be explored.

The Budhanala/ drain which dry throughout the year except rainy season passes

thorugh the project area. The Budhanala shall be realigned along plant boundary with

adequate capacity to carry storm/ rain water. The net effect of the changes in land use,

land cover, and topography in the project area shall be such that the drainage of

storm rainfall in post-project condition will be the same as in pre-project condition.

Therefore, during post-project condition also, external flooding in the project area due

to storm rainfall in catchment is not expected as adequate capacity of realigned

Budhanala shall be maintained.

4.8. Solid Waste Management (Fly Ash Disposal)

The proposed power plant will adopt a dry fly ash handling operations and hence the

impacts from due to ash pond water related aspects will be eliminated. Bottom ash

(which is a clinker type) will be disposed to ash pond. Out of the total 2.74 MTPA of ash

generation, the quantity of bottom ash will be in the order of 0.44 MTPA and the fly ash

quantity will be in the order of 2.3 MTPA. As per the applicable guidelines, the facility





Page C4-211

has targeted to utilize 50% of the total fly ash generated during the first year of

operation, 75% during 2nd year of operation and 100% utilization end of the third year

of operation. The unutilized fly ash during the first two years (~1.75 MTPA) will be

stored at a dedicated location in the ash pond and the same will be further disposed to

various agencies from 4th year onwards. Fly ash generation and year wise action plan

has been presented in Table 4.15 (Indian coal scenario) and Table 4.16 (Imported coal

scenario).

STPL intends to utilize imported coal during the first few years of operation until the

allocated coal block is made available for commercial production. Also imported coal

will be used to offset any coal supply from the indigenous sources during the

operational period. Hence the fly ash generation from the proposed facility during the

first few years will be based on imported coal (0.9 Million tons per year). However the

ash pond will be designed based on the worst case scenario.

Table 4-15 Fly ash Utilization Plan Based on Indian coal

Description Units Fly ash generation (90%PLF) - 85% of

the total ash

Fly ash disposal

to the user

Fly ash disposal to pond

1st Year (At 50% of fly ash generated to be disposed end of 1st year) MTPA

2.30 1.15 1.15

2nd Year (At 75% of fly ash generated to be disposed from the end of 2nd year) MTPA

2.30 1.7 0.6

3rd Year (100% fly ash generated to be disposed from end of 3rd year onwards) MTPA

2.30 2.3 0.00

Unutilized fly ash in 1st and 2nd year will be disposed in from 4th year to 9th year MTPA

1.75

4th Year MTPA 2.30 2.65 0





10th Year MTPA 2.30 2.30 0





Page C4-212

Table 4-16 Fly ash Utilization Plan Based on Imported Coal

Description Units

Fly ash generation

(90%PLF) - 90% of the total ash

Fly ash disposal to

the user

Fly ash disposal to

pond

1st Year (At 50% of fly ash generated to be disposed end of 1st year)

MTPA 0.40 0.20 0.20

2nd Year (At 75% of fly ash generated to be disposed from the end of 2nd year)

MTPA 0.40 0.30 0.10

3rd Year (100% fly ash generated to be disposed from end of 3rd year onwards)

MTPA 0.40 0.40 0

Unutilized fly ash in 1st and 2nd year will be disposed in from 4th year to 9th year

0.30

4th Year MTPA 0.40 0.46 0 5th Year MTPA 0.40 0.46 0

7th Year MTPA 0.40 0.46 0 8th Year MTPA 0.40 0.46 0

9th Year MTPA 0.40 0.46 0 10th year onwards MTPA 0.40 0.40 0

4.8.1.1. Heavy Metals in Coal and Fly ash

Based on the data published the Committee Constituted by Hon'ble National Green

Tribunal, Principal Bench, New Delhi (ref)14, the concentration of the heavy metals in the

fly ash collected from various coal based thermal power plants in western and central

part of India are reported to be in the following order: Cr from below detectable limit to

0.3 mg/Kg, Cd: 4 to 37 mg/Kg, Pb: 12 to 1800 mg/kg, Co: 0.5 to 5 mg/Kg, Mn: 11 to 1300

mg/Kg, Cu: 21 to 305 mg/Kg, Zn: 3.5 to 156 mg/Kg, Ni: 3 to 23 mg/Kg, As: 9 to 29 mg/Kg.

Considering ash content in coal as 40% w/w, the corresponding heavy metal

concentrations in the coal will be in the following order: Cr from below detectable limit

to 0.1 mg/Kg, Cd: 1.5 to 10 mg/Kg, Pb: 4 to 600 mg/kg, Co: 0.15 to 1.5 mg/Kg, Mn: 4 to

400 mg/Kg, Cu: 7 to 100 mg/Kg, Zn: 1 to 50 mg/Kg, Ni: 1to 7 mg/Kg, As: 3 to 10 mg/Kg.

Leaching is the most likely path by which coal ash constituents would become mobile

environmental contaminants. The quantity of elements that will be available for

14 Report of the Committee Constituted by Hon'ble Nat ional Green Tribunal, Principal Bench, New Delhi in the Case No. 667/2014 arising out of O.A. No. 102/2014, M/s. Sandplast India Pvt. Ltd., Vs. MoEF and Others. http://cpcb.nic.in/NGT-Report-15-01-2015.pdf

http://cpcb.nic.in/NGT-Report-15-01-2015.pdf





Page C4-213

leaching in an aqueous media will depend on the fixation of these elements on the ash

particles and pH of the ash aqueous medium. In addition to this the other factors

influencing leaching include ash source and leaching time. In general, under acidic

conditions the rate and quantity of leaching is higher. Certain studies reveal that for

most of the elements present in coal ash, a significant fraction, ranging from 8% in case

of Ni to 17% in case of Cr is able to leach (Ref)15. Since the proposed power plant will be

adopting dry fly ash handling facilities, the possibility of leaching in to soil and

environment is not envisaged in the current scenario. Fly ash contains CaO (0.5 to

28%w/w), SiO2 (28 to 60%), Al2O3 (5 to 33%), Fe2O3 (1 to 25%), MgO (0.5 to 8%), Na2O

(0.2 to 6%), K2O (1 to 7%), SO3 (0.5 to 3%). Fly Ash has a potential in agriculture and

related applications. The Indian Fly Ash is alkaline and as such improves soil quality.

Fly Ash consists of all elements present in soil except organic carbon and nitrogen. Few

research studies confirmed that use of about 10 Tons of fly ash per hectare has helped

to reduce the use of chemical fertilizers to the tune of 50% while achieving 20%

increase in yield of the food grain (Ref)16.

4.8.2. Ash Disposal Area

For ash disposal from Buxar TPP (2X660MW) plant, about 282 acres of land is

identified. The proposed land is located adjacent to railway siding facility. The ground

levels on proposed land are undulating. The ash disposal area is planned in an area of

about 252 acres. Balance 30 acres of land will be occupied by Over Flow Lagoon,

Sedimentation Basin & associated dykes, ash slurry pipe line corridor, maintenance

road etc along the periphery of the dyke and recirculation system facilities.

The max height of outer dyke will be about 8.0m and will be constructed on existing

ground along the periphery of the ash pond area (In two phases: in first phase, 4.0m

high dyke will be constructed using earth as main construction material & after this

dyke is filled upto freeboard level, in phase-II, 4.0m high raising will be done using pond

ash). Since fly ash can act as impervious liner, therefore no liner is required for the ash

15 Querol, X., Pares, J. M., Plana, F., Fernandez-Turiel, J. L. and Lopez,A. 1993. Fly ash content and distribution in lake sediments around a large power station: inference formmagnetic susceptibility analysis. Environmental Geochemistry and Health, 15(4): 9-18. 16 Disposal and Utilization of Fly Ash to Protect the Environment, International Journal of Innovative Research in Science, Engineering and Technology, (An ISO 3297: 2007 Certified Organization), Vol. 2, Issue 10, October2013





Page C4-214

pond. Only bottom ash lagoon shall be lined with impervious liner. Further, to start with

only about 30 acres of land in one of the bottom ash lagoon will be provided with

impervious liner and balance part of the bottom ash lagoon shall be lined by spreading

high concentrated fly ash during initial stage of slurry disposal. This will act as liner.

Provision for the extension of pipes from ash pond to Bottom ash lagoon shall be kept

during the initial phase of the ash disposal.

To avoid fugitive ash dust emission and for promoting vegetation cover, the final ash

surface will be covered with 300 mm thick earth cover.


4.9.1. Impact on flora

The initial construction works at the project site involves land clearance. During

construction activities vegetation may be disturbed which can be considered

insignificant. Greenbelt will be developed during construction to improve the aesthetic

value in the area and to screen out the fugitive dust generated during construction. The

removal of vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil generally cau ses soil

erosion. However, such impacts will be confined to the project site and will be

minimized through paving and water sprinkling. The option of transplantation of trees

will also be studied to save the existing matured trees and replant them in the area

earmarked for greenbelt development.

Due to the present developmental activity, the number of trees, shrubs, herbs and grass

species that are going to be removed are very few as it is an agricultural land. Proper

care has to be taken during gaseous and liquid emissions by the industry.

4.9.2. Impacts on fauna

The project site does not overlap with any of the recognized Ramsar sites. The

construction phase does not envisaged excavation or alteration in water bodies hence

shall not entail changes in aquatic biodiversity. The construction does not involve

diversion or change in the major rivers, canals, backwaters and creeks.





Page C4-215

4.9.3. Impact –Mitigation matrix

Based on our observation, literature review and consultation with local people, NGO

and forest department, we formulated following impact vs mitigation matrix. It is

advised that company shall follow the suggestions provided in the following Table 4.17.

Table 4-17 Impact Vs Mitigation Matrix

Issues Risk Reason/Status in relation to

project site Suggestions

Rare/Endangered high Rare/Endangered species of any wildlife present in project site

Conservation plan given

Threatened / Near Threatened

moderate One Near Threatened Species is present

Conservation plan given

Endemic Species Low No endemic species of any wildlife present in project site

Nil

Vulnerable species Low Cyprinus carpio is very common fish present in this region but under Vulnerable category by IUCN.

Nil

Protected Areas Low No protected area present in close vicinity

Nil

Important Bird Migratory Path

Low No Important Bird Area are present in core or buffer area

Ramsar site Low No Ramsar sites present in the study area.

Nil

Wetlands of National Importance

Low located at more than 4 km distances Nil

Wetlands of International Importance

Low No wetlands of international importance present

Nil

Wildlife Corridors Low

No notified or officially identified wildlife corridor present in and around project site, Migratory birds activities in winter may be high due to number of water bodies and forest patches present in buffer area

Ensure no power lines constructed close to villages and water body areas.

Forest low Nil Nil





Page C4-216

Issues Risk Reason/Status in relation to

project site Suggestions

Water bodies Low No notified wetlands are present in close vicinity.

Ensure no material /discharge flow through nearby drainage in water bodies/ of project area. Regularly monitor water bodies water quality

Breeding/ nesting areas

Med Nil Nil

Impact of gaseous emissions on nearby agricultural, flora and fauna, human habitations, aquatic ecosystems

Low No RFs are present within 10 sq km area

Green belt development with 1500 tree species within the core area and other large trees near villages along with source reduction controlling measures.

4.10. Socio economic Aspects

4.10.1. Impacts

The proposed project is a Green Field project. The proposed project will be developed

as per the said plant layout and there will not be any loss to public properties such as

roads, canals or any public infrastructures.

According to Sec. 4 and 4.1 of ‘National Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy (NRRP)

2007’, doesn’t attract Rehabilitation and Resettlement activities for the proposed

project, as the proposed project site doesn’t displace any human settlement or any

public properties such as roads, Public utilities, Government buildings etc .Due to the

proposed project there will be number of beneficial impacts in the local area such as,

Increased direct and indirect employment opportunities for local

residents.

Development of local infrastructures such as roads, communication access,

Appreciation in the land value,

Increased volume of local business in the area

Increased business opportunities for local residence in various ancillary

industries such as transportation etc.





Page C4-217

During operation phase there will not be major adverse impact on the local people.

Resultant predicted SO2, NOx and PM emissions are well within the

National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) in the study area.

The resultant pollution levels due to proposed project will be well within

the limits of NAAQS, hence significant impacts are not envisaged.

4.10.2. Mitigation Measures

Preference to eligible local youths for employment opportunities in the

proposed project.

Socioeconomic development programs will be implemented in the area

under Corporate Social Responsibility programs by the plant during the

operation phase.

Development of social infrastructure by various CSR activities.

The CSR Programs undertaken will be focused on the livelihood

empowerment, Health promotion, Education promotion, Infrastructure

development programs, etc.





Page C5-218

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1. Site Identification and Selection

Bihar State Electricity Board (BSEB) through their project consultant i.e., BPIC (Bihar

Power Infrastructure Company) has taken an initiative to identify various sites in the

State of Bihar for locating the project. A total of 20 sites had been identified jointly by

BSEB and BPIC during the initial conceptual stage of the project in 2007-2008. The

sites have been grouped by considering various aspects such as the surrounding

features and the region wise; the four alternative sites are finalized for this project.

Further, the following factors have been considered for selecting suitable site:

a. Availability of adequate water without affecting the ground water regime

b. Availability of adequate land minimum relocation / R&R issues

c. Suitability of land from topography and geological aspects

d. Proximity of National Highways, transport of fuel & heavy equipments

e. Comparatively less land acquisition for development

f. Nearness to the existing railway lines available for coal storage yard

g. Facility for interconnection with transmission system for evacuation of power.

h. Various Environmental aspects

A comparative table has been prepared showing the key characteristics of the identified

4 sites are presented in Table 5.1

a. The Government of Bihar has completed the land acquisition of the current

project site (Chausa) for which the necessary compensation has been disbursed

to the 95% land owners.

b. The selected site Chausa, District Buxar, Bihar is located near to the River Ganga,

hence adequate water is available for the project.

c. The site is comparatively closer to coal mines.

d. The fuel can be transported to the plant directly through railway wagons from

the coal mines.

e. The site has better accessibility; it is located nearer to the highway and railway

lines. All infrastructural facilities like access road, railhead, clear means of

receiving coal, etc., are available nearby the site.





Page C5-219

The above criteria were considered in identifying the best suitable site and the

current project site at Chausa, District Buxar, Bihar was considered for developing

the proposed project. The current site details were presented in the MoEF&CC EAC

meeting in 2008 and 2016 and the necessary TOR was accorded accordingly.

Table 5-1: Alternative Sites Evaluated

Particulars

Proposed site (site selected)

Alternate sites considered

Chausa Bhinta Motipur Methawala

District Buxar Patna Muzzafarpur Saran

Source of water availability

River Ganges River Ganges River Ganges River Ganges

Distance of water source

3 km 7 km Within 500 6-7 km

Past history of floods None None Flood prone Flood prone

Land use Fallow Land and partly single crop

Double crop Double crop Double crop

Location of national parks / sanctuaries

None None None None

Location of archaeological monuments

None None None None

Location of reserve forest

None None None None

Location of Defence installation

None 3-4 kms None None




Chapter 6-Environmnetal Monitoring Program

Page C6-220

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1. Preamble

An Environmental Monitoring Plan provides feedback about the difference between

existing environmental scenario and the impacts due to project on the environment and

helps to judge the adequacy of the mitigation measures in protecting the environment.

The purpose of environmental monitoring is to evaluate the effectiveness of

implementation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) by periodically monitoring

the important environmental parameters within the impact area, so that any adverse

effects are detected and timely action can be taken.

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters is of immense importance to assess

the status of environment during plant operation. With the knowledge of baseline

conditions, the monitoring program will serve as an indicator for any deterioration in

environmental conditions due to operation of the project, to enable taking up suitable

mitigation steps in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as important as

that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can be determined

only by efficient monitoring.

6.2. Objectives of Environmental Monitoring Plan

The basic objective of Environment Monitoring Program is:

To ensure implementation of mitigation measures during project

implementation

To provide feedback to the decision makers about the effectiveness of their

actions

To determine the project’s actual environmental impacts so that modifications

can be made to mitigate the impacts

To identify the need for enforcement action before irreversible environmental

damage occurs

To provide scientific information about the response of an ecosystem to a given

set of human activities and mitigation measures





Page C6-221

6.3. Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Monitoring shall ensure that commitments are being met. This may take the form of

direct measurement and recording quantitative information, such as concentrations of

discharge, emissions and wastes, for measurement against corporate or statutory

standards, consent limits or targets. It may also require measurement of ambient

environmental quality in the vicinity of a site using ecological/biological, physical and

chemical indicators. Monitoring may include socio-economic interaction, through local

liaison activities or even assessment of complaints.

6.3.1. Monitoring Schedule

As per the guidelines of MoEF&CC, environmental monitoring shall be required during

construction and operational phases. Environmental monitoring schedules are

prepared covering various phases of project advancement, such as construction phase

and regular operational phase.

The schedule for monitoring ambient air quality, ambient noise quality, ground

water quality, and waste water quality both during the construction and operation

phases of the project is given in Table 6.1 and Table 6.2

6.3.2. Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase

The construction activities require mobilization of construction material and

equipment. The environmental monitoring that needs to be undertaken during project

construction phase is given in Table 6.1.

Table 6-1 Environmental Monitoring during Project Construction Phase

Environmental Component

Monitoring Type Monitoring

Location Monitoring Frequency

Internal Reporting Frequency

Air Environment

AAQ monitoring – 4 parameters - PM10, PM2.5, NO2 and SO2

2 locations (upstream and downstream)

24 hrs sampling, once in a month

Monthly

Water Environment

Portable water analysis Parameters- pH, TSS, BOD, COD

Labour colony-

once in a month during the construction period

Monthly

Inlet & outlet wastewater Parameters- pH, TSS, BOD, COD

Labour colony-

once in a month during the construction period

Monthly





Page C6-222

Noise Environment

Equivalent Noise levels dB(A)

Site boundaries

Monthly Incident Reporting

when necessary

Flora and Fauna Status of green belt Site Monthly Monthly

6.3.3. Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase

The following monitoring program will be implemented for the proposed Green Field

Project based on baseline data compliances for environmental clearance conditions and

regular permits from SPCB/MoEF&CC.

Table 6-2 Environmental Monitoring Programs during Operation Phase

Environmental Component

Monitoring Type Monitoring

Location

Monitoring/ recording Frequency

Air Environment On-line Measurement of PM, SO2

and NOx Stack

Continuous

Emission testing by external MOEF&CC approved testing agency

Stack Half yearly basis

AAQ- Parameter as per NAAQS standards

Four locations Continuous

Meteorological station At site Hourly basis

AAQ- Parameter as per NAAQS standards

Ash pond Continuous

Noise Environment

Noise Level Measurement At site Monthly

Noise Level Measurement At equipment location

Half-yearly

Noise Level measurement At plant boundary Monthly Water Environment

Influent and treated wastewater for pH, TSS, BOD, COD, Oil and grease, Copepr, Iron, Zinc, Chromium, Phosphate, ,

At site lab

Continuos

Log book

At treated waste recycling areas including green-cover

Daily

Portable water analysis Parameters- pH, TSS, BOD, COD

Township Monthly

Influent and treated wastewater for pH, TSS, BOD, COD

Township Monthly

Flora and Fauna Monitoring of green cover development

Treated wastewater reuse areas

Quarterly

Monitoring of test wells near the ash storage area

Near ETP and treated wastewater utilisation areas

Half yearly





Page C6-223

Solid & Hazardous Waste

Inventory Plant Monthly

6.4. Data Analysis

The monitored data will be analyzed and compared with the baseline levels as

established in the EIA study and the regulatory standards specified by different

government agencies. The standards against which the different environment

components will be compared are as per Table 6.3.

Table 6-3 Recommended Environmental Monitoring Plan

S. No Component Applicable Standards

1 Ambient Air Quality National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), Central Pollution Control Board, Bihar State Pollution Control Board (BSPCB)

2 Noise Quality Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise, CPCB

3 Surface Water Quality IS:2296: Class ‘C’ Water, CPCB

4 Groundwater Quality IS: 10500 Standards, BIS 5 Soil Quality --

6 Treated wastewater

IS 2490 (1974) – Discharge into Sea, IS 3306(1974) – Discharge on land, IS 3307(1974) - Discharge for agricultural use Bihar State Pollution Control Board (BSPCB)

6.4.1. Reporting Schedule

The monitoring results of the different environmental components will be analyzed and

compiled report will be sent to concerned authorities every six months. BOD, COD, PM 10,

PM2.5, TSS, SOx, NOx will be online and logged on to SPCB / CPCB web portals. The

report will also list the project activities along with the environmental mitigation

measures and will evaluate the efficacy of the Environmental Management Plan.




Chapter 7-Additional Studies

Page C7-224

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

This chapter describes the public consultation, risk assessment and disaster

management plan, Fire Safety Systems and Occupational Health and Safety and

Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan.

7.1. Public Consultation

As per the EIA Notification, the Bihar Sate Pollution Control Board issued the

Notification regarding public hearing in the local news papers namely, Times of India,

Hindustan & Prabhaat Khabar on 4th September 2016. The public hearing was held on

4th October 2016 at the Town Hall, Buxar which was accessible to all the concerned

people and stake holders of the project. All persons including bonafide residents,

Environmental Groups and others located at the project site/sites of displacement/sites

likely to be affected were requested to participate in the public hearing and to make

oral/written suggestions to Environmental Engineer, Bihar Pollution Control Board,

Patna. The copy of the EIA draft report and executive summary of the EIA report both in

English and Hindi were placed at the following places to provide access to the general

public.

Office of the District Collector, Buxar

Office of the Environmental Engineer, Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Patna

Office of the Chairman, Zila Parishad, District Buxar

Office of the District Industries Centre, District Buxar

Office of Village Panchayats Banarpur, Chunni & Sikraul.

Office of District Rural Development Agency, District Buxar

Regional Office of Ministry of Environmental & Forests, Jharkhand.

Public hearing meeting was chaired by The District Magistrate, Buxar, Sh. Raman

Kumar, (IAS), and Sh. S P Roy, Environmental Engineer; Bihar State Pollution Control

Board convened the meeting. More than 500 people attended the public hearing.

The Chief Executive Officer, SJVN Thermal (P) Limited, Sh. Parveen Gupta explained

about the proposed Greenfield thermal power plant at Chausa village. Various technical

details, advantages and the environmental and social initiatives to adopted at the

proposed power project were articulated. Mr. Deepak Kumar, environmental engineer

from the EIA Consulting organization, M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

presented the environmental aspects, impacts and mitigation measures proposed in the





Page C7-225

EIA study. Subsequently the convener, invited the public to present their views and

concerns on the proposed thermal power project. The participants expressed their

views. The project proponent along with EIA Consultant addressed the points raised by

the public with regards to the proposed project. The District Magistrate concluded the

meeting by summarizing the proceedings with a vote of thanks.

Table 7.1 summarizes various points raised by the public along with responses and

environmental and social management plan and the copy of the Public hearing

proceeding is enclosed as Annexure 12.

Table 7-1 Environmental Social Management Plan for the Points Raised in Public Hearing

S.No Issue or concern Response and Environmental & Social

Management Plan Budget allocated

Rs. 1 Land related aspects

1.1 Few land owners informed

that the compensation for

the project was not paid

and it was requested to

expedite the same.

SJVN Thermal (P) Limited informed that the

compensation for the land was paid as per the

current applicable guidelines and regulations

including the Land Act 2013. About 95 % of the

compensation was already paid by the District

Administration to the land owners.

The District Magistrate informed public that

the compensation is only pending in few cases

which are under review and the same shall be

disbursed after the completion of the process.

As per the

guidelines and

standards.

1.2 Railway siding will be

passing through the village

revenue land of

surrounding villages. It was

requested to provide

adequate compensation for

the land proposed to be

acquired for the Railway

siding

STPL intimated that compensation as per the

prevailing norms/act shall be paid for the land

acquired for the said purpose.

As per the

guidelines and

standards.

1.3 People raised their

concerns that flooding take

place in the Banarpur,

Sikraul and other villages

nearby project area. How it

will be controlled.

STPL informed that flooding in these areas

takes place due to the entry of backwater of

River Ganga/Karamnasa during the monsoon

period. The matter will be taken up with the

District administration / water resource

department of govt. of Bihar for flood control

measures.

----

1.4 Engagement of STPL intimated that efforts will be made to As per the





Page C7-226



Rs. agricultural/ landless

labours

provide the employment/ self-employment to

such persons as per the policy of the

government.

guidelines and

standards.

2 Pollution Related issues

2.1 People raised the issue of

pollution due to Fly Ash

and asked how it will be

mitigated.

STPL intimated that for the disposal of fly ash,

ash dyke will be constructed and fly ash will be

disposed as per MoEF&CC guidelines. The 100

% fly ash reutilized shall be done as per the

following phases after commissioning of the

plant:

Year 1: 50 % reutilization

Year 2: 70% reutilization

Year 3: 90 % reutilization

Year 4 onwards: 100 % reutilization

20% of fly ash shall be distributed to local

people as per their requirements.

Budget for ash

handling system,

silos and truck

loading etc: Rs. 336

Cr.

2.2 How the Air/ Noise

pollution caused due to

construction and operation

of the project will be

controlled.

STPL intimated that the project proponent is

committed to implement the new power plant

emission regulations in the current project.

The SO2 emissions from the proposed power

plant will be less than 100 mg/Nm3 as against

150 mg/Nm3 in the conventional power plants

due to implementation of FGD.

Due to adoption of lime based FGD system,

residual Mercury emissions, if any will be

captured effectively.

It has been proposed to adopt low NOx

burners. High efficiency ESPs will be installed

to achieve new power plant regulations of 30

mg/Nm3 for particulate matter. The predicted

ground level concentrations showed

insignificant raise in background pollutant

levels due to emissions from proposed power

plant.

Apart from above, a 50-100 m thick green belt

shall be developed within the plant premises

to control air and noise pollution.

Rs. 771 Cr. has been

provisioned for

FGD, ESP and

greenbelt

2.3 How the Water pollution STPL intimated that the project proponent is Budget for waste





Page C7-227



Rs. caused due to the project

will be controlled

committed to implement the new water usage

standards notified by Ministry of Environment

& Forests. The waste water generated due to

the operations of the plant shall be recycled &

reutilized within the plant premises after

imparting necessary treatment.

water treatment &

sewerage treatment

etc.: Rs. 9 Cr.

3 Other aspects

3.1 It was demanded that

Plantation of trees should

be done in the project and

nearby areas to safeguard

the environment.

STPL has proposed to develop a thick

greenbelt in an area of 178 acres within the

plant. Native species with tall and high canopy

plants will be developed to achieve 80,000

fully grown trees at the end of 5th year.

In addition to this, as far as possible tree

plantation will be undertaken in the nearby

villages and barren, fallow government lands

in the region as a part of the CSR program in

association with district administration.

About Rs. 5 Cr.

3.2 It was asked to provide

employment opportunities

to the local people in the

project.

STPL assured that in case of unskilled labour,

most of the persons will be engaged from the

local people as per the requirements of the

project. In case of skilled labour, the same will

be taken from the local people as per the

availability and requirements of the project.

Apart from above, lot of indirect employment

will also be generated for the local people due

to construction of the project.

STPL will also take up skill development

programs under CSR activities to enhance the

skills of the local people.

About Rs. 61 Cr. is

budgeted for CSR

activities including

skill development

programs in next 10

years.

3.3 It was requested that

keeping in view the

sentiments of the public

and larger environmental

benefit, STPL should

consider setting up an

electric crematorium in the

vicinity of the project area.

STPL agreed for setting up the electric

crematorium provided that the land for the

same is made available by the concerned

authorities/local people.

About Rs. 61 Cr. is

budgeted for

various CSR

programs in next 10

years.

3.4 It was requested that STPL

should consider helping the

farmers in the adjoining

areas by creating facilities

STPL assured that measures such as organizing

horticultural camps & distribution of seeds to

farmers shall be taken up in consultation with

the local district administration.

About Rs. 61 Cr. is

budgeted for

various CSR

programs in next 10





Page C7-228



Rs. for improving of farming. years.

3.5 It was asked by the people

to improve the existing

mobile health van services

for the better treatment of

the local people.

STPL assured that all efforts will be made to

improve the mobile health van services

About Rs. 61 Cr. is

budgeted for

various CSR

programs in next 10

years.

3.6 It was asked that the

natural drainage pattern of

the project area should not

be disturbed due to the

project.

STPL intimated that there will be no

disturbance to the natural drainage pattern

due to the construction of the project. The

studies in this regard have been carried out by

IIT Roorkee and measures will be taken

accordingly.

------

7.2. Risk Assessment and Risk Mitigation Measures

Identification of hazards in a power plant is of primary significance in the analysis,

quantification and cost effective control of accidents involving chemicals and process.

Hence, all the components of a process/ system/ plant need to be thoroughly examined

to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of

events, which can be termed as an accident.

The proposed power plant will utilize about 6.7 million tones of Indian coal annually.

As coal is subject to spontaneous combustion it may catch fire given the slightest

opportunity. This fire hazard is greatly influenced by the amount of airflow through the

mass of coal.

7.2.1. Methodology

Risk assessment shall be carried out taking into account the maximum inventory of

storage at site at any point in time. The risk contours should be plotted on the plant

layout map clearly showing which of the proposed activities would be affected in case of

an accident taking place. Based on the same, proposed safeguard measures should be

provided. Measures to guard against fire hazards should also be provided.

A preliminary hazard identification and risk assessment was undertaken to quantify the

possible fire and occupational health risks associated with the operation of the project

at the designated location. The good engineering practices suggested by the Central

Pollution Control Board for risk assessment in industries (CPCB document

Probes/133/2009-10) and CPR-18E risk assessment procedures' guidelines which are





Page C7-229

widely accepted by the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF&CC) India, have

been adopted while assessing the residual risks associated with the operations of the

project with specific reference to fire hazards, chemical exposure hazards, occupational

hazards and natural hazards. As part of the risk assessment, a preliminary review on the

hazardous materials and chemicals proposed to be handled at the site were reviewed

and the storage capacities and design features of such hazardous materials were also

reviewed while assessing the residual risks. Occupational health hazards such as

exposure to dust emissions, thermal stress and work-zone levels were also studied.

Based on the findings of the risk assessment study, a preliminary risk management plan

has been developed as per the applicable rules and guidelines; wherever possible, good

engineering and management practices are suggested to minimise any intolerable risks.

7.3. Construction Phase Safety Management Plan

7.3.1. General Safety Aspects

The possible safety hazards during the construction phase are primarily limited to

material transport, construction and erection of material and structures and working at

heights etc. The possible occupational safety hazards with the above mentioned

activities are electrical hazards at the construction activity, falling from heights, slips

and fall of equipment such as cranes etc.

In order avoid the occupational safety hazards, The Indian Codes and Standards (IS

18001: 2007, IS - CED 29(7778) and 15793:2007) on construction safety best practices

shall be adopted by all the contractors and sub-contractors. All the sub-contractors shall

have a written health and safety and environment policy. The principal contractor will

be responsible for implementing and monitoring the occupational safety programs at

the construction sites. Workers & Supervisors should use the safety helmet and other

requisite Personal Protective Equipment according to job & site requirement. They

should be trained to use personal protective equipment. No loose clothing should be

allowed while working near rotating equipment or working at heights. Visitors should

not be allowed access to construction sites unless accompanied by or authorized by a

competent person and provided with the appropriate protective equipment. Where

natural lighting is not adequate, working light-fittings or portable hand-lamps should be

provided at workplace on the construction site where a worker will do a job. Emergency





Page C7-230

lighting should be provided for personnel safety during night time to facilitate standby

lighting source, if normal system fails. Artificial lighting should not produce glare or

disturbing shadows.

The following IS codes may be adopted for construction safety related activities:

IS Code 3696: Safety code for scaffolds and ladders, (Part 1):1987-Scaffolds,

(Part 2):1991- Ladders

IS Code 3764:1992 - Code of practice for excavation work

IS Code 4082:1996 - Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction

materials and components at site

IS Code 512:1969 - Safety code for piling and other deep foundations

IS Code 5916:1970 - Safety code for construction involving use of hot bituminous

materials

IS Code 7205:1974 - Safety code for erection of structural steel work

IS Code 7969:1975 - Safety code for handling and storage of building materials

IS Code 13416 - Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at

work places: (Part 1):1992- Falling material hazards prevention and (Part

2):1992-Fall prevention and (Part 3):1994-Disposal of debris

7.3.2. Occupational Health Risks and Risk Mitigation Plan – Construction Phase

7.3.2.1 Heat Stroke

In the recent past, based on the information provided by IMD, Madhya Pradesh and

Bihar are experiencing the heat waves in the month of May and June. The heat wave is

caused in large part by sparser pre-monsoon season showers, which brought less

moisture than normal to the area, leaving large parts of India arid and dry. The sudden

end of pre-monsoon rain showers, an uncommon trend in India, has contributed to the

heat waves. The peak temperatures in the Buxar region was reported t be as high as

48OC. When a person works in a hot environment, the body must get rid of excess heat

to maintain a stable internal temperature. It does this mainly through circulating blood

to the skin and through sweating. When the air temperature is close to or warmer than

normal body temperature, cooling of the body becomes more difficult. Blood circulated

to the skin cannot lose its heat. Sweating then becomes the main way the body cools off.

But sweating is effective only if the humidity level is low enough to allow evaporation

and if the fluids and salts that are lost are adequately replaced. Heat stroke can occur





Page C7-231

when the body's system of temperature regulation fails and body temperature rises to

critical levels. This condition is caused by a combination of highly variable factors, and

its occurrence is difficult to predict. Heat stroke is a medical emergency. The primary

signs and symptoms of heat stroke are confusion; irrational behavior; loss of

consciousness; convulsions; a lack of sweating (usually); hot, dry skin; and an

abnormally high body temperature, e.g., a rectal temperature of 41°C (105.8°F). If body

temperature is too high, it causes death. The elevated metabolic temperatures caused by

a combination of work load and environmental heat load, both of which contribute to

heat stroke, are also highly variable and difficult to predict.

In order to reduce the risk associated with heat exposure the following measures can be

adopted:

Avoid working for prolonged period during the hot sunny hours especially

during 1 to 3pm during summer conditions,

Adopted staggered times to avoid over exposure to direct sun,

In the case the ambient temperatures exceed more than 45OC, the construction

works in open areas may be suspended.

7.4 Safety Hazards during Operational Phase

7.4.1 Hazardous Operations

Unlike other process industries, power project does not handle any major flammable

materials (Class A and Class B Flammable material) except small quantities of furnace

oil for boiler start up conditions. Other hazardous materials that will be handled at the

power plant will be small quantities of Chlorine used as biocide in the cooling tower. In

general about 2 to 5ppm of Chlorine is doped in the cooling water circulation line for

this purpose. Both Hydrochloric acid and Sodium Hydroxide will be used for

regeneration of the De-Mineralization Plant resin beds. Two day storage tanks of

capacity 2000 m3 each with adequately designed dyke system will be installed in the DM

plant area. Although coal is not a self igniting compound at ambient temperatures,

prolonged exposure to heat during the hot summer days, may lead to partial ignition

due to the presence of volatile compounds in the coal. Based on the preliminary

analysis, the major fire hazards envisaged are from storage and handling of furnace oil

at the Mill site.





Page C7-232

7.4.2 Safety Aspects of Storage of Furnace Oil

A preliminary risk assessment study was undertaken to establish the possible heat

radiation effects due to accidental fires at furnace oil storage tanks.

Two (2) nos. of 2000m3 capacity fixed roof type LDO storage tanks will be provided for

storage of LDO. One (1) no. of 100m3 capacity fixed roof type LDO day oil tank will

be provided for auxiliary boiler with a dyke designed for 100% containment. Furnace

oil falls under Class 3 combustible material as per OISD standards and hence the

possible fire hazards will be less significant. Hence, these fuels will undergo only pool

fire scenario in the presence of any ignition source. Since the quantity of furnace oil

proposed to be stored will be very small. In order to assess the heat radiation from the

pool fire scenario of accidental spills from furnace oil (full bore rupture of the storage

tank), consequence modeling was undertaken using USEPA Aloha software. For the

purpose of the consequence modeling, it has been assumed that due to mechanical

failure of the tank, entire inventory of the furnace will be retained in the dyke. In the

presence of external fire such as electrical fire or vehicular exhaust sparks etc, the

contents in the dyke will catch fire and release thermal energy. The predicted heat

radiation levels due to pool fire of furnace oil pool fire scenario are presented in Table

7.2. Radiation contours are presented in Figure 7.1.

It may be inferred from the model heat radiation contours with 4.5kW/m2 would occur

within the facility boundary and hence the overall impacts due to any fire accidents will

be less significant. In addition there are no public roads and settlements located within

the predicted heat radiation contour of 1.6 kW/m2, hence the impacts on the

neighboring areas will be insignificant. As per the published literature (CP18E and

CPCB Manual for fire risk assessment), the possible frequency of occurrence of such

accidents will be less than 40 in one Million events. Hence, the overall risk due to

handling of such a small quantity of furnace oil at the Mill site will be insignificant.





Page C7-233

Table 7-2 Estimated Heat Radiation Levels due to Fire from Furnace Oil Tank Rupture

Heat Radiation Level (kW/m2)

Possible Physical Effect due to Heat Radiation (ref)

Heat Radiation Distance for Furnace Oil Tank Fire

(Pool Fire Scenario)

37.5 Sufficient to cause damage to process equipment

Within the dyke

25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite wood

Within the dyke

12.5 Melting of cables and plastic <25m

9.5 Second degree burns in 20 seconds <45m

4.5 Zero percent lethality, but may cause blisters

<80m

1.6 Will cause no discomfort on prolonged exposure

<110m

Figure 7-1 Consequence Distance – Heat Radiation Levels

The following safety measures will be adopted for handling of furnace oil.

According to the OISD standards, an adequately design dyke with 110% of the

largest tank volume, will be provided to retain the oil spills, if any,

The fuel transfer pumps & motors will be of fire proof type and will be located

outside the dyke area.

A level indicator with alarm will be provided for the fuel tanks.

Fuel unloading from the trucks will be taken up only in the presence of

authorized supervisor.





Page C7-234

The transfer hose pipelines and truck discharge line will be connected to a

temporary earth arrangement as per BIS codes to avoid any static electricity.

A spill collection pit will be provided near the fuel tank dyke.

As far as possible, plant office areas, common gathering points and canteen shall

be located at least 100 m away from the fuel oil storage areas to avoid any

exposure to heat radiation effects on the workers and employees.

It has been recommended to provide a hand-held foam tender and fire water

hydrant line in the vicinity of the storage tanks.

7.4.3 Risk Mitigation Measures for the Storage and Handling of Coal

Although coal fires are infrequent, there is a possibility of coal fires at the coal stock

yards during the summer conditions due to burning of volatile compounds. Coal stock

yard fires can be avoided by providing proper stacking design to prevent air movement

inside the coal lumps, minimising the duration of coal storage at the site and water

sprinkling operations to maintain adequate moisture. Power plants store, transfer, and

use coal; therefore, careful handling is necessary to mitigate fire and explosion risks.

Recommended measures to prevent minimise, and control fire hazards at proposed

power plants include:

Use of automated combustion and safety controls

Proper maintenance of boiler safety controls

Implementation of startup and shutdown procedures to minimise the risk of

suspending hot coal particles (e.g., in the crusher) during startup

Regular cleaning of the facility to prevent accumulation of coal dust (e.g., on

floors, ledges, beams, and equipment)

Removal of hot spots from the coal stockpile (caused by spontaneous

combustion) and spread until cooled, avoid loading of hot coal into the

pulverised fuel system

Use of automated systems such as temperature gauges or carbon monoxide

sensors to survey solid fuel storage areas to detect fires caused by self-

ignition and to identify risk points

For planned outages, operators should take every precaution to ensure that all

idle bunkers and silos are completely empty and also verify by visual checks.

Bunkers and silos should be thoroughly cleaned by washing down their





Page C7-235

interior walls and any interior structural members but not their horizontal

surfaces. Idle bunkers and silos that contain coal/lignite should be monitored

frequently for signs of spontaneous combustion by using CO monitors,

infrared scanning, or temperature scanning.

Fire fighting systems and fire hydrant systems shall be installed at all hazard

prone areas such as coal stock yards, bunkers and silos as per the applicable

fire safety standards

7.4.4 Risk Mitigation Measures for Storage of Chlorine Tonners

7.4.4.1 Chlorine Hazards and Consequence Modelling

Chlorine to the tune of 1 to 2 ppm will be dosed into the cooling water circulation line to

avoid biofouling in the system. Considering about 25000 m3/hr of water in circulation

in the cooling tower, the maximum Chlorine consumption will be in the order of 1500

Kg/day. About 10 chlorine ton-containers (900 Kg each) will be stored a dedicated

isolated and closed room near the cooling tower area. Chlorine tonners will be stored as

per the BIS code IS: 4263-1967 (Code of Safety for Chlorine).

Chlorine is soluble in alkalis and only slightly soluble in water, approximately one (1%)

percent at 9.4°C. Above this its solubility decreases with rise in temperature up to the

boiling point of water at which it is completely insoluble. Neither liquid nor gaseous

chlorine is explosive or flammable, but both react readily with many organic substances,

usually with the evolution of heat and, in some cases, resulting in explosion. Chlorine

gas is extremely irritating to the mucous membranes, the eyes and the respiratory tract.

If the duration of exposure or the concentration of chlorine-is excessive, it will cause

restlessness, throat irritation, sneezing and copious salivation. In extreme cases, lung

tissues may be attacked resulting in pulmonary edema. Inhale lowest published toxic

concentration TCL0 is 15 ppm and Inhale lowest published lethal concentration is 430

ppm. The physiological effects of various concentrations of chlorine gas are shown in

Table 7.2.

Among HAZMAT releases accidents, a small amount of release, i.e. 1to 10 kg/min

release, took up 38 percent of the total number of chlorine release accidents. Accidental

releases of Chlorine will be subjected to dispersion and will be diluted several folds

from the release location. The gases having higher density than air (Such as Chlorine)





Page C7-236

and other factors like low temperature, fine liquid droplets in the gas cloud make the

clouds slump under gravity. The gas cloud moves along the direction of wind and

becomes passive as the density of the cloud approaches ambient density. In the passive

phase, dispersion is greatly affected by wind velocity and the stability of the weather

condition. In the consequence analysis, use is made of a number of calculation models to

estimate the physical effects of an accident (spill of hazardous material) and to predict

the damage (lethality) of the effects.

For the purpose of the dispersion modeling, it is assumed that Chlorine will be leaking

from a 900 Kg tonner in a span of 30 minutes through the nozzle with a release rate of

0.5 Kg/sec. Ideally occurrence of such scenarios will be very remote due to installation

of early warning systems such as Chlorine sensors near the storage area. Various

emergency control measures as stated in IS Code for safety for Chlorine will be adopted.

However for the purpose of this risk assessment study an hypothetical scenario of worst

case release has been considered. Stability D (Neutral) with a wind velocity of 2 m/sec

will become the critical condition for maximum ground level concentrations during the

winter evenings and nights. The Chlorine has release is modeled using Gaussian

dispersion equations (non buoyant source) and the concentration Chlorine at the end of

first one hour has been presented in Figure 7.2.

It can be noted that the maximum GLCs of 860 mg/m3 is identified at 100m from the

Chlorine tonner storage areas towards south east direction. At the facility boundary the

GLC will be in the order of 20 mg/m3. At the nearest village (downwind of the plant –

South eastern direction is Village Kocharhi), which is located at about 1.5 Km from the

Chlorine storage area will be in the order of 10 mg/m3 to12 mg/m3. Since the release of

the emissions is instantaneous and the leaks will be identified and controlled within 30

minutes as per the guidelines of the Chlorine Institute, USA, the emissions will be ceased

immediately. Hence the GLCs will be drastically reduced to less than 0.5 mg/m3 within a

span of four to five hours.





Page C7-237

Table 7-3 Effect of Chlorine at Various Concentrations

Effects Concentration of Chlorine Gas in Air (ppm v/v)

Concentration of Chlorine Gas in Air (mg/m3)

Estimated Distance of Impact due to release of Chlorine from a 900 kg

tonner (m)

Threshold of irritation 4 12 1500

Concentration causing immediate irritation of throat

15 46 530

Concentration causing cough (IDLH)17

30 93 360

Concentration dangerous for even short exposure

50 154 250

Figure 7-2: Dispersion Model of Chlorine Release from 900 Kg Tonner

17 Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health Concentrations (IDLH) is based on the statement by International Labour Organization [1971] that exposure to 30 ppm will cause intense coughing fits, and exposure to 40 to 60 ppm for 30 to 60 minutes or more may cause serious damage





Page C7-238

7.4.4.2 Chlorine Safety procedures as per IS Code 4263-1967

Cylinders (tonners) should be stored in an upright position. They should be

secured to prevent from falling over. Full and empty cylinders should not be

stored together. Ton containers should be stored on their sides. They should not

be stacked or racked more than one high.

Storage areas should be remote from, elevators gangways or ventilating systems.

The storage area should be separate from that in. which other compressed gas

containers are stored.

The storage area should be dry, well-ventilated, clean of trash, and protected from

external heat sources (steam pipes, etc). Sub-surface areas should be avoided for

storing chlorine cylinders.

The valves on cylinders and ton containers should be protected by a stout metal

cap securely attached to the cylinder body. This cap should always be kept in

place on all containers in storage and at all times except during evacuation of

chlorine.

Cylinders should never be lifted by means of the metal cap, nor should rope

slings, chains or magnetic devices be used. Unloading platforms should preferably

be at truck or car-bed level. The ton container should be handled with a suitable

cradle with chain slings in combination with a hoist or crane having at least 2

metric tonnes capacity.

Cylinders and ton containers being trucked should be carefully checked, clamped,

or otherwise suitably supported to prevent shifting and rolling. They should not

be permitted to drop, and no object should be allowed to strike them with force.

They should not project beyond the sides or ends of the vehicles in which they are

transported.

If the gas discharge rate from a single container will not meet demand

requirements, two or more may be connected to a manifold and discharged

simultaneously, or a vaporizer may be used. When discharging through a

manifold, care shall be taken that all containers are at the same temperature,

particularly when connecting a new container to the manifold. If there is a

difference in the temperature of the liquid chlorine, it will be transferred by

distillation from the warm to the cool container, and the cooler container may





Page C7-239

become completely filled with liquid. If this should occur and the container valve

remains closed, hydrostatic pressure may cause bursting. For this reason, extra

precautions shall be observed when closing valves of containers connected to a

manifold. Connection of cylinders or ton containers discharging liquid chlorine to

a manifold is not recommended.

A flexible connection between the container and the piping should be used;

annealed copper tubing (9.5 mm outside diameter × 0.889 mm wall), suitable for

35.2 kg/cm2 service is recommended. A clamp and adapter connector is

preferred; if a union connector is used, the threads on the connector shall match

the valve outlet thread. (Valve outlet threads are straight threads, not standard

taper pipe threads.) A new gasket (lead) should be used when making a

connection.

A suitable gas mask should be available to every employee involved with chlorine

handling. Respiratory protective equipment should be carefully maintained and

kept in clean, dry, light-proof cabinets properly protected by paraffined paper or

polyethylene bags. No person wearing a respirator should enter a chlorine

contaminated area unless attended to by an observer who can rescue him in the

event of respirator failure or other emergencies.

Water shall never be used on a chlorine leak as it always makes the leak worse

due to the corrosive effect. In addition, heat supplied by even the coldest water to

a leaking container causes liquid chlorine to evaporate faster. A leaking container

shall not be immersed or thrown into a body of water as the leak will be

aggravated due to the corrosive effect and the container may float when partially

full, allowing gas evolution and dispersion at the surface.

Equipment and Piping Leaks—If a leak occurs in equipment in which chlorine is

being used, the supply of chlorine shall be shut off and chlorine which is under

pressure at the leak shall be disposed off safely. Leaks around valve stems usually

may be stopped by tightening the packing nut or gland. If this does not stop the

leak, the container valve shall be closed and the chlorine, which is under pressure

in the outlet piping, shall, be disposed off. If a container valve does not shut off

tight, the outlet cap or plug should be applied. In case of a valve leak on a ton-





Page C7-240

container, the container shall be rolled so that the valves are in a vertical plane

with the leaking valve on top; this is important.

As a regular part of chlorine storage and use, provisions shall be made for

emergency disposal of chlorine from leaking cylinders or ton-containers. Chlorine

may be absorbed in solutions of caustic soda or soda ash, or in agitated hydrated -

lime slurries. Caustic soda is recommended as it absorbs chlorine more readily.

A suitable tank to hold the solution should be provided in a convenient location.

Chlorine gas should be passed into, the solution through an iron pipe or rubber

hose properly weighted to hold it under the surface; the container should not be

immersed.

The proportions of alkali and water recommended for this purpose are given

below.

Chlorine Container Capacity

Caustic Soda and Water

Soda Ash and Water

Hydrated Lime and Water

kg Weight

(kg) Volume

(L) Weight

(kg) Volume

(L) Weight

(kg) Volume (L)

45 58 182 136 450 58 566

68 90 270 220 680 82 815

900 1 160 3 680 2 720 9 050 1 160 11 50

7.4.5 Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Program

The Ministry of Labour and Employment, Government of India has a nodal organization

viz. Directorate General Factory Advice Service and Labour Institutes (DGFASLI) in

dealing with Occupational Safety and Health issues in Industries. The Directorate

General Factory Advice Service and Labour Institutes (DGFASLI) is the technical arm of

the Ministry on matters connected with Occupational Health in the manufacturing and

port sectors.

The Factories Act, 1948 provides for appointment of qualified Medical Practitioners and

Certifying Surgeons to examine young persons engaged in dangerous manufacturing

processes and to ensure medical supervision in case of illness due to the nature of

manufacturing processes. The Factories Act, 1948 also provides for notification of

certain occupational diseases as listed in the Third Schedule of the Act. As per Section

90 of the Factories Act, 1948, the State Govt. is vested with the powers to appoint a





Page C7-241

Competent Person to conduct inquiry into the causes of any accident or notifiable

diseases.

The following measures needs to be implemented in the work places to enhance

occupational health:

1. Identify and involve workers in assessing workplace risks,

2. Assess and consider employees' needs when planning and organising work,

3. Provide advice, information and training to employees, as well as mechanisms for

employee feedback such as a suggestion scheme,

4. Occupational health surveillance and Occupational health audit, To develop a

system of creating up to date data base on mortality, and morbidity due to

Occupational diseases and use it for performance monitoring of the same and

5. Extending support to the state government for effective enforcement of the health

provisions stipulated under section 41F of the Factory Act by equipping them

with work environment monitoring technologies

The occupational health safety system should be headed by a competent and qualified

safety office that will be supported by a team of safety volunteers from each plant and

department within the facility. The safety team will take up a detailed task based risk

assessment studies and will develop task based safety procedures and work permit

systems. The safety team should record the near misses in the plant and take necessary

corrective action to minimize the occupational risks.

A dedicated occupational health centre shall be developed consisting the following

facilities:

1. A full time doctor may be appointed to monitor the day-to-day occupational

health aspects and also to provide medical advice to the workers, employees and

residents of the colony,

2. Minimum facilities such as oxygen cylinder for emergency medical use, two bed

clean room for first aid applications, first aid kits as per the Factories act,

3. ECG and X-ray facilities, (4). Peak Expiratory flow Meter to check the lung

function.

4. As a part of the surveillance program, the following minimum medical expansion

may be undertaken during the pre-employment phase: 1. General physical





Page C7-242

examination and blood pressure, 2. X-Ray of chest & ECG, 3. Sputum examination,

4. Detailed routine blood & urine examination, 5. Audiometry and 5. Spirometry.

5. As part of the routine and annual medical examinations on the persons working

in the high noise generating areas, stress areas and dust exposure areas, a

comprehensive surveillance program may be adopted. Some of the good

management practices are suggested in Table 7.4 and 7.5.

6. Medical records - A record-keeping system for holding results of medical

examinations and reports of symptoms will be needed as part of the health

surveillance scheme. These are confidential medical records relating to

individuals. As part of the health surveillance programme, workers should be

informed of the confidential results of each assessment and of any implications

of the findings, such as the likely effects of their continuing to work with

vibration.

Table 7-4 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Program

Age (yrs) Periodicity Duration of Exposure Periodicity < 30 yrs Once in five years < 10 yrs Once in five years

31-40 Once in four years 10 to 20 Once in four years

41-50 Once in three years 21-30 Once in three

years > 51 Once a year > 31 Once a year

Table 7-5 Suggested Medical Tests under Occupational Health Surveillance Program

S.No Disorder Tests to be conducted

1 Heart Diseases ECG, Blood for Lipid Profile, Stress Test, 2D-Echo and other required Tests

2 Anemia Hb%, TC,DC, ESR & Stool for Occult Blood, Ova and Cyst 2 Lung Diseases Sputum, X-Ray Chest, Spirometery

4 Diabetes Random Blood sugar, Urine sugar, if positive, BSL-Fasting/PPBS diabetic profile

5 Hypertension Blood Pressure reading, If required Renal profile + ECG and stress test.

6 Urine Examination

Routine and Microscopic





Page C7-243

7.5 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems

A comprehensive fire detection and protection system is envisaged for the complete

power station. This system shall generally be as per the recommendations of TAC

(INDIA)/ IS: 3034 & NFPA- 850.

The following protection systems are envisaged:

Hydrant system for complete power plant covering main plant building, boiler

area, turbine and its auxiliaries, coal handling plant, all pump houses and

miscellaneous buildings of the plant. The system shall be complete with piping,

valves, instrumentation, hoses, nozzles, hose boxes/stations etc.

Automatic high velocity water spray system for all transformers located in

transformer yard and transformers having rating 7.5 MVA and above located

within the boundary limits of plant, Main and unit turbine oil tanks and purifier,

Oil canal, generator seal oil system, lube oil system for turbine driven boiler feed

pumps, boiler burner fronts, fuel oil station in boiler, etc. This system shall

consist of QB detectors, deluge valves, projectors, valves, piping &

instrumentation.

Automatic medium velocity water spray system for cable vaults and cable

galleries of main plant, switchyard control room and ESP control room consisting

of smoke detectors, linear heat sensing cable detectors, deluge valves, isolation

valves, piping, instrumentation, etc.

Automatic medium velocity water spray system for coal conveyors, transfer

points, Stacker reclaimer, consisting of QB detectors, linear heat sensing cables,

deluge valves, nozzles, piping, instrumentation, etc.

Automatic medium velocity water spray system for LDO tanks consisting of QB

detectors, deluge valves, nozzles, piping, instrumentation, etc.

Automatic fire detection cum sprinkler system for crusher house along with

alarm valves, sprinkler nozzles, piping, instrumentations etc.

Automatic Foam injection system for fuel oil / storage tanks consisting of foam

concentrate tanks, foam pumps, in-line inductors, valves, piping &

instrumentation etc

For protection of Central control room, Control equipment room, Programmer

room, UPS room, etc. Inert Gas extinguishing system as per NFPA-2001 would be





Page C7-244

opted.

Fire detection and alarm system - A computerized analogue, addressable type

Fire detection and Alarm system shall be provided to cover the complete power

plant. Following types of fire detection shall be employed.

1. Multi-sensor type smoke detection system

2. Photo electric type smoke detection system.

3. Combination of both multi-sensor type and photo electric type smoke

detection systems.

4. Linear heat sensing cable detector.

5. Quartzoid bulb heat detection system.

6. Infra red type heat detectors (for selected coal conveyors)

Portable and mobile extinguishers, such as pressurized water type, carbon-dioxide

type, foam type, dry chemical powder type, will be located at strategic locations

throughout the plant.

CW blow down shall be used for supply of fire water. An alternate connection from

raw water line shall also be provided as a back-up source for fire water. It is

proposed to provide two numbers of Steel tanks for storage of fire water system.

Fire water pumps shall be located in the fire water pump house and horizontal

centrifugal pumps shall be installed in the pump house for hydrant and spray system

and the same shall be driven by electric motor and diesel engines as per the

regulations of TAC. The water for foam system shall be tapped off from the hydrant

system network.

For the above fire water pumping station, automatic pressurization system

consisting of jockey pumps shall be provided.

Complete Instrumentation and Control System for the entire fire detection and

protection system shall be provided for safe operation of the complete system.

7.6 Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan

7.6.1 Introduction

The proposed project is to acquire land about 1064.69 acres of land from 7 villages of

three Panchayat of Buxar District, Bihar. The project doesn’t displace any human

settlement as there are no permanent structures within the study area. Addressing the

resettlement and Rehabilitation issues in the project is guided by the exiting legislation





Page C7-245

and policies by Government of India and Government of Bihar by time to time. For

arriving the R&R Plan for providing compensation or resettlement to the affected if any

shall be addressed as per the guiding principles as suggested by the appropriate policy

and guidelines. This section elaborates the various legislations, policies, rules regarding

Rehabilitation and Resettlement activity and explains the concept behind the arrival of

Compensation entitlement matrix.

7.6.2 Existing Laws and Policies related to R&R

There are century old land acquisition Act 1894, to address the land acquisition and

compensation and amended therein 1984. The act was later replaced by the new act

‘Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and

Resettlement Act, 2013’ shortly called as Land Acquisition Act 2013. This section

explains about the features and principles in addressing the R&R issues for the current

project.

7.6.2.1 The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition,

Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013

The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation

and Resettlement Act, 2013 shortly called Land Acquisition Act 2013 is the act passed

by Indian Parliament to regulate land acquisition process and to lay down the process

and procedures for granting compensation for the land losers and Rehabilitation and

Resettlement for the project affected people. The act was replaced by the century old

Land acquisition Act 1894. The act applies to all projects where the appropriate

government acquires land for its use, hold and control and as include for the projects as

per the Section 2 (1) of Act.

7.6.2.2 Salient features of the Land Acquisition Act, 2013

Social Impact Assessment: Whenever the appropriate government

intends to acquire land for public purpose, it shall consult the concerned

Panchayat, Municipality or Municipal Corporation in the affected area

and to conduct the Social Impact Assessment Study as per the Section 4

of the Act.

Public Hearing for SIA: Social Impact Assessment process shall include

public hearing to be held in the affected to ascertain the views of the

affected families and the same is included in the SIA report.





Page C7-246

Food Security: If the multi-crop land to be acquired for the purpose of

the project equal amount of cultivable waste land shall be developed for

agriculture purpose or value of same shall be deposited with

appropriate Government for the investment in agriculture.

Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan shall include:

Particulars of Land and Immovable assets to be acquired

Livelihood loser those whose land been acquired and land less who

primarily depend on the land

Details of Public utilities, Government buildings, amenities

infrastructural facilities, common properties which are affected

Assessing Market Value for Land: Market Value of the land is

calculated based on average sale value for the land in the vicinity for the

three preceding years and is multiplied with the multiplying factor of 1

for urban areas and 2 for rural areas.

Determination of Amount of Compensation for land Losers: Market

value of the Land as determined under Sec. 26 and damage sustained

due to land acquisition such as standing crops and trees.

Award of Solatium: After determining the total Compensation value to

be paid, 100% of determined compensation amount is added as

Solatium. In addition, amount of 12% per annum of the market value of

land shall be awarded from the date of notification to the date of taking

procession of the land.

Infrastructural Amenities: In addition to the R&R compensation, as

prescribed in Third Schedule basic amenities and infrastructure shall be

developed in the resettlement area.

Multiple Displacements: Additional compensation shall be provided

for the families who were already displaced.

Provisions for SC / ST: Development plan for displacing the SC /ST

families. One third of the compensation amount due shall be paid

upfront before the actual compensation paid. Fishing rights in the river

valley projects. 25% extra compensation if resettled in different district.

Free land shall be provided for the community and social gathering.





Page C7-247

7.6.3 Project Site and Land Acquisition

The proposed project site is located in Chausa Taluk, Buxar District, Bihar State. The

proposed project is about to acquire 1064.69 acres of land from 7 villages part of three

Panchayat, Buxar District. Among 1064.69 acres, 1048.69 acres of land are of private

land and 16 acres is Government Land. Presently the majority of the land is barren and

non cultivated.

The proposed project site doesn’t displace any human settlement or any public

properties such as roads, Public utilities, Government buildings etc. As the project

doesn’t displace any human settlement, the details obtained from District Land

Acquisition Agency relating to Project affected persons (PAP) are obtained for

illustrating the compensation under R&R plan. Based on the data provided by the

District Land Acquisition Office, Buxar, there are more than 1100 beneficiaries to get

compensation for their land.

7.6.4 Displacement of People & Public Amenities and R&R applicability

Though the project is acquiring land from 7 villages, the proposed project doesn’t

displace any human population from the proposed project site. Even though there are

no human settlements or permanent buildings within the site area there are no public

properties such as roads, Government buildings, etc except a private Brick

manufacturing unit having employed about 10-15 people and a seasonal canal passing

through the project site which may be used for some marginal farmers for irrigation.

The project does not attract Rehabilitation and Resettlement as there is no

displacement of any human population. Only land compensation is applicable and for

the same compensation value is determined based on the guidelines of Land Acquisition

2013. The process of acquisition of private land as per the provisions of Land

Acquisition Act, 1894 was initiated in 2007 and the compensation was paid as per The

Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and

Resettlement Act, 2013. Village Wise Land Acquisition Details is given in Table 7.6.





Page C7-248

Table 7-6 Village Wise Land Acquisition Details

S.No. Name of Village Panchayat Area

Private Govt. 1 Banarpur Banarpur 424.00 2.72

2 Sikroul Sikroul 134.96 2.88 3 Khorampur Sikroul 303.85 6.78

4 Kochadih Sikroul 55.89 - 5 Mohanpurwa Chuni 76.16 1.70 6 Bechanpurwa Chuni 20.55 0.96

7 Akhouripur Chuni 33.28 0.96

Total 1048.69 16.00

7.6.5 Compensation Entitlement Plan for Land Acquisition

The project land was acquired by Bihar Govt. on behalf of SPTL, the requiring body in

respect of this project. The process of acquisition of pvt .land as per the provisions of

Land Acquisition Act, 1894 was initiated in 2007 and was completed in 2013. Based on

the compensation award declared under Land Act, 1894, payment of compensation was

started. In the meantime, the Land Acquisition Bill was passed with enhanced rate of

compensation. New Land Act, 2013 was enacted w.e.f. 01.01.2014.The compensation

for the land being acquired was re-calculated at the enhanced rate. The compensation /

cost of the land has been worked out taking into account the market value (MVR) on the

principle of “one project, one rate”. While deciding the base rate, the highest rate of land

within the area of acquisition has been considered. Based on the minimum guidelines

principles the total cost of the private and Government land works out to be about Rs.

364 Cr. In addition to the above, about Rs. 20 Cr of budget is allocated towards the

rehabilitation cost.

Table 7-7 Budget Estimated by Govt. of Bihar for the Land Acquisition as per the Applicable Regulations and Guidelines

Land Area (Acres) Cost (Rs.)

Private land 1048.69 355,36,90,348 Govt. Land 16 1,89,49,050 Service Charges to Infrastructure Development Authority, Govt of Bihar

- 5,98,73,684

Total 1064.69 363,25,13,082





Page C7-249

Figure 7-3 Google Map Showing the Project layout and Site Photographs

1: Location : 25°28'47.14"N ; 83°53'18.46"E Project Boundary – Fencing Nearest Village : Akhauripur

2:Location : 25°28'26.56"N ; 83°53'14.34"E Project Boundry – Fencing Work Under Progress Nearest Village : Banarpur





Page C7-250

3. Location- 25°27'44.97"N ; 83°53'16.06"E Nearest Village - Mohanpurwa

4.Location- 25°27'48.45"N ; 83°52'31.81"E Nearest Village - Koramphur

5.Location- 25°28'9.74"N ; 83°52'22.48"E Nearest Village – Sikraur

6: Location : 25°28'44.11"N, 83°52'40.00"E Abandoned Brick Manufacturing Nearest Village : Banarpur

7.7 Disaster Management Plan

7.7.1 Preamble

A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into

helplessness and suffering and, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical

and social care and other necessities of life.

Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, are disasters resulting from

natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges, cyclones,

tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires. The second group includes

disastrous events occasioned by man, or by man's impact upon the environment.

Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents, radiation accidents, facto ry fires,

explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river pollution, mining or





Page C7-251

other structural collapses, air, sea, rail and road transport accidents and can reach

catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss.

There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract since

this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social environment in

which it occurs. What would be consider a major disaster in a developing country, ill

equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not mean more than a temporary

emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their wake similar consequences

that call for immediate action, whether at the local, national or international level, for

the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes the search for the dead and injured,

medical and social care, removal of the debris, the provision of temporary shelter for

the homeless, food, clothing and medical supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of

essential services.

7.7.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan [DMP]

The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of

environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage

operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the Disaster

Management Plan, it should be widely circulated and personnel training through

rehearsals/drills.

The Disaster Management Plan should reflect the probable consequential severalties of

the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through 'Knock on' effects.

Further the management should be able to demonstrate that their assessment of the

consequences uses good supporting evidence and is based on currently available and

reliable information, incident data from internal and external sources and if necessary

the reports of out side agencies.

To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate

vicinity of the factory, a Disaster Management Plan has to be formulated and this

planned emergency document is called "Disaster Management Plan".

The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the

combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the following:

Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

Safeguard other people;





Page C7-252

Minimize damage to property and the environment;

Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;

Identify any dead;

Provide for the needs of relatives;

Provide authoritative information to the news media;

Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area;

Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the

cause and circumstances of the Emergency.

In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitation and render

medical help and to restore normalcy.

7.7.3 Actuation of the plan

A major emergency in a plant is one that has the potential to cause serious injury or loss

of life. It may cause damage to property and serious disruption, both inside and outside

of the plant.

The disasters identified as most likely to occur in the power plant are:

Fire at oil storage area

Fire at coal storage area

Toxic release of chemical

Hazard analysis has revealed that the damage distance is mainly confined to plant

boundary only. The main objective of the disaster management plan is to prevent or at

least reduce the risk of accidents through design, operation, maintenance and

inspection. An important element of accident mitigation is emergency planning, which

would consist of:

Recognizing the possibilities and probabilities of each kind of accident

Assessing the on-site and off-site implications of such incidents and deciding the

emergency procedures that would need to be carried out.

A number of elements make-up a good and workable disaster management plan.





Page C7-253

7.7.4 Emergency Equipment

7.7.4.1 Fire Detection and Protection System

Fire detection and alarm system provided for the entire plant area will be

microprocessor based Intelligent Analog Addressable type. Microprocessor based

analogue addressable main fire alarm panel (MFAP) shall be provided in central control

room with computer and printer and one additional fire alarm and control panel in coal

handling plant control room and repeater panel, which will be provided in the fire

station building.

Detectors are also to be provided. This shall be provided with the cross zoning

arrangements. The spacing of detectors will be in accordance with IS 2189/NFPA 72E/

BS 5839 (code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of automatic

fire detection and alarm

system).

7.7.4.2 Fire Protection System

The design and installation of complete fire protection system shall comply with

regulations of Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC) of India. In the absence of TAC

regulations, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard shall be

adopted. All equipment, special purpose fittings, couplings or accessories shall be

approved and certified for use in fire fighting system application by TAC / UL / FM.

The Power Plant is classified as Ordinary Hazard Occupancy as per TAC. Hence the

entire system will be designed accordingly.

7.7.5 Emergency response

The plant communication system will be provided to facilitate operations by

establishing quick communications among the operating personnel stationed at various

locations of the plant.

The Power plant will be provided with microprocessor based intercom telephone

system to facilitate inter-communication for operation/ administrative purposes. This

consists of an Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX) of suitable

capacity. All the instruments for subscribers will also have the provision for hooking up

with P&T lines.





Page C7-254

The telephone sets will be installed in various areas of power plant. In hazard areas

such as oil storage, wall telephone sets with explosion proof and corrosion resistant

metal cases will be provided.

7.7.6 Emergency control center

This involves setting up of an emergency communication system, formation of an

emergency response team and setting up of an emergency control centre. It is essential

that the emergency plan be regularly tested so that any defect may be corrected. The

plan should be reviewed and updated and any changes made should be disseminated to

all concerned. Emergency plan needs to consider emergency shutdown procedure so

that phased and orderly shutdown of the plant & systems can take place when

necessary.

Depending upon the methodology adopted for the co-ordination of various aspects of

disaster management, specific responsibilities should be fixed fo r civil and government

agencies. Outside agencies support is required for the emergency responses such as:

Augmenting the fire fighting service and firewater

Emergency medical help for the injured personnel of the plant

Evacuation of personnel

Law enforcement, traffic control and crime prevention

Co-ordination with other nearby industrial establishments

Communication facilities

Procuring fire-fighting consumables such as foam compound, fire hose etc

7.7.7 Response Evaluation, Testing and Updating of the Plan

The safety of a plant and function of safety related systems could only be as good as the

maintenance and monitoring of these systems. It is of great importance to establish

plant maintenance & monitoring schedule, which includes the following tasks;

Checking of safety related operating conditions in the control room and at site /

on the field.

Checking of safety related parts of the plant on site by visual inspection or by

remote monitoring.

Monitoring of safety related utilities such as electricity, steam, coolant and

compressed air.





Page C7-255

Preparation of maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work

specifying the different interval and type of works to be performed.

In addition, the maintenance and monitoring schedule shall specify the qualifications

and experience required by the personnel to perform their tasks.

7.7.8 Reporting to Authorities

In the management of a major hazard, in an installation, it is likely that the incident be

reported to the concerned authorities. Reporting shall be carried o ut in three steps.

Identification/notification of a major hazard installation

Preparation of a safety report

Immediate reporting of the accident

The safety report gives the authorities the following opportunities:

To carry out specific inspection in order to learn about hazards arising from

these installations.

To take a proper site selection decision for a new plant

To establish contingency plans.

Emergency planning rehearsals and exercises shall be monitored by senior officers

form the emergency services. After each exercise, the plan shall be thoroughly

reviewed to take account of omissions or short comings.




Chapter 8-Projetc Benefits

Page C8-256

8. PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1. Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

There will be a probable increase in the infrastructure resources due to the project in

the region by the way of transport, communication, health facilities and other basic

facilities to be created. Creation of new infrastructure or up-gradation of the existing

infrastructure is likely to create a boost to the local economy and enhance the quality of

life of the people living in the region.

8.2. Improvement in Social Infrastructure

It would be somewhat difficult to quantify all the benefits of a project of this type and

nature to the state and national economy because there are too many “spin-off” indirect

benefits in additions to direct benefits.

8.2.1. Induced Development

Since, power is the wheel for any of the development, the surrounding villages and

region would get maximum benefits out of generated electricity. The benefits may be

realized either as upcoming of industries and its allied ancillary units. Other benefits

would be generation of either direct or indirect employment to the locals. The ensured

and reliable supply of power to upcoming industries and surrounding region would be a

boon for development of the region.

8.2.2. Power supply

The project is expected to generate around 9828 million units of electricity per year

which will meet the growing energy deficit in the state and will have a tremendous

positive impact on enhancement in the economy of Bihar.

8.3. Direct and Indirect Benefit for Public

8.3.1. Employment

The proposed project will provide direct as well as indirect employment to the locals.

There will be a huge demand for skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled work force during

the construction and operation phases of the project.




Chapter 8-Projetc Benefits

Page C8-257

The above requirement for manpower shall be sourced from the local area to the extent

possible and preference shall be given to persons affected due to implementation of the

project. In addition to the above, the development of infrastructure in the area will also

attract many industries which would generate further employment.

8.3.2. Improved socio-economic conditions

The proposed project is likely to have a positive impact on the socio -economic

conditions of the region. The social structure in the region is likely to change due to the

creation of more job opportunities and revenues for income generation. People will

have higher incomes due to direct employment as well as indirect employment and will

have higher earning and buying capabilities.

8.3.3. Health

As a apart of the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) initiatives, it is envisaged to

create health infrastructure in the form of primary health centre, which will be

beneficial to the employees and also local people living in the region as their

dependence on nearby towns and cities for quality medical treatment will be reduced.

As part of CSR, it is also proposed to conduct periodic health camps and carryout health

campaigns which will lead to better health conditions of the people.

8.3.4. Training for developing skills for locals

With globalization, Indian Industries are now opening to the world, resulting in growing

demand for world-class quality workmanship and deployment of latest technologies to

enhance technical skill and productivity. Intense training to workforce and equipping

them with required knowledge and skill in power industry will ensure quality and

higher level of productivity of men and machines.

Realizing this, STPL proposes to set up Skill Development Training programs under CSR

programs to provide vocational training in a professional manner and to develop highly

trained workforce that suits the requirement of proposed project. Structured training

programs will be conducted to enable both new entrants and less experience workers in

the power industry progressively improve their skill levels, knowledge and competency.




Chapter 9-Environmental Management Plan

Page C9-258

9. ENVIRONMNENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

9.1. Introduction

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) reviews the adequacy of various pollution

control measures envisaged for proposed project (presented in Chapter 2.0) in

mitigating various environmental impacts identified and assessed in Chapter 4.

Additional mitigatory measures, if required to ensure sustainable power development

are also suggested. EMP has been prepared separately for construction and ope ration

phases and presented below. It describes administrative aspects of ensuring that

mitigatory measures are implemented and their effectiveness is monitored. It also

includes green belt development plan. Environmental monitoring program has already

been presented in Chapter 6.

Each of the mitigatory measure has been assessed with respect to

Adoption of state of art technological measures

Identification of human resources for its effective implementation

Allocation of financial resources for its effective implementation and

Effectiveness of mitigatory measure in mitigation of impacts

EMP specifies various technological measures for pollution prevention, waste

minimization, end-of-pipe treatment, attenuation etc. proposed to be undertaken to

mitigate the environmental impacts on each sector of environment during each phase of

the project, i.e. construction phase and operation phase. Most of the mitigatory

measures are integral part of the main plant package and are commissioned

simultaneously with the commissioning of the main plant packages. However, at this

stage, it is not possible to give a detailed physical and financial plan for individual

measures.

9.2. Summary of Proposed Pollution Control Measures

The proposed project is an environmental friendly facility with a reduced carbon foot

print and water footprint when compared with conventional power plants that are in

operation in the current day of operation. The following environmental management

plan will be adopted at deign an operational phases of the proposed project. About Rs.

1300 Cr has been allocated for implementing various pollution control systems and also

other management programs.





Page C9-259

Air Pollution control programs – In order to meet the new power plant standards,

STPL proposed to install higher efficiency electrostatic precipitators to meet the

emission level below 30 mg/Nm3. The envisaged uncontrolled SO2 emissions from each

boiler will be in the order of 5000 Kg/hr. In order to meet the new power plant

standards, a flue gas desulfurization unit (FGD) will be installed to remove about 95% of

the SO2 emissions from the power plant. Similarly, low NOx burners to maintain NOx

levels below 100 mg/Nm3 as per the new power plant emission standards. The peak

predicted ground level concentration of SO2, NOx and Particulate Matter due to release

of controlled emissions was reported to be in the order of 1.4 µg/m3, 1.4 µg/m3 and

0.55 µg/m3 respectively. The cumulative resultant post project baseline scenario will be

far below the stipulated NAAQ standards. These predicted concentrations will be 8 to 10

folds lower than that of the uncontrolled emission scenario.

Water and Wastewater Management Plan- the facility will be operated on dry fly ash

handling system and hence the overall water consumption will be limited to 2.5

m3/MWHR against 4 m3/MWHR in the case of conventional power plants in tropical

regions. Total fresh water demand in the facility will be in the order of 3265 m3/hr

(~78,400 m3/day). Necessary water allocation was granted by Government of Bihar.

Majority of the water will be used as make up for the cooling tower. The following

environmental management plans will be adopted: (1). Adopting good water quality for

cooling water make up there by reducing the blow-down losses, (2). Reuse of cooling

tower blow down for bottom ash handling, fly ash conditioning, make up to the

evaporation losses in the ash pond area etc. In order to achieve zero liquid discharge

(complete reuse of treated wastewater in the plant), suitably designed Reverse Osmos is

plant will be installed to treat the cooling tower blow down, (3) other stream

wastewater if any will be collected in a collection pit and will be subjected to

neutralization and will be reused for ash conditioning and bottom ash handling

operations,(4). Any excess utilized wastewater will be collected in a lined polishing

pond and will be reused in the plant based on the main plant demand, (5). Online

pollutant monitoring system will be installed on the treated wastewater line of the

polishing pond as per the CPCB guidelines, (6). About 70 m3/hr (~1700 m3/day)

sewage generated from the domestic needs (canteen, colony, toilets etc) will be treated





Page C9-260

in a dedicated sewage treatment plant and reused for greenbelt development, gardening

and horticulture applications within the project site.

9.3. Administrative Aspects

The key benefits of EMP are that it provides the organization with means of managing

and improving its environmental performance thereby allowing it to contribute to

better environmental quality. The other benefits include cost control and improved

relations with the stakeholders. EMP includes four major elements;

Commitment & Policy

Planning

Implementation

Measurement & Evaluation

9.3.1. Commitment & Policy

Project Proponent will strive to provide and implement the Environmental Management

Plan that incorporates all issues related to environmental and social components and

will comply with the suggestions given by the Ministry of Environment and Forests

(MoEF&CC) and Bihar State Pollution Control Board (BSPCB). In this regard, STPL has

well laid down Environment Policy which was approved by their Directors.

9.3.2. Planning

This includes identification of environmental impacts, and setting environmental

objectives. Environmental Management Plan would specifically consist of the following

and STPL is committed to follow the said plan in letter and in spirit. Pollution control

arrangements/ mitigation measures for different types/sources of pollution.

9.3.3. Implementation

The company believes in preservation of the Environment and will install and will

ensure efficient operation of its pollution control equipment/systems. Company will

ensure that trained manpower is available for operating, maintaining and documenting

the effective environmental operations.

9.3.4. Environmental Management System

Environmental Management Systems (EMS) is suggested for ensuring that the activities

and services of the region conform to the carrying capacity (supportive and assimilative





Page C9-261

capacity). This is based on Bureau of Indian Standard Specification IS:13967 (1993):

Environmental Management Systems - Specification (equivalent to ISO 14001).

Since this is more in line with the quality systems, it is recommended that the industry

shall improve EMS as outlined in the following sub-sections.

9.3.5. Environmental Management Records

STPL will maintain a well-established system of records to demonstrate compliance

with the environmental performance management system and the extent of

achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition to the other

records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records shall address the

following:

Details of failure in compliance and corrective action

Details of incidents and corrective action

Details of complaints and follow-up action

Appropriate contractor and supplier information

Inspection and maintenance reports

Product identification and composition data

Monitoring data

Environmental training records

Housekeeping

9.3.6. Environmental Management System Audits

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as

amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests in

April 1993, an Environmental Statement will be prepared annually at the industry level.

This includes the consumption of total resources (raw material and water per tonne of

product), quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water) discharged, quantity

of hazardous and solid waste generation, pollution abatement measures, conservation

of natural resources and cost of production vis-à-vis the investment on pollution

abatement. This may be an internal or external audit, but carried out impartially and

effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental

process and expertise in relevant disciplines is also required.





Page C9-262

The intention of this statement is:

To identify the process/production areas where resources can be used more

efficiently through a comparison with the figures of a similar industry (thereby

reducing the consumption per unit of product)

To determine the areas where waste generation can be minimised at source and

through end of pipe treatment (thereby reducing the wastes generated and

discharged per unit of product)

To initiate a self-correcting/improvement system through an internal analysis to

achieve cost reduction through choice of superior technology and more efficient

practices.

9.3.7. Environmental Management Cell

A permanent organizational set up will be formed by Project Proponent to ensure the

effective implementation of mitigation measures and to conduct environmental

monitoring. The major duties and responsibilities of Environmental Management Cell

will be as follows:

To implement the Environmental Management Plan

To ensure efficient operation and maintenance of pollution control devices

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations

To minimize environmental impacts of operations by strict adherence to the

EMP

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule

Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case

monitored results are above the specified limit

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable

environmental laws as ready reference

Maintain environment related records

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and monitoring

laboratories

Maintaining log of public complaints and the action taken





Page C9-263

9.3.7.1. Hierarchical Structure of EHS Management Cell

The proposed environmental management cell comprises of an environmental engineer

who will be supported by a team of executives to implement the safety and

environmental aspects of the company. The environmental engineer will be reporting to

the plant manager with regards to all compliances and management arrangements for

implementing the ISO 14001 and other regulatory compliances. A dedicated safety

engineer and social scientist also will be inducted to implement various safety and CSR

related aspects in the plant. The environment team will have the following

responsibilities:

Developing policy and procedures for implementing the environmental

management programs in the facility,

Monitoring and supervising the effectiveness of the pollution control systems

and water and waste minimization programs in the facility in close coordination

with the process and plant operational teams,

Undertaking the environmental monitoring programs as per the minimum

monitoring program suggested in this EIA report in consultation with State

Pollution Control Board,

Maintaining the environmental records, documentation and reporting the

environmental compliance status to the plant manager and pollution control

board and MOEF&CC Regional office from time to time as per the directions of

the regulations,

Identifying the environmental risks and hazards and near misses in the plant and

making corrective actions

Providing training to the employees and workers on the environmental and

safety related aspects, work permit systems and safety procedures etc as per the

company policy,

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important management tool for

ensuring sustainable operation of the proposed manufacturing unit. Records will be

maintained for regulatory, monitoring and operational KPIs.

Typical Environmental Management Plans for the proposed project during constru ction

and operation phase are summarized in Table 9.1and 9.2



Project No.PJ-ENVIR-2016323-735 Dated: 25th October 2016 Chapter 9-Environmental Management Plan

Page C9-264

Table 9-1 – Environmental Management Plan for the Proposed Project- Construction Phase

Impacting Activity

Identified Aspect Mitigation measures to be provided for

the proposed project - Action plan Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Transport of Construction

Materials -Construction

phase

Noise generation Periodic maintenance of vehicles is required

At Security Gate

Monthly during construction

Contractor Security In charge

Log Book

Dust generation

Covering construction material with tarpaulin sheets to prevent the material from being air borne.

Storage Area At all times during construction Phase

Contractor Site Engineer - Random Checks

Photographs with date – Monthly, Air monitoring records

The vehicle speed will be regul ated. Plant Area At all times during construction phase

Contractor Security In Charge – Random Checks

Penalty records for over speeding

The workers transporting materials will be provided with PPE to reduce impact of air borne dust on their health

Plant Area At all times during construction phase

Contractor Site Engineers – Random Checks

Log Book for distribution of PPE

Vehicular emissions

Periodic emission check for vehicles is required.

At Security Gate

At all times during construction phase

Contractor Pollution Under Control (PUC) Certificate

Copy of PUC Certificate

Construction Activities

Noise generation

Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) such as ear plugs and helmets will be provided for construction workers.



Log Book for distribution of PPE, training records

The working hours will be imposed on construction workers.


Contractor Site In charge – Fortnightly checks

Attendance register with In and Out timing

Dust generation

PPE in the form of nose masks shall be provided for construction workers.

Plant Area During Excavation and storing of raw materials


Log Book for distribution of PPE, training records

Use of water sprays to prevent the dust from being air borne.

Plant Area Once a day at the time of excavation and installation

Contractor Site Engineers Water Consumption, Log sheets, Air monitoring records

Air Emissions from construction machinery

Check and regular maintenance of construction machinery for emissions

Plant Area Check – Every week once and maintenance as and when required

EHS Department EHS Department - Every Fortnight

Check list for equipments, and maintenance records

Clean fuel will be used in D.G set (Bharat Stage IV)

D.G Set At all Times Contractor EHS and maintenance department

Analysis report of ambient air quality




Page C9-265

Impacting Activity

Identified Aspect Mitigation measures to be provided for

the proposed project - Action plan Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Spill of Construction material and paints

Spill management plan Within the plant

At all times EHS Department Periodic workplace monitoring

Spill management and reporting documents, raw material inventory,

Construction Activities

Sewage form the construction area

Channelization of sewage from construction area through network of drains

Table 9-2 – Environmental Management Plan for the Proposed Project- Operation Phase

Impacting Activity

Identified Aspect

Mitigation measures to be provided for the proposed project - Action plan

Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Operation of plant - Air

Environment

Emission at Source

Electrostatic Precipitators, FGD and Low NOx burners will be installed for controlling Particul ate Matter (PM), SO2 and NOx respectively to meet the new emissions standards stipulated for thermal power plants.

Project site

At all times during operation of power plant

EHS and maintenance department

Online stack emission monitoring systems will be installed. Stack monitoring and ambient air quality monitoring by authorized laboratories will be adopted on periodical basis as per state pollution control board directions.

Analysis reports of stack and ambient air

Stack of Adequate height of 275m as per the CPCB guidelines and environmental regulations.

Project site At the time of construction


Online Stack monitoring and ambient air quality monitoring by authorized laboratory

Analysis reports of stack and ambient air

Fugitive emissions

Covered belt conveyors to transport coal from stock yard to power plant will be installed at the plant site.

Project site

At all times during operation of boiler


Ambient air quality monitoring inside the plant by authorized laboratory

Analysis reports of ambient air quality monitoring

Adequate numbers of water sprinkling system at coal storage yard

At coal stack yard

At all times EHS department Ambient air quality monitoring inside the plant by authorized laboratory





Page C9-266

Impacting Activity

Identified Aspect



The sprinkling of water along the internal roads in the plant in order to control the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic

Inside pl ant At all times EHS department Ambient air quality monitoring inside the plant by authorized laboratory


Adequately designed greenbelt around the plant premises to be developed as per the EMP stated in this document.

Within the plant

To be developed in stages on inside and periphery of the power plant

EHS department Number of trees planted and area under green belt

Area statement, Log of trees planted and photographs

Loading and unloading of coal may lead to fugitive emissions.

Unloading of coal trucks will be carried out with proper care, avoiding dropping of the materials from height. The material will be moisten by sprinkling water while unloading, handling and during storage

Coal storage area

At all time during unloading

EHS department Ambient air quality monitoring inside the plant by authorized laboratory

Analysis reports of ambient air quality monitoring, water consumption

Operation of plant - Noise Environment

Generation from turbine generator room, ID fans and coal crushing, cooling towers

The turbine & generators will be provided with acoustic enclosures and housed in buildings that would considerably reduce the transmission of noise to the outside environment. Noise levels outside the TG room will be maintained less than 70 dB(A) to meet the noise standards for industrial areas.

Turbine and generators

At all times Maintenance and EHS Department

Noise level monitoring inside the plant and at site boundaries by authorized laboratory

Monthly preventive maintenance records

The steam generator draught fans, the electrostatic precipitators and the air heaters will be designed to limit noise emission as low as possible.

Steam generators, air heaters and ESP




Low noise fans will be selected for the cooling towers so that the noise levels at the facility boundary well below the stipulated day noise level of 70 dB(A) to meet the standards for the industrial areas.

Inside the plant

At all times Maintenance and operation teams

Checking of noise l evels within the facility and also mechanical preventive maintenance monitoring of the equipment.


Periodic maintenance of vehicles. At Security Gate

At all time Security Team Visual inspection by Security team

Log Book




Page C9-267

Impacting Activity

Identified Aspect



Greenbelt development around the plant boundary.

Inside the plant area

To be developed in stages on inside and periphery of the power plant

EHS Department Number of trees planted and area under green belt

Area statement, Log of trees planted and photographs

Providing Mufflers/Silencer Pads, Enclosures/rooms etc., to all noise generating machineries

High noise generating machineries



Analysis reports

Water and wastewater

environment

Water drawl from the river, pre-treatment, wastewater generation and reuse of treated wastewater

Water consumption in the pl ant will be maintained below 2.5 m3/MWHR as per the new power plant regulations by adopting various conservation methods and wastewater recycling programs. The facility will be adopting zero liquid discharge for their plant operations. A dedicated sewage treatment pl ant will be installed and treated sewage will be utilized for greenbelt and horticulture applications.

Within the plant

At all times Maintenance and EHS department

Online flow meters will be installed at the raw water intake, cooling tower make up and recycling water lines. Online COD, TDS and TSS meters will be installed on the wastewater utilized for greenbel t.

Monthly preventive maintenance records. Analysis reports of water quality and wastewater quality.

Fly ash generation

and utilization

Bottom ash and fly ash generation

Bottom ash will be stored in the ash pond and fly ash will be disposed to various agencies as per the MOUs signed. A suitably designed fly ash management plan and fly ash pond has been designed and presented in this EIA report.

Within the plant

All times Maintenance and EHS department

Test wells (ground water) will be installed at the fly ash pond area for monitoring the quality of the ground water from time to time.

Fly ash disposal records and ground water quality monitoring reports.

Hazardous waste

Used oils from the machines

Used oil will be collected in drums and will be disposed to authorized recycling vendors.

Within the plant

Periodical Maintenance and EHS department

-

Plant records and hazardous waste authorization from pollution control board.





Page C9-268

9.4. Fly Ash Utilization Program

Estimated quantity of ash produced from the proposed 2x660MW plant with 90 % PLF

will be in the order of 2.7 Million tons per annum when the plant is operated at 100%

Indian coal, whereas the same will be in the order of 0.45 Million Tons per year when

the plant is operated on imported coal during the first four years of plant operation. Fly

ash utilization plan is given in Table 9.3.

Table 9-3 Fly Ash Generation and Utilization Plan



Coal consumption in each 660MW unit TPH 425 262

Total Annual coal demand in 2x660MW MTPA 6.7 3.9


Total ash generation TPD 8364 1506

Total ash generation MTPA 2.7 0.45

Bottom as generation @ 15% of total ash

MTPA 0.40 0.07

Fly ash generation @ 85% of the total ash

MTPA 2.30 0.38

Fly ash utilization plan as per notification, MOEF&CC At 50% of fly ash generated to be utilized and disposed end of the 1st year operation

MTPA 1.17 0.19

Fly ash may be stored in ash pond at the end of 1st year of operation

MTPA 1.17 0.19

Fly ash generated to be utilized/disposed from the end of 2nd year

MTPA 1.76 0.28

Fly ash may be stored at the ash pond at the end 2st year

MTPA 0.59 0.1

100% fly ash generated to be utilized and disposed from end of 3rd year onwards

MTPA 2.35 0.38

Note: Unutilized fly ash in 1st and 2nd year will be disposed in from 4th year to 9th year

MTPA 1.76 0.28

Additional gypsum ash generated from FGD

MTPA 0.2 0.15

Net fly ash +gyspum ash to be disposed from 3rd year onwards

MTPA 2.54 0.53

For ash disposal from the proposed thermal power plant, about 282 acres of land is

identified within the project area, which is adequate for more than 30 years in the





Page C9-269

current scenario, as STPL has obtained tie-ups and expression of interests for the

disposal of 100% fly ash from the second year of operation of the power plant.

As per MOEF&CC latest notification, 100 percent fly ash utilization is to be achieved

progressively within 4 years starting with 50% in 1st year and 70% & 90% in 2nd &

3rd year respectively of plant commissioning. STPL has already signed with cement

plants, state road and building works departments and others to utilize about 3 Million

tons of fly ash per year. Hence the STPL will be able to achieve 100% fly ash utilization

from third year onwards. Since fly ash can act as impervious liner, therefore no

liner is required for storing the utilized fly ash during the first four years. Only bottom

ash lagoon shall be lined with impervious liner. To avoid fugitive ash dust emission

and for promoting vegetation cover, the final ash surface will be covered with 300 mm

thick earth cover.

STPL has obtained tie-ups and expression of interests with various institutions for the

disposal of fly ash as against the total fly ash generation of 2.7 Million tons per annum

(Table 9.4). Copies of the MOUs signed with various agencies are presented in

Annexure 8.

Table 9-4:Various Tie-ups for Fly Ash Utilization

Agency Quantity – Tie Up

Rural Works dept. Govt of Bihar Letter no. BRRDA(HQ)PMGSY-581/2015/65, Dated 07-01-2016

0.48

Office of the engineer in Chief cum Additional Commisisoner cum Special Secretary, Road Constriction Department, Govt. of Bihar,

Letter No. 11/Vividh-03-41/2015-192(E), dated 08-01-2016.

0.24

M/s. R.K Mishra Enterprises (Transportation agency of cement, fly ash, gypsum and other materials)

0.5

Lafarge Cement plant 0.8

Dalmiya Cement, 0.7

Global Infra Limited (Transportation agency of cement, fly ash, gypsum and other materials)

0.5

Total 3.22

Apart from the above tie-ups, STPL intends to make available the required quantity of

the fly ash to the local brick manufacturing facilities. Similar to other gangetic planes,

several small to medium size brick manufacturing facilities are located in 50Km radius





Page C9-270

of the project site. Fal-G technology has is effectively demonatrated for fly ash based

brick manufacturing that can utilize 60%to 70% of the brick with fly ash with lime and

gypsum added as binders. About 20% of fly ash will be provided free of cost to the brick

manufacturing units in the region.

Figure 9-1 Location of some of the Major Brick Manufacturing Units in the Region

Figure 9-2 Fly Ash Brick Manufacturing Units

Disposal for mine pit reclamation - As per the MOEF&CC notification, 2015 fly ash can

be disposed into mine pits for reclamation needs, where the quality o f fly ash is not





Page C9-271

important. A feasibility study for ash disposal in abandoned mine pit was conducted by

Central Mine Planning and Designing Institute (CMPDI) in South Balanda Open Cast

Project of Orissa. The study indicated that the ash disposal in the mine voids of South

Balanda is not likely to pose any significant environmental risk. It is a common fear of

leachability of trace metals into the underground water due to disposal of fly ash in the

abandoned mine pits. To determine the mobility of trace metals from fly ash central

Mine Planning & Design Institute, Ranchi has conducted a survey in Orissa this regard.

They concluded that the leaching of trace metals from coal ash will not pollute the

underground / surface water sources as all toxic elements are present in concentration

less than the limits prescribed by Bureau of Indian Standards (ref)18. The STPL may

approach various mining companies in the 200 Km radius the proposed thermal power

plant for exploring the possibilities of utilizing the fly ash for open cast and

underground mine reclamation and back-filling operations.

Figure 9-3 Use of Fly ash for Underground Mine Reclamation (ref)19


Considering these predicted impacts, a comprehensive green belt development plan are

proposed which will improve the existing status of ecosystems and associated

biodiversity in the nearby area. These habitat improvement efforts shall not only cover

the project core area but adjoining areas as well.

Emission from the stack will be controlled as well as dispersed through appropriate

design. As ambient air quality will be within limits, no active damage to the vegetation is

18 http://www.cesorissa.org/pdf/newsletter3.pdf 19 http://ismenvis.nic.in/Database/FLY-ASH-UTILISATION_3144.aspx

http://www.cesorissa.org/pdf/newsletter3.pdf

http://ismenvis.nic.in/Database/FLY-ASH-UTILISATION_3144.aspx





Page C9-272

expected. As all the effluents will be treated to conform to prescribed limits and reused

within the facility and no wastewater discharge will be allowed outside the premises,

the impacts on aquatic life of the River system will be unaffected due to the operation of

the power plant. STPL intends to develop greenbelt in an area of 178 Acres of land

within the plant with a tree density of 1000 per ha. Native species will be planted as per

the in consultation with district forest officials. Typical plant layout showing the

greenbelt area is presented in Figure 9.4.

9.5.1. Proposed Monitoring Mechanism for Conservation Activities

A special emphasis on ecological conservation shall be given by extending

special responsibility to senior environment authority within the management

The wildlife conservation activates under Green CSR can be taken up in

consultation with district forest department officials.

The senior personal responsible for the conservation of ecology shall report

directly to the head of the organization.

Substantial budget be allocated to carryout ecological conservation activities by

the company





Page C9-273

Figure 9-4 Greenbelt Development Map

Greenbelt area





Page C9-274

9.6. Green belt Development

Development of a greenbelt with suitable plant species around the source of emission

will mitigate the air pollution. Selection of suitable plant species for a greenbelt is very

important. Based on these indices, the most appropriate plant species were identified

for the development of a greenbelt around the thermal power plant to mitigate air

pollution. Among the 30 different plant species evaluated during the research studies,

Mangifera indica was identified as keystone species which is coming under the excellent

category.

The main objective of the green belt is to provide a barrier between the plant and the

surrounding areas. The green belt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and to

attenuate the noise generated in the plant apart from improving the aesthetics of the

plant site. In order to control the industrial pollutants, dense tree plantations are

necessary.

As the sedimentation pattern of the pollutants, ambient and ground level concentration

of pollutants are usually determined by the direction and speed of prevailing wind and

vertical and horizontal thermal gradients prevailing in the area, the belt of plantations

will be designed accordingly. The width of the tree belt depends on the gaseous

emissions, availability of land, site characteristics etc.

Geometry of planting of tree is important in order to have effective wind break by the

plantation. For an effective green belt, a mixture of tree species is necessary and some

shrubs and grasses shall be inter-cropped. As far as possible, there shall be no gaps in

the green belt. Where opening is imperative, alignments to roads shall be such that open

gaps are prevented to overcome funneling action of wind. The interspaces shall be

planted with grasses, bushes and hedges. Thus, the green belt provided would have a set

of rows of trees planted in such a way that they form an effective barrier between the

plant and the surroundings.

A 100 m wide greenbelt, consisting of at least 3 tiers around plant boundary will be

developed as greenbelt and green cover as per CPCB/MoEF&CC, New Delhi guidelines.

The plant density of 2,500 trees per hectare with local native species will be

implemented. The expenditure on development and maintenance of green belt is of

revenue nature and sufficient fund shall be provided to meet the requirement. The





Page C9-275

plantation schedule will be completed within five years from the construction period of

the project.

While selecting the plant species for the proposed green belt, the following points shall

be taken into consideration: • Should be a fast growing type; • Should have a thick

canopy cover; • Should be perennially green; • Should be preferably of native origin;

and • Should have a large leaf area index, Mitigate gaseous emissions, Have sufficient

capability to arrest accidental release, Effective in wastewater reuse, Maintain the

ecological balance, Control noise pollution to a considerable extent. Prevent soil erosion.

Improve the Aesthetics.

Taking the above-mentioned criteria into consideration, the proposed green belt would

be covering around 33% of the total area. The green belt would be consisting of shrubs,

trees, avenue trees, revenue trees, crops and potted plants. All the species sugge sted are

pollution tolerant, besides having an aesthetic appeal.

9.6.1. Criteria for Selection of Species (Selection of species done as per Green Belt

Development Plan given by CPCB manual, MoEF&CC)

Tolerance to inorganic chemicals, Vertical root development system, Locally available,

Fast growing and perennial, Low water requirement, Availability of seed material;

Tolerance to pollution and specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to

ecophysiological conditions; Rapid growth; Capacity to endure water stress and climatic

extremes after initial establishment; Differences in height, growth habits and bole

shapes; Pleasing appearance; Capacity to selectively concentrate some materials from

the surroundings; Providing shades; Large bio-mass and leaves number to provide

fodder and fuel; Ability of fixing atmospheric Nitrogen; and Improving waste lands.

To undertake plantation on site for different purposes, following steps will be involved

• Raising seedlings in nursery;

• Preparation of pits and preparing them for transfer of seedlings; and

• After-care i.e. nurturing the sapling for proper growth.

Raising Seedlings in Nursery

Seedlings should be raised in nurseries. Adequate number of surplus seedlings should

be available considering 10% mortality in seedlings. Healthy seedlings should be ready

for transfer to permanent location before rainy season.





Page C9-276

Preparation of Pits and preparing them for Transfer of Seedlings

Standard pit size would be 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm;

The distance between pits would vary depending on their location;

The pits should be filled using good soil from nearby agricultural fields (3 parts)

and farm yard manure (1 part);

Rhizobium commercial preparation (1 kg/1000 kg);

BHC powder, if the soil inhabits white ants (Amount variable); and

The pits should be watered prior to plantation of seedlings.

A model plan suitable for plantation in the site

Around 20 plants were suggested under the green belt plan and around 22 lakhs

financial budget is proposed to develop the habitat. As given in the Table 9.5, species

like Mangifera indica, Terminalia tomentosa, Acacia niloFtica, Tectona grandis, Acacia

auriculiformis, Pongamia pinnata, Butea monosperma, Dendrocalamus strictus, Delonix

regia, Azadirachta indica, can be raised in large number towards all the directions near

the plant boundary. Species like Leucaena leucocephala, Agave Americana, Cassia fistula,

Cassine albens, Dalbergia paniculata, Ficus benghalensis, Ficus religiosa, Ficus glomerata,

Limonia acidissima, Phyllanthus emblica, Strychnos potatorum, Pterocarpus santalinus,

Anona squamosa, Bauhinia purpurea, Collistemon linearis, Bauhinia acuminate can be

raised in buffer areas. Small herbs, ornamental species and common flowering plants as

per the availability can also be raised near the paths and corridors of the existing

buildings and townships.

Table 9-5 List of plants identified for greenbelt and plantations within the Power plant area (Three tier model along the fencing wall)

Botanical name No. of Trees

Family Importance

Acacia auriculiformis 100 Mimosaceae Avenue tree

Mangifera indica 200 Anacardiaceae Best tree for Power plants which has high APTI value.

Albizia lebbeck 50 Mimosaceae Shade, timber and scented flowers

Azadirachta indica 100 Meliaceae Neem oil & neem products Callistemon citrinus 50 Myrtaceae Ornamental tree

Calophyllum inophyllum 150 Clusiacaceae Multipurpose

Cassia fistula 150 Caesalpiniaceae Ornamental and bark is a source of tannin





Page C9-277

Botanical name No. of Trees

Family Importance

Casuarina equisetifolia 150 Casuarinaceae Pulp and construction material

Cocos nucifera 150 Arecaceae Grown commercially for coconut fruit

Delonix regia 100 Caesalpiniaceae Ornamental avenue tree Dendrocalamus strictus 100 Poaceae Bamboo

Ficus benghalensis 100 Moraceae Shade and a source of food for birds

Ficus racemosa 50 Moraceae Edible fruits

Ficus religiosa 50 Moraceae Shade and a source of food for

birds

Holoptelia integrifolia 50 Ulmaceae Fibre and timber Peltophorum pterocarpum

50 Caesalpiniaceae Shade

Polyalthia longifolia 100 Annonaceae Avenue tree

Polyalthia pendula 150 Annonaceae Majestic tree with drooping

branches Pongamia pinnata 200 Papilionaceae Source of biodiesel

Samania saman 200 Mimosaceae Shade, timber and fruits are a

good live stock feed.

Table 9-6 Proposed financial Budget for the Green belt development (Rs in Lakhs)

S.No Component First year

Second year

Third year

Fourth year

Fifth year

Total

1 Plant seeds/ saplings 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.0

2 Pits and watering 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 2.0

3 Regular maintenance 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 2.0

4 Transportation 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

Grand Total 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0

Table 9-7 Proposed financial Budget for the habitat conservation (Rs in Lakhs)

S.No Component First year

Second year

Third year

Fourth year

Fifth year

Total

1 Plant seeds/ saplings 5.0 1.5 - - - 6.5

2 Ecologist 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 - 10.0

3 Regular maintenance 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 2.5 4 Transportation 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

5 Conservation of Blackbuck

0.8 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2.0

Grand Total 9.0 5.0 3.5 3.5 1.0 22.0





Page C9-278

9.7. Rain Water Harvesting Programs

Lots of surface and subsurface recharging measures are possible depending upon the

site conditions. The specific recharge measures are to be selected depending on the soil

characteristics, lithology and nature of the aquifer material, pre and post monsoon

rainfall, ground water level and so on. The ground water level in and around the project

site is 3 to 4 m below ground level. According to the slope of the roof, the sump location

has been identified. The roof area and the normal monthly rainfall have been

considered for designing the capacity of the rain water harvesting sump.

9.7.1. Rainfall Runoff Estimations

The estimation of Run-Off from the project site has been assessed. Based on vacant, roof

top area and the monthly rainfall and Run-Off, the storage structures and percolation

pond have been contemplated. For the estimation, 5 years monthly normal rainfall has

been considered. The pre and post project Run-Off from the project site has been

estimated based on rational method. The Co-efficient used to estimate the Run-Off from

the different surfaces is as follows. The co-efficient are considered are as per the

MoEF&CC and CGWA Guidelines: (1) Roof Area: 0.95, (2). Asphalted and Paved Area:

0.85, (3). Green Belt Area: 0.20, (4). Open and Vacant Area: 0.30 respectively. Volume of

rainwater that can be collected from the project site has been estimated from the

monthly normal rainfall. Vacant & Green belt area, Roof top area and paved area of the

project site have been considered for the run off estimation and conservation measures.

Based on the data presented in the DPR, the proposed power plant site area break is

observed as follows:

Description Area in Sq.m Roof Area 837700 Road / Paved Area 2792333 Green Belt 1092652

Total 4722685





Page C9-279

the possible runoff from the project site during the pre-construction and post

construction phases have been estimated using monthly rainfall and runoff coefficients

of the specific land use pattern in the area. The volume of runoff from the project site is

estimated as 1.3Million m3 per year and the same will be increased to 3.4 Million m3

per year after the project is implemented. This is mainly due to the increased paved

surface areas during the post project scenario. Summary of the estimated runoff

quantities are presented in Table 9.8 and Table 9.9. Surplus Run-Off of 2 million m3

per year of can be considered for rainwater harvesting to maintain the hydrological

balance.

Table 9-8 Pre project Runoff Estimations

Pre Project Run-Off

Month Rainfall

(mm) Area (Sq.m)

Run-Off Coefficient

Monthly Pre Project Run-Off (m3)

January 13.7 4722686 0.3 19410 February 29.6 4722686 0.3 41937

March 2.8 4722686 0.3 3967 April 84.2 4722686 0.3 119295

May 148.9 4722686 0.3 210962 June 82.3 4722686 0.3 116603

July 201.8 4722686 0.3 285911 August 202.3 4722686 0.3 286620

September 99.3 4722686 0.3 140689

October 35.6 4722686 0.3 50438 November 9.5 4722686 0.3 13460

December 9.2 4722686 0.3 13035 Total Annual Pre Project Run-Off in Cum 1,302,328

Table 9-9 Predicted Post Project Run-Off from the Project Area

Predicted Post Project Run-Off from the Project Site Location Area (Sq m) Run-Off Coefficient

Roof Area (m²) 837700 0.95

Asphalt area and Paved area (m²)

2792333 0.85

Green belt Area (m²)

1092652 0.2

Month Rainfall

(mm)

Run-Off

Roof area

(CUM)

Run-Off Asphalt /

Paved area

(CUM)

Run-Off Green

belt area (CUM)

Run-Off Open area

(CUM)

Total Monthly Run-Off (CUM)

January 13.7 10903 32517 2994 0 46413 February 29.6 23556 70255 6469 0 100280





Page C9-280

March 81.5 64859 193439 17810 0 276108 April 84.2 67008 199847 18400 0 285255 May 148.9 118497 353412 32539 0 504448 June 82.3 65496 195338 17985 0 278818

July 201.8 160595 478969 44099 0 683664 August 202.3 160993 480156 44209 0 685358 September 99.3 79024 235687 21700 0 336411 October 35.6 28331 84496 7780 0 120607

November 9.5 7560 22548 2076 0 32184 December 9.2 7321 21836 2010 0 31168

Total 997.9 794144 2368499 218072 0 3380714 Total Predicted Annual Run-Off from Different Surfaces in Cum 3380714

9.7.2. Rain Water Harvesting – Rooftop runoff collection and recharge

It has been estimated that the roof top runoff collection is estimated to be in the order of

15,000 m3 per year. It has been suggested to construct ten sumps (Size 5mX10mX2.5m

each) with a total holding capacity of 1250 m3 to capture the roof water for further

reuse in the process. The surplus runoff the proposed sumps are estimated and

presented in the table 9.9. The rainwater that is collected from the roof shall be passed

through a filter media with the following dimensions:

The size of the multilayer vertical filter is 2m X 2m X 1.2m

The outlet pipes from the roof area will be connected with 115 mm dia PVC pipe

allowing the water to pass through the filter media before storing in the sump

Table 9-10 Calculation of Rainwater Harvesting

Rainwater Harvesting scheme for the proposed site - Roof Top Collection

Location Area (sq m) Run-

OffCoefficient

Total Roof Area 837700 0.95

Actual Sump Capacity (6 Sumps- Each 125 Cum Capacity

m3 1250

Harvestable water m3 794144

Water harvested m3 15000 Surplus outflow from Sump m3 779144

Month Rain fall

(mm) Harvestable Water (m3)

Sump Storage

(m3)

Surplus out flow from Sump, (m3)

January 13.7 10903 1250 9653

February 29.6 23556 1250 22306 March 81.5 64859 1250 63609

April 84.2 67008 1250 65758





Page C9-281

May 148.9 118497 1250 117247 June 82.3 65496 1250 64246 July 201.8 160595 1250 159345 August 202.3 160993 1250 159743

September 99.3 79024 1250 77774 October 35.6 28331 1250 27081 November 9.5 7560 1250 6310 December 9.2 7321 1250 6071

TOTAL 997.9 794144 15000 779144

9.7.3. Storage cum Percolation Pond

The surplus Run-Off after roof top collection, green belt, asphalt area has been

estimated as 0.78, 0.2 and 2.4 Million m3 per year respectively. Hence the total runoff

will be 3.4 Million m3 per year. Five storm water collection ponds with a total capacity

of 4500 m3 may be developed. It has been estimated that about 27,000 m3 of runoff can

be recharged through these collection sumps.

9.8. Renewable Energy and Reduction in Carbon Footprint

Sustainable power generation has been one of the prime objectives of STPL. Towards

achieving this objective, various measures shall be introduced to ensure minimum

degradation of the environment due to the operation of the power station. As a part of

the agreement under Kyoto Protocol the CDM has been introduced to enable

trading of Certified Emission Reduction (CER) between the developed countries

and the developing countries. Although, this issue is being exhaustively deliberated to

establish long ranging solutions, accordingly, it is proposed to have supercritical boilers

at the proposed Power Project. In view of the increased efficiency (2.4%) of super -

critical boiler as compared to sub-critical boiler, the coal consumption per unit of

electricity generation would be lower with consequent reduction in CO2 emissions.

The reduction in CO2 emissions would be of the order of 0.26 million tons per year. For

the entire life of the plant (i.e. 25 years), it would be of the order of about 6.5 million

tons. Since the super-critical technology is still under implementation stage in India,

operation of super-critical boilers using the low grade Indian coal is challenging

and technology barriers will have to be overcome. Investment costs for plant with

super-critical boilers is higher as compared to the plant with sub-critical boilers.

The Solar Photo Voltaic (PV) installation on Rooftop of various buildings of Thermal

Power Plant shall be carried out preferably on shadow free area in such a way that the





Page C9-282

generation is maximized on each building Rooftop suitable for installation of Solar PV

power plants. List of buildings identified for installation of rooftop Solar PV power

are as follow.

- Main Power House

- Stores

- CHP Control Room

- Workshop

- Ash System Buildings

- Admin Building

- Canteen Building, Service

- Service Building

- Fire Station Building

- Fuel Oil buildings

- CW Pump House

The estimated capacity available on rooftops and is approximately 1200 KW+250 kW

(future). The final plant capacity shall be as per detailed approved engineering design of

each of the buildings

9.9. Occupational Health Facility

The Ministry of Labour and Employment, Government of India has a nodal organization

viz. Directorate General Factory Advice Service and Labour Institutes (DGFASLI) in

dealing with Occupational Safety and Health issues in Industries. The Directorate

General Factory Advice Service and Labour Institutes (DGFASLI) is the technical arm of

the Ministry on matters connected with Occupational Health in the manufacturing and

port sectors.

The Factories Act, 1948 provides for appointment of qualified Medical Practitioners and

Certifying Surgeons to examine young persons engaged in dangerous manufacturing

processes and to ensure medical supervision in case of illness due to the nature of

manufacturing processes. The Factories Act, 1948 also provides for notification of

certain occupational diseases as listed in the Third Schedule of the Act. As per Section

90 of the Factories Act, 1948, the State Govt. is vested with the powers to appoint a





Page C9-283

Competent Person to conduct inquiry into the causes of any accident or notifiable

diseases.

The following measures needs to be implemented in the work places to enhance

occupational health:

1. Identify and involve workers in assessing workplace risks,

2. Assess and consider employees' needs when planning and organising work,

3. Provide advice, information and training to employees, as well as mechanisms

for employee feedback such as a suggestion scheme,

4. Occupational health surveillance and Occupational health audit, to develop a

system of creating up to date data base on mortality, and morbidity due to

Occupational diseases and use it for performance monitoring of the same and

5. Extending support to the state government for effective enforcement of the

health provisions stipulated under section 41F of the Factory Act by equipping

them with work environment monitoring technologies

The occupational health safety system will be headed by a competent and qualified

safety office that will be supported by a team of safety volunteers from each plant and

department within the facility. The safety team will take up a detailed task based risk

assessment studies and will develop task based safety procedures and wo rk permit

systems. The safety team should record the near misses in the plant and take necessary

corrective action to minimize the occupational risks

STPL will be equipped with a full-fledged Occupational Health Centre within the plant

premises as mandated under The Factories Act, 1948. Occupational health centre will be

developed consisting the following facilities:

1. A full time doctor shall be appointed to monitor the day-to-day occupational

health aspects and also to provide medical advice to the workers, employees and

residents of the colony,

2. Minimum facilities such as oxygen cylinder for emergency medical use, two bed

clean room for first aid applications, first aid kits as per the Factories act,

3. ECG and X-Ray facilities,

4. Peak Expiratory flow Meter to check the lung function





Page C9-284

In addition company will have tie up with ESIC hospitals in the vicinity if available and

the specialty hospitals in Buxar.

As a part of the surveillance program, the following minimum medical expansion will be

undertaken during the pre-employment phase: 1. General physical examination and

blood pressure, 2. X-Ray of chest & ECG, 3. Sputum examination, 4. Detailed routine

blood & urine examination, 5. Audiometry and 5. Spirometry.

As a part of the routine and annual medical examinations on the persons working in the

high noise generating areas, stress areas and dust exposure areas, a comprehensive

surveillance program will be adopted. Some of the good management practices are

suggested in Table 9.11 and 9.12.

Table 9-11 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Program

Age (yrs) Preriodicity Duration of Exposure

Periodicity

< 30 yrs Once in five years < 10 yrs Once in five years

31-40 Once in four years 10 to 20 Once in four years 41-50 Once in three years 21-30 Once in three years

> 51 Once a year > 31 Once a year

Table 9-12 Suggested Medical Tests under Occupational Health Surveillance Program

S.No Disorder Tests to be conducted

1 Heart Diseases ECG, Blood for Lipid Profile, Stress Test, 2D-Echo and other required Tests

2 Anemia Hb%, TC,DC, ESR & Stool for Occult Blood, Ova and Cyst 2 Lung Diseases Sputum, X-Ray Chest, Spirometery

4 Diabetes Random Blood sugar, Urine sugar, if positive, BSL-Fasting/PPBS iabetic profile

5 Hypertension Blood Pressure reading, If required Renal profile + ECG and stress test.

6 Urine Examination

Routine and Microscopic

Medical records - A record-keeping system for holding results of medical examinations

and reports of symptoms will be needed as part of the health surveillance scheme.

These are confidential medical records relating to individuals. As part of the health

surveillance programme, workers should be informed of the confidential results of





Page C9-285

each assessment and of any implications of the findings, such as the likely effects of

their continuing to work with vibration.

9.10. Corporate Social Responsibility

9.10.1. CSR Programs carried out by STPL

Various CSR activities are carried out in the vicinity of the project site for the period of

three years. The presently the CSR implementation area is concentrated to the adjacent

villages to the proposed project site. Photographs of the CSR program carried by STPL

are given in Figure 9.5 and the expenditure spent for CSR is given in Table 9.13.

Agriculture Training Camps Merit Scholarship Programs

Donation to Prime Minister Relief Fund Health Camp Programs





Page C9-286

Eye camp and Spectacles Distribution Mobile Heath Facility

Figure 9-5 CSR Programs Carried by STPL

Table 9-13 Expenditure on CSR Activities Carried out

S.N. Activity Village/Tehsil Name Expenditure (Rs. In Lakh)

No. of Beneficiaries

I Health & Hygiene

1 Mobile Medical Services

(Banarpur, Sikroul, Chunni, K.N.P.)

56 33,533

2 Health Camp 10 Villages 9 3,627

3 Materials to PHC Chausa

Chausa Village 0.15 -

II Education & Skill Development

4 SJVN Silver Jubliee Merit Scholarship

Buxar Distt.

2014 7.2 25

2015 7.27 45

2016 20.4 85

5

Training and Agricultural Equipment to Farmers

Banarpur 2015 0.2 200

6

Skill Development Training for Unemployed Youth through CIDC, Faridabad

3 Panchayats (Banarpur, Sikroul & Chunni)

2016 19.43 47

III Infrastructure Development

7 PCC of Road 1 Panchayat 2016 10 -

8 Instalation of Hand Pump

2 Panchayat 2016 20 -

IV Miscellaneous

9 Grant for Ex-Serviceman

Buxar District 2014 0.1 -





Page C9-287

S.N. Activity Village/Tehsil Name Expenditure (Rs. In Lakh)

No. of Beneficiaries

10 Donation to CM Relief Fund for the victims of Earthquake

Bihar 2015 25 -

Total 174.75 -

9.10.2. Proposed Need Based CSR Programs

The proposed CSR programs are based on the felt needs and socioeconomic indicators

of the study area. The seven project affected villages namely Banarpur, Sikroul,

Khorampur, Kochadih, Mohanpurwa, Bechanpurwa and Akhouripur shall be given more

importance for the implementation of CSR programs during the initial stage and during

the later stage, the implementation area can be expanded to the other parts of the study

area. The proposed CSR Programs can be grouped into the following subheadings.

Piped Drinking Water Facility: Most of the villages in the study area are not

having access to the safe drinking water facilities and are sourcing water from the

distance places. Providing piped drinking water facilities to the villages is very

necessary

Sanitation Programs: Within the project affected villages the rate of population

accessed to sanitation facilities are less than 20% and there is no public sanitation

facilities are available in any of the villages.

Promotion of Sanitation programs through construction of Individual

Toilet facilities and Public Sanitation facilities with adequate water

supply.

Providing Awareness campaign on Sanitation, Health & Hygiene etc

Education Promotion Programs: Most of the project affected villages are

having access to the only primary schools and middle schools. Under the CSR

program higher level school construction within the villages and strengthening

the existing school infrastructure facilities such as Sanitation facilities, Drinking

water facility, etc.

Irrigation Development Programs: The major source of the income in the

study area is through Agriculture labors, labors, etc. As there is a huge scarcity of

irrigation facilities agriculture is not extensively carried out. Promoting





Page C9-288

irrigation facility such as lift irrigation systems from Ganga River, Building

canals, etc can be imparted.

Health Promotion Program: There is no government health facility adjacent to

the proposed project site. The people from the affected villages are availing

health facility at private clinics at Yadam mode. Providing health facility adjacent

to the project site, conducting health camps, promoting health care facilities

through mobile clinics, etc can be considered under the CSR program.

Infrastructure Development programs: The study area is very poor in rural

infrastructure facilities such as poor street lighting facilities, drainage facilities,

poor connectivity with banking networks, Health facilities, earth roads, etc.

Development of these infrastructure facilities can be included under the CSR

programs.

Road Development

Solar Street Lighting

Irrigation Canals

Bore Wells and Drinking water Facilities

School Building Construction

Skill Development Programs: Majority of the population in the study area are

dependent on wage employment and as agriculture labors. The educated youth

are migrating to the nearest town for seeking employment. Majority of the land

owners whose land been acquired are in requirement of employment

opportunities in the project. Providing suitable Skill development programs can

generate local labor force required for the upcoming project.

Various Skill Development programs can be taken:

For Men: Auto Servicing and repairing, Plumbing & Fitter, Building

construction, Mechanic, Motor vehicle, Electrician, TV/Radio Repairing,

Computer and IT, Machinery work, Horticulture, Poultry, Dairy, Poultry, etc.

For Women: Handicraft, Food processing, Computer and Information &

communication technology, Hospitality management, Knitting/Embroidery,

Mid-wifery, Goatery/Piggery, Bee keeping, Tailoring





Page C9-289

Environment Protection program: In addition to the green development

programs social forestry can be promoted as part of the CSR program by

afforestation program in the public places, road sides, river banks,

government waste lands etc. Employing the local labor force for the program

will generate employment opportunities in the area.

Figure 9-6 Proposed Village Specific CSR Program

9.10.3. Eligible Development Programs under Companies Act 2013

Ministry of Corporate Affairs given list of eligible CSR activities under Companies Act

2013, the following are the list of Development Activity listed under Schedule VII of Act.

H

E

S

D

E

Health Promotion Programs

Education Promotion Programs

Sanitation Programs

Drinking Water Agriculture Promotion Programs

I

E

SP

H

SK

Infrastructure Facilities

Skill Development Programs

Sports Promotion

A





Page C9-290

i. Eradicating Hunger, Poverty and Malnutrition, Promoting health care including

Preventive Health Care and Sanitation including to the Swachh Bharat Kosh and

making available Safe Drinking Water

ii. Promoting Education, including Special Education and Employment Enhancing

Vocation Skills Especially among Children, Women, Elderly, and the Differently-

Abled and Livelihood Enhancement Projects

iii. Promoting Gender Equality, Empowering Women, setting up Homes and Hostels

for Women and Orphans, setting up Old Age Homes, Day Care Centers and such

other Facilities for Senior Citizens and measures for Reducing Inequalities faced

by Socially and Economically Backward Groups

iv. Ensuring Environmental Sustainability, Ecological Balance, Protection of Flora

and Fauna, Animal Welfare, Agro-forestry, Conservation of Natural Resources

and Maintaining Quality of Soil, Air and Water including contribution to Clean

Ganga Fund.

v. Protection of National Heritage, Art and Culture Including Restoration of

Buildings and sites of Historical Importance and Works of Art, setting up Public

Libraries, Promotion and development of Traditional Arts and Handicrafts

vi. Measures for the benefit of Armed Forces Veterans, War Widows and their

Dependents

vii. Training to Promote Rural Sports, Nationally Recognized Sports, Paralympic

sports and Olympic sports

viii. Contribution to the Prime Minister's National Relief Fund or any other fund set

up by the Central Government for socio-economic development and relief and

welfare of the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes, other backward classes,

minorities and women

ix. Contributions or funds provided to technology incubators located within

academic institutions which are approved by the Central Government

x. Rural Development Projects

xi. Slum Area Development

9.10.4. CSR Budget

The capital CSR budgets of Rs. 61 Cr. had been embarked for the local Community

development within the vicinity of the study area as budget classification given below in





Page C9-291

Table 9.14. The capital budget is arrived by considering minimum of 0.6% of the total

project cost.

Table 9-14 CSR Budget

S.No CSR Programs Budget (Rs. in Lakhs)

Y 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 Y 5 Y 6 Y 7 Y 8 Y 9 Y 10 Total 1 Sanitation 31 30.5 45.8 45.8 45.8 61 76.3 91.5 91.5 91.5 610

2 Health Promotion 46 45.8 68.6 68.6 68.6 91.5 114 137 137 137 915

3 Education 46 45.8 68.6 68.6 68.6 91.5 114 137 137 137 915

4 Agriculture Promotion

61 61 91.5 91.5 91.5 122 153 183 183 183 1220

5 Infrastructure Projects

76 76.3 114 114 114 153 191 229 229 229 1525

6 Skill Development Project

46 45.8 68.6 68.6 68.6 91.5 114 137 137 137 915

7 Total 305 305 458 458 458 610 763 915 915 915 6100

9.10.4.1. CSR Programs Implementation Strategies

9.10.4.1.1. Community Development Organization

This section of the report presents the strategy to be followed in implementing various

pre-defined CSR Plans. For this, a universally accepted principles recommended by

World Bank Group (WBG) (ref)20 have been referred. Once the key community

development areas have been identified, the critical aspects to be addressed are - when

to invest in communities, how to invest, constitution of the implementing team and how

to monitor the effectiveness of the program.

9.10.4.1.2. Formation of Core CSR Management Team

The first step in the community investment programs is to form a central CSR

management team within STPL, which shall be supported by a group of social scientists

headed by a functional head to implement and monitor the overall program. The

primary responsibilities of the central CSR management team is to define the specific

yearly investment programs, identifying various vehicles and appointing stake-holders

to successfully implement the individual schemes, allocating and disbursing funds to the

respective stake-holders and implementation agencies in appropriate time, periodical

interactions with communities and understand the effectiveness of the overall 20 Strategic Community Investment, A Good Practice Handbook for Companies Doing Business in Emerging

Markets, International Finance Corporation





Page C9-292

programs and finally undertake audits through external agencies to assess the adequacy

of the implementation strategies to meet the specified objectives. A clearly defined

community investment plan policy shall be developed by STPL every year to define the

objectives, targets, roles and responsibilities of the individual stake-holders. The policy

should be developed based on the following key performance objectives:

Set out a 3-5 year plan for the company’s community investments

Identify target stakeholder groups and specify eligibility criteria for each of the

identified scheme

Establish an iterative process of engagement with local stakeholders and partners

on community investment

Draw on the company’s core competencies and resources to support communities

Promote cross-functional coordination and accountability for supporting

community investment objectives

Identify the implementation model and decision-making/governance structures

Define roles and responsibilities, budget, scope, and timeline

Describe how project results will be monitored and communicated

9.10.4.1.3. Identifying and Nominating the Implementing Agencies

Assessing who is who and which organizations could be potential partners for

community development programs is an important part of understanding the local

context. Partnerships are a cornerstone of strategic community development program.

Ideally, they should be pursued in the early planning stages as a part of a company’s

sustainability and exit strategies. Wherever possible, it is good practice to explore

working through existing reputed Non Governmental Organizations (NGO) or programs

before creating new ones. These agencies can be selected based on the following

criteria: Ability to reach the local people and areas, thematic areas of expertise - health,

capacity building, sanitation, etc. Delivery capacity, including staffing, existing

relationships, contacts, and networks with local areas and communities, Core values

(which should be compatible with the company’s objectives and principles) reputation

and track record.





Page C9-293

9.10.4.1.4. Constituting Village Development Committees

The key beneficiaries of the community development programs are the needy local

villagers. Therefore, the local communities shall be completely involved in various

designated programs. It has been recommended to form local village bodies such as

youth association groups, fishermen association group, women group, village develop

group, etc. Each of these groups will be defined with the basic constitution of the

committee, specific roles and responsibilities. Each group should comprise of at least

three members from various sections of the village. The roles and responsibilities of

these groups is to undertake awareness programs among the villagers about the

respective schemes, providing local support while implementing the schemes in

association with the nominated implementing agency or NGO, etc., providing feedback

to STPL on the overall progress of the scheme, grievances, if any and suggestion and

recommendations for the effective implementation of the schemes. Monthly progress

review meetings with respective stakeholders of the individual schemes are essential to

ensure smooth implementation of the designated schemes.

9.10.4.1.5. Fund Allocation and Disbursement

Based on the well planned community development programme, adequate annual

budget shall be allocated for community development plan and the same shall be

credited in a dedicated account to ensure continuous flow of funds throughout the year

without any interruption. Required funds for the respective programs can be allocated

on a monthly basis to the nominated implementing agencies based on the monthly work

progress reviews with respective stake holders. An external CSR consultant can be

nominated for project cost estimations, verification of the schemes proposed and also to

monitor the overall programs.

An implementation or delivery model is the organizational structure through which a

company carries out its community investment program or supports others in doing so.

In practice, many companies use “hybrid” approaches—a combination of different

mechanisms to deliver their programs. The following schemes can be adopted for

effective community development investment.

In-house Implementation - Company creates an internal department or unit to

work directly with communities to design and implement community





Page C9-294

development schemes. Schemes for developing infrastructure such as roads,

sanitation facilities, construction of buildings, hospitals, etc. can be taken up

under this mode.

Company Foundation - Company establishes an independent foundation as a

separate legal entity to carry out its community development programs.

Foundations can have grant-making authority (i.e., financing of community

development programs implemented by others) or serve as an implementing

function (implementing their own projects and programs).

Third-party Implementation - Company engages a third party, such as NGO or

group of NGOs, to work with local communities in designing and implementing

schemes or it supports an existing initiative being implemented by others.

Multi- Stakeholder Partnership - Company establishes or joins a voluntary or

collaborative alliance, network, or partnership. This implies cooperation

between two or more partners in a manner that shares risks, responsibilities,

resources, and competencies, and involves a joint commitment to common tasks

and goals. Schemes such as social forestry programs, restoration of lakes and

canals and disaster management infrastructure facilities, etc. can be taken up

under this scheme.

Hybrid Models - Company utilizes a combination of two or more

implementation models to deliver various components in the community

development program.

9.10.4.1.6. CSR Activity Monitoring, Reporting and Continual Improvement

The CSR management team of the STPL should develop monthly, quarterly, half yearly

and annual status reports for adopting necessary corrective actions for continuous

improvement.

A suitable system to monitor the whole process with regard to the performance at the

field levels shall be established. This system can be developed within the CSR

department who will be assigned to do periodic evaluation. This process should be

intimated to the nominated Implementing Agencies in their work order. The monitoring

and evaluation shall be taken at different levels i.e. CSR department, with Implementing

Agencies, within community, etc. The various field functionaries would be familiarized

with the basics of this reporting system as well as their role and responsibility. The





Page C9-295

Monitoring and Evaluation team’s responsibilities are as follows: Periodic Progress

Reports, Necessity and the periodicity of such reports, Output to be generated,

Evaluation, Improvement / Development of Implementation process, Analyzing

deviations to the said objectives, Focusing on Qualitative aspects in progress of project

and Identifying Changes / Milestones in development

Annual bench mark surveys can be carried out with selected villages to assess the

overall outcome and benefits of the CSR programs implemented in the respective areas

as per the pre defined CSR objectives. The findings of the study can be compared with

the ratings prior to the entry of development activities. The following parameters can

be considered for evaluating the overall outcome and performance of the community

development programs implemented in a specific period:

1. Increase income level of the BPL families,

2. Increase in literacy level,

3. Reduction in infant mortality and ailments of humans and cattle,

4. Increase in fish production,

5. Reduced population migration,

6. Increased sanitation and drinking water facilities etc.

Other indicative parameters that shall be included in the evaluation of the overall

performance of the CSR program are listed hereunder:

• Number of protests, demonstrations, complaint letters, and compensation

requests

• Number of community participants in consultation meetings

• Closures of activities due to a disturbance by the community/local stakeholders

• Quantity of work applications received from the community/local stakeholders

• Incidents (related to communities or other stakeholders) affecting company

property or personnel

• Number of problems or grievances identified by local stakeholders

• Quantity—and the time period of delays in implementing the schemes

• Community sentiment surrounding current community development initiatives

(i.e., Do they fulfill needs and expectations?)

• Effectiveness of public consultation activities (i.e., Do local people feel their

participation has value?)

• Degree of trust felt by the community toward the company (and vice versa)





Page C9-296

• Positions taken by the local government regarding decisions that affect the

company

• Community members say they are better off as the result of the company’s

presence

• Number of positive and negative press articles about the company

If measuring value of the community development is important, communicating that

value is equally important. For benefits derived from community development to be

optimized, stakeholders at the local, regional, and international levels need to know

about these investments and the value they create. The annual reports should address

the community development programs implemented, impact on the business, the

outcome and benefits of schemes to local villagers and community. Various

communication models can be adopted such as Television, road, booklets and

magazines, press meets and conferences, seminars and the company website.

9.11. Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management

The estimated cost of the various items under environmental management programs

will be in the order of 1300 Cr. Break-up of the budget for the proposed project

environmental management programmes are presented in Table 9.15.

Table 9-15 Proposed Budget for Environmental Management Plan

Item Capital Cost,

(Rs Cr.) Electrostatic Precipitator 202.88

Chimney 65.00 Cooling Tower incl. Civil Works 123.78 Ash handling incl. AWRS 250.96 Ash Dyke-First 9 Years 85.20

Dust Extraction & Suppression System 5.00 DM Plant waste treatment systems 5.00 Sewerage collection, treatment & disposal

4.00

Environmental Lab, equipment 1.50 Landscaping, Green Belt and Habitat Conservation

5.00

FGD System 563.00

Total 1311.32




Chapter 10-Conclusion

Page C10-297

10. CONCLUSION

Based on the information stated in the project report of STPL and also an independent

assessment on the baseline environmental status and also prediction of impacts the

following conclusions are made by the EIA consulting organization and study team:

The proposed power plant will be adopting the new power plant regulations by

installing efficient pollution control systems and FGD and hence the emissions of

SO2 from the power plant will be several folds lower than that of the current

power plant emission scenario in India. This will further help to achieve very low

ground level concentration of SO2, NOx and PM during the operational phase

without any appreciable change from the background levels.

The proposed facility will utilize the lowest possible water consumption of 2.5

m3/MWHR as per the new power plant regulations and also it has been

proposed to completely recyle and reuse the waste water generated from the

plant. Hence the possible impacts on the ecological and biological environment in

the surface water bodies in the region will be insignificant.

STPL intends to spend about Rs. 61 Cr towards various CSR programs in 10 to 15

years, which will benefit the local people in several folds and the social and

cultural environmental will be enhanced.

The project will given an impetus to induced industrial growth in region.

The proposed project is structured to be in line with the requirements of

MoEF&CC/CPCB.

Thus, it can be concluded that with the judicious and proper implementation of the

pollution control and mitigation measures, the proposed project can proceed without

any significant negative impact on the environment.




Chapter 11-Disclosure of Consultants

Page C11-298

11. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

11.1. Introduction

The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan

(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. The studies

have been carried out by M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited, Chennai,

India, with technical report from NTPC.

The profiles of the Consultants are given below:

11.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant

M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd (CMSRSL) is a joint venture between the

Murugappa group, India and Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Group, Japan. CMSRSL is an

ISO 9001:2008 certified company. CMSRSL offers safety and environmental consulting

services across Indian, Middle East and East Asian countries. CMSRL consists of six

consulting domains such as environmental engineering and management, process

safety, fire safety, electrical safety, construction safety and logistics risk assessment.

CMSRSL is an NABET accredited EIA consulting organization for undertaking EIA

studies in the following sectors: paper and pulp, thermal power plants, petroleum

refineries, petrochemical complex, chemical fertilizers, synthetic organic chemical

industries, ports and harbours and area development projects. CMSRSL has offered

environmental and safety related consulting services for more than 5000 clients during

last decade.

11.2.1. Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study

1 Mr V S Bhaskar EIA Coordinator – Thermal Power Plants. Functional Area Expert(FAE) - Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling and Prediction Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Noise / Vibration Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Risk & Hazards Management

2 Mr. D. Ravishankar Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring and Control Functional Area Expert FAE –Solid & Hazardous Waste





Page C11-299

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study Management

3 Mr.T.P.Natesan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Land Use, Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation

4 Mr. I.Sivaramakrishnan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

5 Dr.T.Balakrishnan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

6 Ms. Sathya. S Functional Area Expert (FAE) – MSW and Team Member 7 Dr.Mangalam

Balasubramanian Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

8 Mr. C S Karthick Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

9 Mr. Pudi Rama Satya Kamesh

Associate Functional Area Expert (AFAE)- Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring and Control and Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling and Prediction

10 Mr.Ganta Srikanth Associate Functional Area Expert (AFAE)- Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts and Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring and Control

11.2.2. Other Technical Team Members

S.No. Technical Members 1 Ms. Saumya Abraham

2 Mr.Mahendra.B

11.2.3. External Labs/Agencies involved in EIA Study

1 Base line Environmental data – Ambient air Quality, Water, Soil and Noise sampling & analysis.

Environment Protection Training & Research Institute (EPTRI) (Apr – Jun 2008)


M/s. AES Laboratories Pvt Ltd (March 2015 to May 2015)


M/s. AES Laboratories Pvt Ltd (17th May to 15th June 2016)





Page C11-300

NABET Certificate

sjvn thermal private limited

Documents